Home

HP 8568B User's Manual

1. Figure 3 8 Location of A1A2 Components 32 Using a non metallic alignment tool center the front panel FOCUS control and adjust ALA2R36 ASTIG and A1A3R14 FOCUS LIMIT for a sharp focused dot on the CRT display 33 Adjust ALA2R35 INT LIMIT until the dot just disappears 3 34 Adjustments 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below 34 On the oscilloscope adjust the channel 1 offset voltage as necessary to measure the peak to peak CRT cut off voltage V at 1 5 See Figure 3 9 This peak to peak voltage should be between 45 75 Vp p Note this voltage for use in step 39 Vp p running H 10 0 V div ioffset 60 00 v 1100 1 de DIT TT DET MEME CUOI erem eee 50 0 us div 1 f 75 00 v Figure 3 9 CRT Cut O ff Voltage 35 Connect a separate function generator to each of the X and Y inputs of the Display Adjustment Board as shown in Figure 3 5 Set the function generators as follows X input oo herding LORS LA ss X QS e000 KHZ 2 2 Mp c LEM cm sine amplitude isses 2Vp p 0 2 Y input J2 frequenCy 2 sme RE uie RANA iun 1 kHz Wd S08 aou cul use Meee icc Ua hp mpi esed a pcne sin
2. ces redeo morie ungui G ee eS gt Adjustments 3 21 Table 3 5 Standard Value Replacement 0 125 Resistors continued Type Fixed Film Range 10 to 464K Ohms Wattage 0 125 at 125 C Tolerance 1 0 Value 0 HP Part Number CD Value 0 HP Fart Number 0698 3136 0698 3157 0757 0199 0698 3158 0698 3159 0698 3449 0698 3160 0757 0123 0698 3161 0698 3450 0698 3162 0757 0458 0757 0459 0757 0460 0757 046 1 0757 0462 0757 0463 0757 0464 0757 0465 0757 0466 0757 0467 0698 345 1 0698 3452 0757 0470 0698 3243 0698 3453 0698 3454 0698 3266 0698 3455 0698 3456 0698 3457 0698 3458 0698 3459 0698 3460 0698 3260 4 OO DO OW COD FW c 00 410 tn p tA 3 22 Adjustments Table 3 6 Standard Value Replacement 0 5 Resistors Type Fixed Film Range 10 to 1 47M Ohms Wattage 0 5 at 125 C Tolerance 1 0 Value 0 HP Part Number Value 0 HP Fart Number gt 0757 0984 0698 3404 0575 0985 0698 3405 0757 0986 0698 0090 0757 0001 0757 0814 0698 3388 0757 0815 0757 0989 0757 0158 0698 3389 0757 0816 0698 3390 0757 0817 0698 3391 0757 0818 0698 3392 0757 0819 0757 0003 0757 0159 0698 3393 0757 0820 0698 3394 0757 082 1 0698 3395 0698 3406 0698 3396 0757 1078 0698 3397 0757 0873 0698 3398 0698 0089 0757 1000 0698 3407 0
3. 2 00 V Offset 11 Connect the output of the Pulse Function Generator to J1 X input on the Display Adjustment PC board in the A3A2 slot as shown in Figure 3 23 Note The pulse function generators output must be terminated with 50 ohms Use a BNC tee a 500 termination and a BNC female to SMB female adapter Install the 500 termination as close to the Display Adjustment PC Board as possible 3 54 Adjustments 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 12 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press CHAN Channel T 2s eu reto its hts o a on amplitude scale n teens 10 0 V div gt pe wo 25 000 0 V bebe pee Men Here Boome on amplitude scale 0 cece eee cece ene eee 10 0 V div oh atic e 60 000 0 V Press TRIG SOULC OS ro MR A ER n T E 1 IT ah dene 25 0000 V Press TIME BASE tume scalez c res othe P 50 0 ns div delay ete cete etie e CER o DE RC ans 125 000 ns Press DISPLAY connect dots x coe pde reed tret taedas d on Press SHOW 13 Set the spectrum analyzer s front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise and then set the LINE switch to ON 14 The X deflection and X deflection waveforms should be superimposed on the oscillosco
4. RF INPUT Figure 3 59 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments Setup Spectrum Analyzer HP 8566A B Amplifier 35m exo suele nue rs ERR bate meee HP 8447F Digital Voltmeter DVM HP 3456A Tes SMB Male x once VUE dices RUD QURCBU HP 1250 0670 Adapters N m to 1250 1250 Cables BNC cable 122 cm 48 in 2 required 10503A BNC to SMB Snap On cable 2 required 85680 60093 Adjustments 3 107 14 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments 3 108 Adjustments Procedure 1 10 12 13 14 Place instrument on right side with IF Display Section facing right as shown in Figure 3 59 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET Connect DVM to A7TP1 and ground to A22TP12 Key in center rREauENcv 17 6 MHz and Frequency span Hz on HP 8568B Adjust A7 PLO A7C3 for DVM indication between 5 2 V dc and 6 0 V dc See Figure 3 60 for location of adjustment A7249 MHz PHASE LOCK OSCILLATOR C3 PLO ADJUST L2 PLO ADJUST Li7 500 KHz TRAP L15 500 KHz TRAP Figure 3 60 Location of 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments Key in CENTER Frequency 37 1 MHz DVM indication should be between 12 9 V dc
5. HP 5334A B Cables BNC cable 122 cm 48 in 2 required HP 10503A Adjustments 3 95 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2840A and Below also 3217A05568 and Above 3 96 Adjustments Procedure Note Note Note The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously not in STANDBY for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator to stabilize Adjustment should not be attempted before the oscillator is allowed to reach its specified aging rate Failure to allow sufficient stabilization time could result in oscillator misadjustment The A27A1 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator HP P N 0960 0477 will typically reach its specified aging rate again within 72 hours after being switched off for a period of up to 24 hours If extreme environmental conditions were encountered during storage or shipment i e mechanical shock temperature extremes the oscillator could require up to 30 days to achieve its specified aging rate 1 Set the rear panel FREQ REFERENCE switch on the spectrum analyzer RF Section to INT The 22 Vdc STANDBY supply provides power to the heater circuit in the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard assembly whenever line power is applied to the RF Section This allows the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard oven to remain at thermal equilibrium minimizing frequency drift due to temperature variations The OVEN
6. 29 MHz 4 dBm Readjust the signal amplitude as necessary to position the peak of the displayed 29 MHz signal at the top CRT graticule line 15 Set the controls of the spectrum analyzer as follows CENTER FREQUENCY seeeeeeeee eee 29 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN isset e iet qo 500 Hz 16 On the spectrum analyzer key in DISPLAY LINE ENTER 100 dBm MARKER Peak sEARcH to position a marker 0n the peak of the displayed 29 MHz signal 17 On the frequency synthesizer adjust the signal amplitude for a marker indication of 20 00 dBm 18 On the spectrum analyzer key in cENrER Frequency 30 MHz MARKER sEaRcH to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 30 MHz signal 19 On the synthesized sweeper adjust the signal power level for a marker indication of 20 00 dBm 2 52 Performance Tests AMP TU DEIB 10 20 40 50 60 70 15 Spurious Responses Test Note If unable to locate intermodulation distortion products temporarily increase output power level of frequency synthesizer and synthesized sweeper by 10 dB Return the output power level of both signal sources to the previous settings before making distortion measurements 20 On the spectrum analyzer key in MARKER CENTER FREQUENCY 31 MHz MARKER peak_searcH to position a marker at the peak of the 31 MHz third order intermodulation product The response should be below the display l
7. Q Test 20 1st LO Output Amplitude Test Step 4 1st LO Output Level Min Measured Max Performance Tests 2 91 Test 21 Frequency Reference Error Test Step Description Min Measured Max Frequency initial Frequency after 24 hours Difference between 4 and 5 2 92 Performance Tests Adjustments Introduction The procedures in this section are for the adjustment of the instrument s electrical performance characteristics Warning The procedures require access to the interior of the instrument and therefore should only be performed by qualified service personnel Refer to Safety Considerations in this introduction Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments 8 10 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below 3 10 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above 3 10 Preliminary Display Adjustment SN 3001A and Below 3 10 Preliminary Display Adjustment SN 3004A and Above 3 10 Final Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below 3 10 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 3 10 Log Amplifier Adjustments 8 9 10 Video Processor Adjustments 3 10 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 8 10 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 3 10 dB Bandwidth Adjustment
8. 2 1 1 Figure 6 4 IF Section Top View SN 3001A and Below Major Assembly and Component locations 6 7 ATA10C1 ATA6 7 148 A1A9 Fld ATTI ATA10CA4 A1A10C2 ATA10C3 A1V1 A1A3 0 0 0 Figure 6 5 IF Section Top View SN 3004A and Above 6 8 Major Assembly and Component locations gi ajaja OO ATVI Us wg wi A1A1 w2 W8 Figure 6 6 IF Section Front View Major Assembly and Component locations 6 9 A4A10 w8 wa A3A10 Figure 6 7 IF Section Bottom View 6 10 Major Assembly and Component locations w29 w24 W28 32 5 3004A and above 1
9. D a 20 og 0008 DIGITAL VOLTMETER 2 5 SPECTRUM ANALYZER Figure 3 12 High Voltage Adjustment Setup 3 Set the DVM to the 100V range and connect the DVM to 1 120V without the high voltage probe See Figure 3 13 The accuracy of the high voltage probe is specified for a probe connected to a dc voltmeter with 10 MO input resistance HP 3456A and HP 3455A digital voltmeters have a 10 MQ input resistance on the 100 V and 1000 V ranges All measurements in this procedure should be performed with DVM manually set to the 100 V range 400 000 on the HP 34564 display Warning Warning 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above 1 8051 46v UNREG A1A7TP3 AIASHIGH VOLTAGE REGULATOR A1A6R103 Figure 3 13 Location of High Voltage Adjustments Set the LINE switch to ON Set the front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise CRT beam at cut off to prevent possible damage to the CRT Note the DVM indication at ALA7TP3 DVM Indication Connect the high voltage probe to the DVM and connect the probe to 1 Note the DVM indication DVM Indication Divide the DVM indication in step 7 by the DVM indication in step 5 This gives the calibration factor needed to compensate for high voltage probe error Calibration Factor
10. HP 3456A Digitizing Oscilloscope HP 54501A 1 Place instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 89 with top and A3 Digital Storage cover removed 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR enser 3 Press TRACE A BLANK 4 Adjust A8A3R4 X GAIN and A3A3R5 Y GAIN to place graticule information completely on CRT See Figure 3 90 for location of adjustment Adjustments 3 145 25 Digital Storage Display Adjustments 11 12 3 146 Adjustments A3A3 ASA INTENSITY LINE TRIGGER CONTROL GENERATOR R8 YSL R7 XSL R6 XLL R4 X GAIN R1 X EXP R5 Y GAIN R43 YOS R2 Y EXP R12 R51 R50 R34 LL THRESH Y S amp H BAL XS amp H BA SWP OFFSET 3 6 1 eee 5 ram ae ee ay A 2355 Sil 5 2 312 a orol DO mom iim LULL Meo 1 Figure 3 90 Location of Digital Storage Display Adjustments Adjust A8A2R12 LL THRESH fully clockwise See Figure 3 90 for location of adjustment Adjust XLL so that horizontal graticule lines just meet the vertical graticule lines at the left and right sides of the graticule See Figure 3 90 for location of adju
11. meat Mea 6 3 SN ICH cn wheter 6 3 P5 RHOD a 6 3 SOc cia ee Mc OQ N odd Rds das 6 3 AISAT 6 2 Lor M n 6 2 Levi dor dp CDL Od GL LL LL 6 2 6 3 6 3 9 6 3 PAM ea at E 6 3 ue th cc ae 6 3 6 3 DENG poh pct est 6 3 1 pase cte ee o oe 6 3 2 ce ev re HET RETE EC ker er yd 6 3 Dor acne wana 6 1 6 3 6 2 Major Assembly and Component locations ADORI Set deci odh hari incl 6 3 A26F4 6 3 6 3 CUT DRM 6 3 Oy cle te es a Mtl hy 6 3 tee ac 6 3 OAT a a EE 6 3 6 3 IO DEMNM TK 6 3 marte aiu S 6 2 6 3 i menses VOLUMINE VOLUMES MOL EON 6 1 6 3 D REM lydia ln etal that 6 1 6 3 COD 6 1 6 3 6 1 6 3 Seed Gere Or 6 1 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 3 WL 6 2 Woo pu se D o e ida d 6 2 MORE tes aay ELEME LAE 6 2 VUE eins 6 2 6 2
12. 2 21 2 12 IF Gain Uncertainty 10 dB Steps 2 35 2 13 IF Gain Uncertainty 2 dB Steps 2 36 2 14 IF Gain Uncertainty 0 1 dB Steps 2 38 2 15 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty 2 40 2 16 Log Amplitude Fidelity 2 4 2 17 Linear Amplitude 2 44 2 18 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy 20 ms 2 65 3 1 Adjustment Cross Reference 2 33 3 2 Adjustable Components 3 5 3 3 Factory Selected Components 3 13 3 4 Standard Value Replacement Capacitors 3 20 3 5 Standard Value Replacement 0 125 Resistors 3 21 3 6 Standard Value Replacement 0 5 Resistors 3 23 3 5 Initial Adjustment Positions 3 59 3 6 Initial Adjustment Positions 2 3 62 3 7 Parts for Low Noise DC Supply 3 150 3 8 Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for A4A4 and A4A8 21 4 MHz 3 151 3 9 Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for A4A7 3JMHZ so ase ag oC RR ARS E 3 151 4 1 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy 4 3 4 2 Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy 4 8 4 3 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy 4 9 4 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity 4 12 4 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity 4 15 4 6 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty 4 17 5 1 Log Amplitude Fidelity 10 Hz RBW Option 857 5 4 5 2 Log A
13. 27 2 Figure 3 55 Location of A27A2 Adjustment On the Frequency Counter select a 10 second gate time by pressing 10 GATE TIME The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10 0 MHz with a resolution of 0 001 Hz 1 mHz Wait at least 2 gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle and then adjust the FREQ ADJ capacitor on the A27A2 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator for a stable Frequency Counter indication of 0 000 Frequency Correction Factor 0 010 Hz Replace the RF Section bottom cover and reconnect the short jumper cable between the FREQ REFERENCE INT and EXT connectors 13 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Reference Related Performance Test Description Equipment RF Sectio 13 20 MHz Reference Adjustments n A16 20 MHz Reference Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test The 20 MHz output is peaked and amplitude checked for proper level The INTERNAL REFERENCE output level is then checked for proper output level as compared to input from A27 Time Base Finally the COMB DRIVE and CAL OUTPUT are adjusted for proper power levels DIGITIZ SPECTRUM ANALYZER SYNTHESIZER LEVEL OU e EOS E GENERATOR C EA AA OSCILLOSCOPE EEE CH 1 INPUT oa nm ooo ooo moaaa ges om og ooo ggg o
14. mHz Reading 5 _______ mHz Reading 6 ____ mHz Reading 7 ____ mHz Position the spectrum analyzer on its right side as shown in Figure 3 54 and remove the bottom cover Typically the frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard will shift slightly when the spectrum analyzer is reoriented Record this shifted frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard Reading 8 ___ mHz Subtract the shifted frequency reading in step 8 from the last recorded frequency in step 7 This gives the frequency correction factor needed to adjust the 27 10 MHz Frequency Standard Frequency Correction Factor mHz Adjustments 3 101 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2848A to 3217A05567 3 102 Adjustments Note 15 On the Frequency Counter select a 1 second gate time by pressing 1 GATE TIME The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10 0 MHz with a resolution of 0 01 Hz 10 mHz Do not use a metal adjustment tool to tune an oven controlled crystal oscillator OCXO The metal will conduct heat away from the oscillator circuit shifting the operating conditions 16 17 18 19 Use nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the 18 turn FREQ ADJ capacitor on the A27A2 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator for a Frequency Counter indication of 0 00 Hz See Figure 3 55 for the location of the 27 2 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator RF Section bottom view
15. 125 000 ns 375 000 ns 50 0 ns div 4 f 5000 v Figure 3 22 50V Signal Adjust ALA2R22 HF GAIN and A1A2CI10 for minimum overshoot on rise and minimum rise and fall times of the pulse waveform Use the oscilloscope markers to measure the risetime falltime and percent overshoot of the pulse waveform Rise and falltimes should be less than 50 ns and 90 ns respectively Overshoot on the rise should be less than 596 approximately 0 4 divisions Set the spectrum analyzer s LINE switch to STANDBY and center potentiometers A1A4R7 X POSN and A1A5R7 Y POSN Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe from the spectrum analyzer Remove the Display Adjustment PC board from the A3A2 slot and reinstall the A3A2 Intensity Control Assembly Replace the A3 Section cover and cables Perform Adjustment Procedure 4 Final Display Adjustment SN 3001A and Below Adjustments 3 51 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above Reference Note Note Description Caution Equipment 3 52 Adjustments 1 1 Keyboard Al A2 X Y Z Axis Amplifier Adjustment Procedure 2 High Voltage Adjustment should be performed before performing the following adjustment procedure Perform this adjustment only if components have been replaced on the 1 2 X Y Z Axis Amplifier Assembly Components R117 R217 R308 C104 C109 C204 C209 and C307 are factory adjusted and normally do not require readjus
16. 19 Connect the oscilloscope s channel 1 probe to A1A5E1 and the channel 4 probe to ALAD5E2 See Figure 3 18 for the location of the test points Connect the output of the pulse function generator to J2 Y input on the Display Adjustment PC board in the A3A2 slot 20 The Y Deflection Amplifier is identical to the X Deflection Amplifier Repeat steps 12 through 18 for the Y Deflection Amplifier using R7 R27 R28 C10 and C11 respectively Pulse Response of 21 Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 4 probe from the spectrum Control Gate Z analyzer Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to A1A2TP2 Amplifier to BLANK and connect the probe s ground lead to chassis ground Input 22 On the oscilloscope press RECALL CLEAR to perform a soft reset 23 Press CHAN CHANNEL 1 on more preset probe and use the front panel knob to set the probe to 10 00 1 Press more 24 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press CHAN amplitude scale eee eee ee 10 0 V div Offset caster tsk Sein sae SR i es Ra 25 0000 V Press TIME BASE time scale tee eee epee VERE RES 50 0 ns div delay ou A sel ees 125 000 ns Press TRIG Jp 5 00000 V Press DISPLAY Connect tret ede a e on Press SHOW 25 Connect the output of the Pulse Function Generator to J3 Z input on the Display Adjustment PC Board in the A3A2 slot Set the board s switch to the down position N
17. 3 Calibrate power meter and sensor Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 35 4 Observe the meter indication as the analyzer makes a complete sweep The indication should be gt 4 dBm across the full sweep range dBm 5 Replace 50 ohm terminator on IST LO OUTPUT 21 Frequency Reference Error Test 21 Frequency Reference Error Test Related Adjustment Specification Description Note Time Base Adjustment Aging Rate lt 1 x 10 day and 2 5 x 1077 year attained after 30 days warmup from cold start at 25 Temperature Stability lt 7 x 10 0 to 55 C Frequency is within 1 x 1078 of final stabilized frequency within 30 minutes The frequency of the spectrum analyzer time base oscillator is measured directly using a frequency counter locked to a frequency reference which has an aging rate less than one tenth that of the time base specification After a 30 day warmup period a frequency measurement is made The analyzer is left undisturbed for a 24 hour period and a second reading is taken The frequency change over this 24 hour period must be less than one part in 10 This test requires that the spectrum analyzer be turned on not in STANDBY for a period of 30 days to ensure that the frequency reference attains its aging rate However after aging rate is attained the frequency reference typically attains aging rate again in 72 hours of operation after being off for a period not exceeding 24
18. 6 4 65 6 4 6 5 PCR RO NUR RUM A TC MN OCR MCHA BNO 6 4 6 5 ET ct Seals SONORA acs ns cecal 6 4 6 5 RANG MACC AE 6 4 6 5 JUL BAIN DN DURAN 6 4 6 5 TOP a RT CE eR 6 4 6 5 PENNE 6 4 6 5 NM MM 6 7 C diate de 6 6 w 66 T e estates cea ta atts cece ane 6 4 Ncc c t 6 4 6 6 6 7 T MN AR ANM MEME AR MEM 6 6 6 4 6 5 6 7 Major Assembly and Component locations 6 1 poo EE 6 7 6 7 ET Te ER ATE ERT PET 6 7 28 M 6 7 os eoe ales oleate ok ale oleate oleae altel ole tes 6 7 o ADMIRED DE dR daa ede dvhe 6 7 RF Section Figure rere a See Index Dec aa Seep EUN 6 2 ADAD ect Ack th 6 2 6 2 RI er erue cabe aa bod ale 6 2 6 2 Aw 6 2 IGN NAP I N 6 3 DOS cr Pace eer ec ME MEN 6 3 ABA acu esee ev eterne nM 6 3 MM DH ROME EUM nates 6 2 6 2 ADSL tesa 6 2 6 3 Ns 6 3 PU EORR Be et tn a 6 3 ui ud ieee 6 3 6 3 10 MANOS 6 3 Lug E A EHI MEET 6 3 UTC Me OUR OCC BM OCCASU CNN 6 3 AG NOMAS CORN 6 3 6 3 6 3 PAM 6 3
19. A6A12R98 Sets SWEEP TUNE OUT zero indication A6A12R113 9V Sets 9 V and 9 V dc reference supplies 2 400 MHz OUT Peaks 400 MHz output signal 2 2 400 MHz OUT Peaks 400 MHz output signal 2 400 MHz OUT Peaks 400 MHz output signal 2 4 100 MHz Adjusts VCXO frequency A7A4A1A1C1 FREQ ADJUST Adjusts VCO frequency 1 1 5 PWR ADJUST Adjusts VCO output level A8R2 22V ADJUST Sets 22 V supply voltage AIOAIL7 50 kHz NULL Nulls 50 kHz output A10A1L8 50 kHz NULL Nulls 50 KHz output A10A3L11 165 MHz NULL Nulls signal at 165 MHz A10A3L12 160 MHz NULL Nulls signal at 160 MHz A10A3L13 170 MHz NULL Nulls signal at 170 MHz A10A4C50 160 MHz PEAK Peaks 160 MHz output signal A10A4L11 VCO ADJ Adjusts PLL3 VCO frequency A10A4L16 160 MHz PEAK Peaks 160 MHz output signal A10A4L17 160 MHz PEAK Peaks 160 MHz output signal A10A5R2 150 MHz ADJ Adjusts VCO TUNE voltage at 150 MHz A10A5R4 100 MHz ADJ Adjusts VCO TUNE voltage at 100 MHz A1OA8R4 2 MHz Sets discriminator pretune at 0 2 MHz A10A8R9 3 MHz Sets discriminator pretune at 0 3 MHz ALOA8R25 5 MHz SCAN Adjusts frequency span accuracy 20 30 sweep A10A8R27 5 MHz SCAN Adjusts frequency span accuracy 20 30 sweep AI 1A2R2 3 ATE BIAS ADJ Adjusts CIA amplifier gate biasing 3 10 Adjustments Table 3 2 Components continued D esignator Name N umher Al1A5C1 IMPEDANCE Optimizes sampler output MATCH
20. Adjust A4A4C41 LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak See Figure 3 41 for location of adjustment Key in PEAK search MARKER and adjust LC DIP again to offset the signal peak approximately 17 kHz to the left This is done to compensate for the effect of placing the board on extenders If unable to achieve a dip in signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A4RI16 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Remove short from A4A4TP3 and short A4A4TP8 to ground Adjust A4A4C43 LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak See Figure 3 41 for location of adjustment Key in PEAK SEARCH MARKER In and adjust C43 LC DIP again to offset the signal peak approximately 17 kHz to the left If unable to achieve a dip in signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A4R60 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Set LINE switch to STANDBY Reinstall A4A4 Bandwidth Filter without extenders Short A4A4TP3 and A4A4TP8 to ground Remove A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter and install on extenders Reconnect cable 97 to A4A8J1 and reconnect cable 89 to A4A6J1 Set LINE switch to ON Press INSTR PRESET Key in center FREQUENCY 20 MHz RES BW 100 kHz FREQUENCY sPAN MHz ATTEN 0 dB and LOG enter dB DIV 2 dB Short A4A8TP6 to ground Adjust A4A8C66 LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak See Figure 3 43 for location of adjustment Key in PEAK seancH MARKER and adjust LC DIP again
21. Disconnect the high voltage probe from AIATTP3 Set the LINE switch to STANDBY Remove the ac line cord from both instrument sections The MAINS power on indicator A1A8DS1 red LED should be completely off before proceeding with this procedure See Figure 3 13 The indicator will remain lit for several seconds after the ac line cord has been removed and will go out slowly the light becomes dimmer until it is completely out With the protective cover removed in the following step do not place hands near the A1A3 High Voltage assembly High voltage approximately 2400 V dc can present even when the ac line cord is disconnected 10 Wait at least one minute for capacitors to discharge to a safe level Adjustments 3 41 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above Warning 3 42 Adjustments 11 Remove the protective cover from the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly A label should be visible on the 1 1 High Voltage Assembly A1A3AI is mounted on the non component side of the High Voltage Regulator Assembly as shown in Figure 3 14 Record the voltage listed on the label for use in step 15 In cases where more than one voltage is listed on this label record the value which is closest to 2400 Vdc V dc With power supplied to the instrument ALA3TP2A is at a voltage level of approximately 2400 V dc Be extremely careful 12 13 14 15 Connect the high voltage probe to A1A3TP2A
22. 7 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test Specification Description Equipment Procedure 2 20 Performance Tests uncorrected 1 0 dB over 10 dB to 70 dB range The input attenuator is tested over its 10 dB to 70 dB range using an RF substitution method A calibrated signal source at 20 MHz provides the substitution FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER l oo o E Coo oo 00 00 OO SIONAL INPUT 2 Figure 2 9 Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test Setup Frequency Synthesizer 0 000 cece eee eee HP 3335A Adapter Type N m to BNC HP 1250 0780 1 Press on the spectrum analyzer 2 Key in analyzer settings as follows 20 MHz A 100 kHz RHENUM EAE 50 dBm dora esce Du M AE 30 kHz OHNE AC 100 Hz 3 Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 20 0 MHz and an amplitude of 52 dBm 4 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 9 5 Press LOG and key in 1 dB per division 7 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test 6 Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH A 7 Set ATTEN REFERENCE reve and frequency synthesizer amplitude according to Table 2 1 1 At each setting press MARKER PEAK sEARcH and record the deviation from the 10 dB setting from the MARKER A amplitude readout see Figure 2 10 The deviation should not exceed
23. Performance Tests Test 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 4 4 Test 5 Impulse and Resolution Selectivity Test 4 13 Test 6 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test i 4 16 Adjustment Procedure Adjustment 9 Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments 4 26 Option 462 4 1 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Related Adjustment 6 Specification dB Bandwidth Adjustments 20 3 MHz bandwidth 10 30 Hz to 1 MHz bandwidths 50 0 10 Hz bandwidth 30 kHz and 100 kHz bandwidth accuracy figures only applicable lt 90 Relative Humidity lt 40 C Description 6 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting is measured with the MARKER function to determine bandwidth accuracy The CAL OUTPUT is used for a stable signal source Equipment None required Procedure 1 2 3 4 2 Option 462 Press INSTR PRESET Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 Key in spectrum analyzer settings as follows CENTER 20 MHZ FREQUENCY re eee 5 MHz 3 MHz 10 dBm Press SCALE LIN pushbutton Press SHIFT AUTO resolution bandwidth for units in dBm Adjust REFERENCE LeveL to position peak of signal trace at or just below reference level top graticule line P
24. fl O dB 3 MHz bandwidth 30 kHz and 100 kHz bandwidth switching uncertainty figures only applicable lt 90 Relative Humidity The CAL OUTPUT signal is applied to the input of the spectrum analyzer The deviation in peak amplitude of the signal trace is then measured as each resolution bandwidth filter is switched in None Required Press WSTRPRESED 2 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 3 Key in the following control settings CENTER FREQUENGY tins co Gan ERO Coa Lors Pb pr 20 MHz FBEGUENGY bt a edel peces 5 MHz REFERENNCE LEVEL cene eme renes dBm E ab setae uela tup MHz 4 Press LOG Enter dB DIV and key in 1 dB Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH A 5 Press 6 Key in settings according to Table 2 10 Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH at each setting then read the amplitude deviation from the MARKER A readout at the upper right of the display see Figure 2 8 The allowable deviation for each resolution bandwidth setting is shown in the table 6 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test 2 6 LO a 8 E 2 HL 2 09 FES Ow 3 Miz Vow 1 20 Figure 2 8 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement Table 2 10 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Deviation Allowable MKR A Deviation Readout dB dB 0 ref Performance Tests 2 19
25. 47 48 49 50 51 25 Digital Storage Display Adjustments Adjust A8A3R5 Y GAIN to align the top graticule line with the fast sweep signal trace Press INSTR PRESET TRACE A BLANK Set A3A2R12 LL THRESH fully clockwise Adjust XLL and A3A3R9 YLL to align horizontal and vertical lines so that each line meets the edge line right left top or bottom but does not overshoot Adjust A3A2R12 LL THRESH fully counterclockwise Adjust XSL and A3A348 YSL to align horizontal and vertical graticule lines so that each line meets the edge line right left top or bottom but does not overshoot Adjust A3A2R12 LL THRESH clockwise until all graticule lines switch over to long lines This is indicated by a noticeable increase in graticule line intensity All graticule lines should increase in intensity Press INSTR PRESET Key in MARKER NORMAL Adjust X EXP to center the letter in CRT annotation in upper left corner of display over the left edge graticule line Adjust 2 Y EXP to align the remainder of the CRT annotation so that the upper annotation MARKER data is above the top graticule line and the lower annotation START and STOP data is below the bottom graticule line Adjust for equal spacing above and below the graticule pattern Adjustments 3 149 Low Noise DC The Low Noise DC Supply shown in Figure 3 93 can be constructed Supply
26. 6 If the signal at A4A6A2P1 9 needs adjusting change A4A6A2R33 Decreasing R33 ten percent increases the signal level by 0 6 dB Refer to Table 3 3 for the acceptable range of values for A4A6A2R33 3 94 Adjustments 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2840A and Below also 3217A05568 and Above Np BB 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2840A and Below also 3217A05568 and Above Reference RF Section A27A1 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator Related Performance Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Test Description The frequency of the internal 10 MHz Frequency Standard is compared to a known frequency standard and adjusted for minimum frequency error This procedure does not adjust the short term stability or long term stability of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator which are determined by characteristics of the particular oscillator and the environmental and warmup conditions to which it has been recently exposed The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously not in STANDBY for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize FREQ REFERENCE O 55 oono ob TIMEBASE FREQUENCY COUNTER in out EN FREQUENCY STANDARD oovan ooa ua Equipment Frequency Standard HP 5061B Frequency Counter
27. Adj Equipment Substitution Model Test METERS Digital Voltmeter High Voltage Probe Power Meter Power Sensor Power Sensor AMPLIFIERS Amplifier ATTENUATORS 10 dB Step Attenuator 1 dB Step Attenuator 10 dB Attenuator Resolution 0 1 mV HP 3456A Range 0 Vde to 100 Vdc or Input Impedance 100 V Range 10 MQ HP 3455A HP IB Compatible 1000 1 Divider HP 34111A Impedance 10MQ Range 20 dBm to 10 dBm HP436A Accuracy 0 02dB Frequency 01 to 18 GHz HP 8481A Compatible with HP 436A Power Meter Frequency 100 kHz to 4 2 GHz HP8482A Compatible with HP 436A Power Meter Frequency 269 MHz HP 8447F Gain gt 26 dB Steps 10 dB from 0 to 120 dB HP 355D H89 Frequency 20 MHz to 1500 MHz Calibrated to uncertainty error of 0 02 dB 0 01 dB 10 dB step at 20 MHz from 0 dB to 120 dB Steps 1 dB from 0 to 12 dB HP 355C H25 Frequency 20 MHz to 1500 MHz Calibrated to uncertainty error of 0 02 dB 0 01 dB 10 dB step at 20 MHz from 0 dB to 12 dB Frequency 200 Hz to 18 GHz HP 849 1B Type N Connectors Option 010 General Information 1 5 Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment 4 of 5 Recommended Perf Adj Instrument Critical Specifications for Equipment Substitution Model ATTENUATORS Cont d 20 dB Attenuator TERMINATIONS Termination FILTERS Low Pass Filter Low Pass Filter Low Pass Filter MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES Power Splitter Directional Bridge
28. Adjust A18 PLO ADJUST A18C8 for DVM indication of 6 5 V dc 0 5 V dc See Figure 3 62 for location of adjustment 15 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustment 182 7 5 MHz PHASE LOCK OSCILLATOR C8 PLO ADJUST Figure 3 62 Location of 275 MHz PLO Adjustment 7 Disconnect test equipment from instrument Adjustments 3 1 11 MS 16 Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment Reference Section A19 Second IF Amplifier A20 Third Converter Description A synthesized sweeper is used to inject a signal of 301 4 MHz at 20 dBm in to the 19 Second IF Amplifier The output of the amplifier is displayed on a scalar network analyzer The amplifier is adjusted for a bandpass of greater than 7 MHz and less than 14 MHz centered at 301 4 MHz Its gain should be greater than 14 dB and less than 17 dB A spectrum analyzer is used to view the output of the 280 MHz Oscillator on the A20 Third Converter and the oscillator is centered in its adjustment range SYNTHESIZED WEEPER Z AXIS BLANK MKRS SWEEP PULSE OUTPUT MODULAT ION NPUT 20 dB ATTENUATOR SWEEP IN MODULATOR 0 10V DRIVE o R A INPUT INPUT NETWORK ANALYZER SCALAR Figure 3 63 Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Setup Equipment Scalar Network analyzer Power Splitter POWER Meter 62 3 sadi qus qois qus qucd Ward
29. Frequency span 5 kHz SEARCH and MKR CF If necessary readjust by pressing REFERENCE LEVEL and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule Press MARKER and MARKER Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 7 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0 430 X Adjust A4A9R66 3 kHz for MKR A indication of 1 5 kHz while maintaining the marker at 0 430 X using the DATA knob Refer to Figure 4 8 for the adjustment location Press MARKER In Adjust the marker to the 7 3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X The CRT MKR 4 annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 3 kHz bandwidth The impulse bandwidth should be 3 00 0 30 kHz Option 462 4 29 Option 857 Introduction This chapter contains a modified performance test for Option 857 instruments When working on Option 857 instruments substitute the procedure in this chapter for the standard version contained in Chapter 2 The procedure included in this chapter is listed below Performance Tests Test 12 Amplitude Fidelity 2 43 Option 857 5 1 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Related Adjustment Log Amplifier Adjustments Specification Log Incremental dB dB over 0 to 80 dB display Cumulative 3 MHz to 30 Hz Resolution Bandwidth lt 0 6 dB max over 0 to 70 dB
30. The majority of the comb teeth should be above the 30 dBm Display Line No comb teeth should exceed 22 dBm and no comb teeth should be less than 36 dBm If unable to adjust comb teeth as described in previous steps proceed with the next step If comb teeth are adjusted properly do not perform the adjustments in the following steps Skip to step 21 Adjust A23A6 COMB PEAK A23A6L2 for maximum amplitude of comb teeth See Figure 3 83 for location of adjustment If the highest frequency comb tooth is too low 36 dBm remove screws from cover of A23A6 Comb Generator and lift cover from housing being careful not to break wire connections to internal circuit It will be necessary to hold cover away from housing while performing the following adjustment Adjust A23A6 HF PEAK A23A6C7 for maximum amplitude of the highest frequency comb tooth displayed comb tooth to far right of CRT See Figure 3 84 for location of adjustment Replace cover on A23A6 and install screws Go back to step 12 and proceed with adjustments Remove cable from between A23A65J2 and A23A3J 1 and reconnect instrument cables to connectors from which they were removed 23 Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments Reference Description Equipment 23 Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments 8 Analog to Digital Converter The Analog to Digital Ramp Converter is adjusted at zero and full scale by injecting a 0 V dc input and 10 V dc
31. c Readjust ALAGR103 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the voltage determined in step 15 19 Set the LINE switch to STANDBY Remove the ac line cord from each instrument section 20 Wait at least one minute for the MAINS power on indicator AlAS8DSI red LED to go out completely before proceeding 21 Disconnect the high voltage probe from A1A3TP2A 22 Replace the cover on the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly 23 The High Voltage adjustments are now completed If the AlA2 assembly has been repaired or replaced perform adjustment procedure 3 Preliminary Display Adjustment SN 3004A and Above and then adjustment procedure 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above If the A1A2 assembly functions properly and does not require compensation proceed directly to adjustment procedure 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above The High Voltage Adjustment procedure does not require the removal or discharge of the Al High Voltage Regulator or 1 CRT assemblies However if for any reason the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly the CRT or the CRT post accelerator cable must be removed perform the following procedure to ensure proper safety This procedure should be performed by qualified personnel only Voltages are present which if contacted could cause serious personal injury Approximately 2400 V dc can be present on the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator assembly even when the ac line cord
32. dB Step 24 Recorded deviations from Steps 18 and 22 C D Step 18 Step 22 Largest Positive Deviation dB dB Largest Negative Deviation dB dB Steps 25 to 28 IF Gain Uncertainty Stepl Min Measured Max Sum of positive deviations of A C amp D Sum of negative deviations of A C amp D Sum of positive deviations of A B C amp D Sum of negative deviations of A B C amp D Performance Tests 2 81 Test 11 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test Step 6 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty SCALE MKR Amplitude Deviation Allowable dB DIV dB Deviation dB 2 82 Performance Tests Test 12 Amplitude Fidelity Test Test 12 Amplitude Fidelity Test ee Step 6 Log Amplitude Fidelity Frequency Fidelity Error Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER A Amplitude Column 2 Column 1 Amplitude Amplitude dB dBm Step 14 Linear Amplitude Fidelity Synthesizer Amplitude 3 of Reference Level Amplitude dB dB dBm Frequency neni A Allowable Range Performance Tests 2 83 Test 18 Average Noise Level Test 1 001 MHz 1501 MHz 2 84 Performance Tests Test 14 Residual Responses Test Test 14 Residual Responses Test Step 11 Maximum Residual R esponse Frequency M easured M easured Range Max Amplitude Frequency 500 Hz to 1500 MHz Option 400 500 Hz to 2 5 kHz 2 5 kHz to 1500 MHz Perf
33. siiin ritte RC 9 0 dBm RE hasse eio d Aaa E Ee on LEVBEING hha eee INT 5 On the synthesized sweeper press Power LeveL and adjust the ENTRY knob as necessary for a power meter indication of 15 00 dBm 2 00 dB at 100 MHz 6 On the power meter press RANGE HOLD turning it on 7 On the synthesized sweeper press PoweR LeveL and adjust the ENTRY knob for a power meter indication of 10 00 dBm 0 03 dB at 100 MHz 8 On the synthesized sweeper press LEVELING and adjust the ENTRY knob REF in dBV with ATN 0 dB for a power meter indication of 10 00 dBm 0 03 dB at 100 MHz Do not vary the synthesized sweeper POWER LEVEL setting internal leveling or METER REF and METER ATN settings external power meter leveling for the remaining steps in this section of the adjustment procedure The frequency response adjustments are referenced to the 10 00 dBm power level at 100 MHz 9 Set the synthesized sweeper to the following settings START srren aE E vM eR EE eEenes 10 MHz SUO prc E ara RF Pasa seis 1500 MHz SWEEP TIME o ete ee e Reds 40s SWEEP ouai este ode etae e eter bytes SINGLE 10 Set HP 8568B LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET 11 Key in sranr FREQ 10 MHz 1500 MHz REFERENCE LeveL 10 dBm LOG Center dB DIV 1 dB 12 On the spectrum analyzer press TRACE write and HOLD 13 Trigger two full sweeps on the synthesi
34. 0757 0859 2 0757 0139 l 0757 0860 5 0757 087 1 8 0757 0310 0 0757 0194 8 0698 3175 5 0698 3464 5 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments Reference Description Equipment Procedure IF Display Section Note IF Display Section 1 15 V Regulator 1 120 V 5 2 V Regulator Serial Number Prefix 3004A and above 1 100 V 5 2 V Regulator Serial Number Prefix 3001A and below RF Section A24 Voltage Regulator The 15 V supply is adjusted for the IF display Section and the 20 V supply is adjusted for the RF Section All other low voltage supplies are measured to ensure that they are within tolerance SPECTRUM ANALYZER e ooooc po O a ac DIGITAL VOLTMTER gos onono ADAPTER o Figure 3 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments Setup Digital Voltmeter HP 3456A 1 Position the instrument on its right side with the IF Display Section facing right as shown in Figure 3 1 Remove the top cover of the IF Display Section and the bottom cover of the RF Section Set the LINE switch to ON and press IP Mains indicator AlAS8DSI red LED in the IF Display Section should be lit See Figure 3 2 and Figure 3 3 for the location of
35. 2 9 10 2 1 2 1 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 2 18 2 19 2 20 2 21 2 22 2 23 2 24 2 25 2 26 2 21 2 28 2 29 2 30 2 31 2 32 2 33 2 34 2 35 2 36 8 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 Center Frequency Accuracy Test Center Frequency Readout Error Measurement Frequency Span Accuracy Test Setup Sweep Time Accuracy Test Setup Penlift Output Signal 2 a rns Resolution Bandwidth Measurement 60 dB Bandwidth Measurement Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test Setup Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Measurement Frequency Response Test Setup 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz Frequency Response Measurement 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz Frequency Response Test Setup 100 KHz to 20 MHz Frequency Response Measurement 100 kHz to 20 MHz Frequency Response Test Setup 100 Hz to 100 KHz RF Gain Uncertainty Measurement IF Gain Uncertainty Test Setup IF Gain Uncertainty Measurement IF Gain Uncertainty Measurement 2 dB Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Measurement Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup Amplitude Fidelity Measurement Average Noise Level Measurement Residual Responses Measurement Harmonic Distortion Test Setup Intermodulation Distortion Test Setup Intermodula
36. 24 Track and Hold Adjustments A6 AS SEMBL I ES A6A9A R11 COVER CAL ADJ Amps ECE Y q 5 C29 OJO dla TRIPLER MATCH CAL DM R10 Tama Le irn Oe ci ABA9A1 Figure 3 88 Location of Track and H old Adjustments Key in TRACE A HOLD Adjust A3A9RA44 OFFS POS until MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between OO and 10 dB Key in TRACE A Adjust A3A9R36 OFS NEG until MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between OO and 10 dB Key in TRACE A s Remove short from between A3A9TP1 and A3A9TPS3 or remove the SMB short from A3A9J1 Reconnect cable 7 violet to 4 1 1 Connect the DVM to A4AITP3 Connect DVM s ground to the IF section s casting Press REFERENCE LeveL and adjust DATA knob and front panel AMPTD CAL adjust for DVM indication of 2 000 0 001 V dc at A4AITP3 Disconnect DVM from instrument Key in SINGLE TRACE A_ ctear write MARKER NORMAL MARKER In SWEEP CONT Adjust A3A9R57 T H GAIN for GAIN for MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation of 100 0 1 dB Key in TRACE A P Adjust A3A9R39 GPOS for MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation of 100 01 dB 23 Key in SHIFT TRACE A VIEW Adjustments 3 143 24
37. INSTR PRESET On spectrum analyzer and synthesized sweeper 2 Set controls as follows Power Meter MODE RANGE HOLD OFF CAL FACTOR 100 Synthesized Sweeper START FREQ iu ee e be pier ede 20 MHz STOP FREQ XA ERR eR 1 5 GHz SWEEP tede di SWEEP TIME eer b easton TE P UA E PA e 120 s POWER LEVEI 0 00 dBm 3 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 1 1 The RECORDER OUTPUT on rear panel of power meter is connected to LEVELING EXT INPUT of the synthesized sweeper One output arm of the power splitter is connected directly to SIGNAL INPUT 2 of the spectrum analyzer via the N to N adapter The power sensor connects directly to the other splitter output 4 Depress RANGE HOLD button on power meter 5 Select METER leveling on synthesized sweeper 6 Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings CENTER FREQUENCY nIHRHeH n 20 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN 10 MHz aar a aream ad ara DECRE MHz Performance Tests 2 23 8 Frequency Response Test 7 Adjust POWER LEVEL on synthesized sweeper using data knob to place peak of 20 MHz signal near reference level top graticule line 8 Press enter dB DIV 1 dB on spectrum analyzer Adjust POWER LEVEL on synthesized sweeper to position peak of signal 2 divisions below the reference level line 9 Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings START FREQ irn 20 MHz EN 1 5 GHz
38. Key in CENTER EREGUENGY 20 MHz 10 kHz 1 kHz and press LIN pushbutton Press REFERENCE LeveL and adjust reference level using step keys and front panel knob to place signal peak near top CRT graticule line 7 On the A4A7 assembly connect crystal filter bypass networks between the pins above C41 SYM C32 SYM C23 SYM and C14 SYM 8 Adjust A4A7C7 CTR for minimum amplitude signal peak Adjust A4A7C6 SYM for best symmetry of signal Repeat adjustments to ensure that the signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry See Figure 3 38 for location of adjustments Note You may find it helpful to widen and narrow the frequency span of the instrument to adjust the bandpass symmetry and centering for each filter stage E AMA ze SPE BSC RE Ze 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter are E ADI ADI a om 6233 8 e 6 66566 6 I5 22 0 A4A7 Figure 3 38 Location of Center Symmetry and 10 Hz Amplitude Adjustments 9 Remove crystal filter bypass network near C14 SYM Adjustments 3 73 7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 3 74 Adjustments 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Adjust A4A7C15 CTR for minimum amplitude of signal peak Adjust A4A7C14 SYM for best symmetry Repeat adjustments to ensure that the signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetr
39. R62 ZERO ATTEN 12 VTV 16 20 R18 A4A3 A4A2 LOG AMPLIFIER LOG AMPLIFIER FILTER DETECTOR R83 C55 R67 LG 10 C52 C53 CTR R66 AMPTD A4A3 Figure 3 34 Location of Log Amplifier Adjustments Bandpass Filter Center Adjustment 6 Press LOG enter dB DIV 7 Set the frequency synthesizer for 7 6000 MHz at 5 0 dBm output level 8 Adjust A4A3C55 CTR for maximum DVM indication See Figure 3 34 for location of adjustment If A4A3C55 is at an extreme of its adjustment range fully meshed maximum capacitance or unmeshed minimum capacitance increase or decrease value of A4A3C52 A4A3C53 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Note A4A3C52 is a fine adjustment and A4A3C53 is a coarse adjustment If A4A3C55 is fully meshed increase the value of A4A3C52 or A4A3C53 3 66 Adjustments 5 Log Amplifier Adjustments Bandpass Filter Amplitude Adjustment 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Connect one end of a jumper wire to A4A3TP8 Connect the other end of the jumper to A4A3TP7 15V Connecting the jumper to A4A3TP8 first reduces the chance of shorting the 15V to ground Note DVM indication V dc Remove the short from between A4A3TP7 and A4A3TP8 Adjust A4A3R67 AMPTD for DVM indication the same as that
40. Separation Products Products 100 kHz gt 100 kHz 70 dBc gt 100 kHz gt 10 MHz gt 80 dBc 5 dBm 10 dBm Harmonic distortion second and third is tested using a signal source and a low pass filter The LPF insures that the harmonics measured are generated by the spectrum analyzer and not by the signal source Spurious responses due to image frequencies out of band mixing and intermodulation distortion are measured by applying signals from two separate sources to the spectrum analyzer input Performance Tests 2 49 15 Spurious Responses Test SPECTRUM ANALYZER SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER Figure 2 25 Harmonic Distortion Test Setup Note Equipment listed is for two test setups Figure 2 25 and Figure 2 26 Equipment Synthesized Sweeper rr HP 8340A Frequency Synthesizer HP 3335A 10 dB Attenuator 2 required HP 8491A Opt 010 Lowpass Filter 300 MHz 0 seen HP 0955 0455 Adapter Type N m to BNC f 2 required HP 1250 0780 Adapter Type N m to SMA f o sees HP 1250 1250 Adapter Type N f to BNC m 0 HP 1250 0077 Adapter Type N f to BNC f HP 1250 1474 Directional Bridge HP 8721A Lowpass Filter 50 MHz 2 required HP 0955 0306 Procedure Harmonic Distortion l 2 2 50 Performance T
41. The CAL OUTPUT provides a stable signal for the measurements None required Performance Test 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test must be performed before starting this test 1 Press PRESET 2 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 3 Key in analyzer control settings as follows CENTER FREQUENCY 20 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN 20 MHz NUMOS NOE aetna dae E 9 MHz 100 Hz SWEEP 4 Press MARKER and position marker at peak of signal trace Press MARKER A and position movable marker 60 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive going edge of the signal trace the MARKER A amplitude readout should be 60 00 dB 1 00 dB It may be necessary to press SWEEP and adjust CENTER Frequency so that both 60 dB points are displayed See Figure 4 4 5 Press MARKER 4 and position movable marker 60 dB down from the signal peak on the negative going edge of the signal trace the MARKER A amplitude readout should be OO dB 0 50 dB 6 Read the 60 dB bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth setting from the MARKER A frequency readout Figure 4 4 and record the value in Table 4 4 10 5 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to Table 4 4 Press SWEEP and measure the 60 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps
42. The sum of the positive deviations recorded in A B C and D should not exceed 1 0 dB The sum of the negative deviations recorded in A B C and D should not exceed 1 O dB 11 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test Related Adjustment Specification Description Equipment Procedure 11 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test Video Processor Adjustments 0 5 dB uncorrected 20 to 30 C The log scale is stepped from 1 dB DIV to 10 dB DIV and the variation in trace amplitude from the 1 dB DIV setting at each step is measured None required 1 Press INSTR PRESET 2 Key in analyzer settings as follows DET 20 MHz olo et uM a m ad et 100 kHz inet tS eee 8 dBm Qoare tore Wie Ret Meat te 30 kHz 3 Press LOG and key in a log scale of 1 dB per division 4 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 5 Press MARKER and MKR gt Record the marker amplitude upper right of display in Table 2 7 6 Step up through the log scales with ff At each step press MARKER PEAK SEARCH then record the marker amplitude in Table 2 15 Refer to Figure 2 20 7 Subtract the marker amplitude at the 1 dB DIV setting from the marker amplitudes recorded for the 2 5 and 10 dB DIV settings to obtain the amplitude deviations The deviation should be less than 0 5 dB for each log scale Performance Tests 2 39 11 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test 180 881 MHz
43. Track and Hold Adjustments 24 Adjust A3A9R52 for MARKER level indication as indicated by CRT annotation of 100 0 1 dB 25 Repeat steps 4 through 24 until no further adjustments are required 3 144 Adjustments 25 Digital Storage Display Adjustments Reference Description Equipment Procedure Preliminary Graticule Adjustments 25 Digital Storage Display Adjustments 1 Trigger A3A2 Intensity Control A3A3 Line Generator First preliminary CRT graticule adjustments are performed to position the graticule on the CRT These preliminary adjustments assume that repair has been performed on the associated circuitry If no repair has been performed on the assemblies listed under REFERENCE the preliminary adjustments are not necessary Next the Sample and Hold Balance adjustments are performed The horizontal and vertical Offset and Gain adjustments are performed then the final CRT graticule adjustments are performed Last the CRT annotation adjustments are performed to place the CRT annotation in proper location with respect to the CRT graticule 4 7 11 SPECTRUM DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE TRIGGER 65 ooo bad bon DIGITAL VOLTMETER T C NN oocoo Soa paces Figure 3 89 Digital Storage Display Adjustments Setup Digital Voltmeter
44. select channel 1 and use the front panel knob to select a 10 1 probe Select channel 4 and use the front panel knob to select a 10 1 probe 5 Press SHOW Connect the channel 1 probe to the oscilloscope s rear panel PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector Press auro SCALE Adjust the channel 1 probe for an optimum square wave display on the oscilloscope Connect the channel 4 probe to the oscilloscope s rear panel PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector Press AUTO scate_ Adjust the channel 4 probe for an optimum square wave display on the oscilloscope Each probe is now compensated for the oscilloscope input to which it is connected Do not interchange probes without recompensating 8 Connect the channel 1 10 1 divider probe to ALA4El and the channel 4 probe to ALA4E2 as shown in Figure 3 16 Connect the probe ground leads to chassis ground See Figure 3 17 and Figure 3 18 for the location of the assemblies and test points 500 TERMINATION BNC TEE 4 2 ATAAET b ooo da 5ooo6 1 oodd ooh o DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE PULSE FUNCTION GENERATOR OUTPUT Figure 3 16 Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup Remove the cover over A3 Digital Storage Section and remove A3A2 Intensity Control Assembly Insert the Display Adjustment PC board HP part number 85662 60088 into the A3A2 slot See Fig
45. should be approximately 0 500 V dc V de Decrease reference level to 60 dBm using the step key Adjust A4A1R2 LG OS for DVM indication of 40 100 0 001 V dc greater than the DVM indication recorded in step 19 See Figure 3 36 for location of adjustment 22 23 24 25 26 6 Video Processor Adjustments Decrease reference level to 70 dBm using the step key DVM indication should be 0 200 0 002 V dc greater than the indication recorded in step 19 If not readjust A4A1R2 LG OS Decrease reference level to 90 dBm using the step key DVM indication should be 0 400 0 004 V dc greater than the indication recorded in step 19 If not readjust A4A1R2 LG OS Repeat steps 17 through 25 until the specifications are met Adjustments 3 7 1 7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Reference Related Performance Test Description Equipment 3 72 Adjustments IF Display Section A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test With the CAL OUTPUT signal connected to the RF INPUT the 18 4 MHz oscillator can be adjusted with the FREQ ZERO control on the front panel to peak the IF signal for maximum amplitude for the center of the 3 MHz bandpass Each of the five stages of the 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter is adjusted for bandpass centering and symmetry Four crystal filter bypass networks are required for alignment of the filter stages See Figur
46. the VTO tuning accuracy is adjusted at both the low and high end by setting the tune voltage to the proper levels to tune the VTO to its low and high end limits 42 5 MHz and 57 5 MHz This is done using the output of the tuning DACS from the A22 Frequency Control therefore it is necessary that the DAC adjustments on the Frequency Control have been performed before adjusting the 50 MHz VTO SPECTRUM ANALYZER DooDoo DIGITAL VOLTMETER go NN a em 0000 O ooo oooon op O Figure 3 78 50 MHz Voltage T uned Oscillator Adjustments Setup Digital Voltmeter 0 HP 3456A 1 Position Instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3 78 and remove bottom cover Remove All 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator and place on extenders 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET DACS Accuracy Check Positive Supply Adjustment 3 A 8 11 20 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments Connect DVM to A22TP9 and ground lead to A22TP12 Key in SHIFT CF step SIZE 0 Hz If using an HP3456A DVM press STORE 1 7 ENTER EXP 8 0 STORE S then x z v If not using an HP 3456A DVM note voltage indication for reference later Key CF_ster_size 5 1023 kHz If using an HP 3456A DVM voltage indication should typically be be 10 230 0 010 V dc If
47. 0 dB input attenuation 1 Hz video filter Option 001 129 dBm for frequencies 1 MHz lt 106 dBm for frequencies lt 1 MHz but gt 500 Hz with 10 Hz resolution bandwidth 0 dB input attenuation 1 Hz video filter SIGNAL INPUT 1 only The average noise level is checked by observing the displayed noise level at several frequencies with no input signal applied 50 Ohm Termination HP 11593A 1 Press INSTR PRESET 2 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 3 Press 8 Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of 10 00 dBm 0 02 dB 4 Press INSTR PRESET 5 Disconnect CAL OUTPUT from analyzer Terminate SIGNAL INPUT 2 with a 509 coaxial termination 6 Key in spectrum analyzer settings as follows 0 CENTER 501 Hz FREQUENCY SPAN Js oder roe t rho em e uted de e eie O Hz t uei et 10 Hz REFERENCE 80 dBm rcp Tuc EIE 1Hz SWEEPTME cem 20 seconds 7 Press SWEEP and wait for completion of the sweep 8 Press DISPLAY LINE ENTER Using DATA knob place display line at the apparent average amplitude of the noise trace see Figure 2 23 Performance Tests 2 45 13 Average Noise Level Test ett ET et tT ala AN 8 H Figure 2 23 Average Noise Level Measurement 9 Read the average noise level from the
48. 00 MHz 0 10 MHz 17 Key in 300 kHz FREQUENCY span 500 kHz PEAK SEARCH and MKR CF If necessary readjust by pressing REFERENCE LEVEL and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak at the top of the graticule 18 Press MARKER then MARKER 19 Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one the displayed signal to the 6 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 500 X 20 Adjust A4A9R62 300 kHz for MKR A indication of 150 kHz while maintaining marker at 500 X using the data knob Refer to Figure 4 7 for location of adjustment 2 Press MARKER In Adjust the marker to the 6 dB point on the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X 22 The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the bandwidth of the 300 kHz bandwidth filter The bandwidth should be 300 00 30 00 kHz 23 Key in 10 kHz FREGuENcv SPAN 20 kHz PEAK SEARCH and MKR CF If necessary readjust by pressing and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule Option 462 4 25 9 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments 4 26 Option 462 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Press MARKER oFF then MARKER In Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 6 dB point CRT MKR annotation indicates 500 x Adjust A4A9R65 10 kHz for MKR A indication of 5 00 kHz while maintaining the marker at 500 X using the DA
49. 005 Hz 5 005 Hz 50 000 Hz 50 000 Hz 23 230 Hz 23 230 Hz 460 000 Hz 460 000 Hz 462 300 Hz 462 300 Hz 84 500 000 H4 34 5000 000 Hz Note The specification in Table 2 4 was derived using the following formula For spans gt 1 MHz the spec is gt 02 A synth freq 005 span For spans 1 MHz the spec is gt 05 A synth freq 005 span Performance Tests 2 71 Test 3 Sweep Time Accurac Step 6 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 ms SWEEP TIME Marker A Time Min M easured M ax Step 12 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 s SWEEP TIME Marker A Time Min Measured Step 19 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 ms Alternate Procedure SWEEP TIME Sweep Gen R eadout 2 72 Performance Tests Test 4 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 4 Resolution Bandwidth Accurac Step 8 Bandwidth Accuracy MARKER A Readout of 3 dB Bandwidth Min Measured 5 MHz 2 400 MHz 3 600 MHz 2 MHz 900 kHz 1 100 MHz 500 kHz 270 0 kHz 330 0 kHz 200 kHz 90 0 kHz 110 0 kHz 50 kHz 27 00 kHz 33 00 KHz 20 kHz 9 00 kHz 11 00 kHz 5 kHz 2 700 kHz 3 300 kHz 2 kHz 800 Hz 1 200 kHz 500 Hz 240 Hz 360 Hz 200 Hz 80 Hz 120 Hz 100 Hz 24 Hz 36 Hz 100 Hz 8 Hz 12 Hz Performance Tests 2 73 Test 5 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity E Steps 7 8 and 9 Reso
50. 1 0 dB at any setting MKR A Hz 42 dBm ATTEN 28 98 1B d 1 99 Eae STORE SEDE 3 oH ERTE CENTER 20 0009 MHz SPAN 100 0 kHz RES BW 38 kHz VBW 188 Hz SWP 500 meac Figure 2 10 Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Measure nent Table 2 1 1 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty REFERENCE LEVEL 0 ref 0 ref Performance Tests 2 21 8 Frequency Response Test Related Adjustment Specification Description SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER 2 om gugoo V LATE E TUS oo 0000 ooo 5 ofa cio pogo cao 00 Slope Compensation Adjustment SIGNAL INPUT 1 1 5 dB 100 Hz to 1 5 GHz 1 dB 100 Hz to 500 MHz SIGNAL INPUT 2 1 dB 100 kHz to 1 5 GHz Frequency response at both analyzer inputs is tested by slowly sweeping a flat signal source over the frequency range and observing the peak to peak variation in trace amplitude The test is divided into three parts First the response is tested from 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz with a power meter leveled synthesized sweeper Next a frequency synthesizer is used to check the response from 100 kHz to 20 MHz Finally SIGNAL INPUT 1 is tested from 100 Hz to 100 kHz with a function generator SPECTRUM ANALYZER ho POWER METER RECORDER OUT
51. 10 Press TRACE A on the analyzer 11 Press SWEEP SINGLE on the synthesized sweeper REF d8m ATTEN 18 START 28 MHz STOP 1590 MHz RES BW 3 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 22 msec Figure 2 12 Frequency Response Measurement 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz 12 Press DISPLAY LINE ENTER on the spectrum analyzer Use the Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points on the trace Record measurements below SIGNAL INPUT 2 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz Maximum dBm Minimum dBm 13 To check SIGNAL INPUT 1 use the type N male to BNC male adapter to connect the power splitter directly to SIGNAL INPUT 1 Option 001 Use HP 11852 Minimum Loss Pad and adapters between splitter and spectrum analyzer input 14 Press INSTR PRESET on spectrum analyzer then activate SIGNAL INPUT 1 with the pushbutton 2 24 Performance Tests 8 Frequency Response Test Option 001 Set REFERENCE LeveL TO 6 0 dBm 15 Repeat steps 6 through 11 Press DISPLAY LINE on the spectrum analyzer Use the Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points on the trace Record measurements below SIGNAL INPUT 1 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz Maximum dBm Minimum dBm 16 Press MARKER on spectrum analyzer Set marker to 500 MHz Press DISPLAY LINE ENTER on the spectrum analyzer Use the Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points between 20 MHz and 500 MHz Record measurements below SIGNAL INPUT 1 20 MHz t
52. 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 4 2 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 4 4 5 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test 4 10 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test 4 13 6 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test 2 a a 416 Test 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record 4 18 Test 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record 4 19 Test 5 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record 4 21 Test 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record 4 22 Test 6 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty p o Table 2 19 Performace Test Record i SN Rei eius 4 23 9 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments 4 24 9 Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments 427 5 Option 857 Introduction llle s 5 1 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test 5 2 Performance Test Record 5 7 Test 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test 5 8 6 Major Assembly and Component Locations IF Display Section Figure Index 6 1 RF Section Figure 6 2 Contents 3 Figures Contents 4 1 1 Service Accessories HP Part Number 08568 60001 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8
53. 4 through 6 Record the value in Table 4 4 Record the 6 dB bandwidths from Table 4 1 in Table 4 4 Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing the 60 dB bandwidth by the 6 dB bandwidth The bandwidth ratios should be less than the maximum values shown in Table 4 4 The 60 dB bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting should be less than 100 Hz MKA A 14 04 MHZ REF 0 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB 0 30 dB Figure 4 4 60 dB Bandwidth Measurement Option 462 4 11 5 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Table 4 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Spectrum Analyzer Measured Measured Bandwidth Selectivity Selectivity Ratio BW 60 dB points separated by 100 Hz 4 12 Option 462 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test E 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Related Adjustment Specification Description Note Equipment Procedure 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 21 4 Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments 60 dB 6 dB bandwidth ratio lt 11 1 3 MHz to 100 kHz lt 8 1 30 kHz to 30 Hz 60 dB points on 10 Hz bandwidth are separated by lt 100 Hz Bandwidth selectivity is found by measuring the 60 dB bandwidth and dividing this value by the 6 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting from 30 Hz to 3 MHz
54. 9 p REF 9 8 dBm ATTEN 18 aB 9 92 dBm CENTER 100 0200 MHz SPAN 100 KHZ RES 38 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 28 8 msec Figure 2 20 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Measurement Table 2 15 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty SCALE MKR Amplitude Deviation Allowable dB DIV dB Deviation dB 2 40 Performance Tests 12 Amplitude Fidelity Test 12 Amplitude For instruments with Option 857 refer to Chapter 5 Fidelity Test Related Adjustment Log Amplifier Adjustments Specification Log Incremental 0 1 dB dB over 0 to 80 dB display Cumulative 3 MHz to 30 Hz Resolution Bandwidth lt 1 0 dB max over 0 to 80 dB display 20 30 C lt 1 5 dB max over 0 to 90 dB display Linear 3 of Reference Level for top 9 1 2 divisions of display Description Amplitude fidelity in log and linear modes is tested by decreasing the signal level to the spectrum analyzer in 10 dB steps with a calibrated signal source and measuring the displayed amplitude change with the analyzer s MARKER A function SIGNAL ANALYZER SYNTHES I ZERFLEVEL Dnm ee Gs GENERA JOR vee 555 58 E coson Soo 2 oo oona 0 cag oo Goo O OO ao RF OUTPUT SIGNAL INPUT 2 ADAPTER gb13b Figure 2 21 Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup Performance Tests 2 41 12 Amplitude Fidelit
55. 9 RES Bw 300 Hz vBw 188 Hz WP 29 sec Figure 2 16 RF Gain Uncertainty Measurement 2 32 Performance Tests 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Related Adjustments Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Specification Assuming the internal calibration signal is used to calibrate the reference level at 10 dBm and the input attenuator is fixed at 10 dB any changes in reference level from the 10 dB setting will contribute to IF gain uncertainty as shown Uncertainty uncorrected 20 30 C 0 dBm to 55 9 dBm Res BW gt 30 Hz 0 6 dB Res BW 10 Hz 1 6 dB 56 0 dBm to 129 9 dBm Res BW gt 30 Hz 1 0 dB Res BW 10 Hz 2 0 dB Description The IF gain steps are tested over the entire range from 0 dBm to 129 9 dBm using an RF substitution method The 10 dB 2 dB and 0 1 dB steps are compared against a calibrated signal source provided by an HP 3335A Frequency Synthesizer SIGNAL GENERATOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER RF OUTPUT SIGNAL INPUT 2 ADAPTER D J ADAPTER STEP ATTENUATOR HP3550 H89 STEP ATTENUATOR HP388C H25 Figure 2 17 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Setup Performance Tests 2 33 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Equipment Procedure 1 2 3 10 dB Gain Steps 5 Frequency Synthesizer HP 3335A Adapter Type N m to BNC HP 1250 0780 Press IN
56. 910 MHz Press MARKER Peak SEARCH on spectrum analyzer and record marker reading under FREQ C of Table 2 3 Set synthesized sweeper frequency to 100 000 090 MHz Press MARKER Peak sEARcH and record marker reading under FREQ D of Table 2 3 Repeat the span measurement procedure of steps 6 through 9 for each frequency span listed in Table 2 3 Determine the frequency difference between the two measured points Enter this value under the A DUT column in Table 2 3 The frequency span error is the difference between A DUT and A SYNTH See table 2 3 for values Calculate the span error and record it in Table 2 4 Compare the table 2 4 spec to the span error value calculated in step 12 Table 2 3 Wide Span Error DUT Measured Synthesized Sweeper Frequency Span 200 Hz 100 kHz 100 1kHz 1 MHz 1 01 MHz 20 MHz 20 1 MHz 1 5GHz Center Frequency 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 900 MHz Freq A Cf 45 span 99 999 910 MHz 99 955 000 MHz 99 954955 MHz 99 550 000 MHz 99 550 550 MHz 91 000 000 MHz 90 955 000 MHz 225 MHz Freq B cf 45 span 100 000090 MHz 100 045 000 MHz 100 045 045 MHz 100 450000 MHz 100 450500 MHz 109 000000 MHz 109 045 000 MHz 1575 MHz A Synth B A 180 Hz 90 000 Hz 90 090 kHz 900 000 kHz 909 000 kHz 18 000 MHz 18 090 MHz 1350 MHz Performance Tests 2 7 2 Frequency Span Accuracy Test Table 2 4 Span E
57. A1LA2R319 INT GAIN fully clockwise 28 Set the spectrum analyzer s front panel INTENSITY control fully clockwise Adjust the oscilloscope trigger level for a stable display Note the display on the oscilloscope The pulse should be gt 55V peak to peak Adjustments 3 57 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 29 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press Channel 1 o 2E o ue iub ub dec 4S xv 30 amplitude scale 8 00 V div Press SHOW 30 Adjust the spectrum analyzer s front panel INTENSITY control for peak to peak 8 divisions as indicated on the oscilloscope See Figure 3 29 p running eg 8 00 V div offset 45 00 V 10 00 dc 125 000 ns 125 000 ns SU 50 0 ns div 4 1 5000 v Figure 3 29 50V Signal 31 Adjust ALA2R308 HF GAIN and A1A2C307 for minimum overshoot on rise and minimum rise and fall times of the pulse waveform 32 Use the oscilloscope markers to measure the risetime falltime and percent overshoot of the pulse waveform Rise and falltimes should be less than 50 ns and 90 ns respectively Overshoot on the rise should be less than 5 approximately 0 4 divisions 33 Set the spectrum analyzer s LINE switch to STANDBY and reconnect the cable to A1A2J65 34 Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe from the spectrum analyzer Remove the Display Adjustment PC board from the A3A2 slot and reinstall the A3A2 Intensity Contr
58. Accuracy Test Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Frequency Response Test RF Gain Uncertainty Test IF Gain Uncertainty Test Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test Amplitude Fidelity Test Average Noise Level Test Residual Responses Test Spurious Responses Test Residual FM Test Line Related Sidebands Test Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test 1ST LO OUTPUT Amplitude Test Frequency Reference Error Test 1 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test 1 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Related Adjustments Frequency Control Adjustments Time Base Adjustment Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments Specification uncorrected 2 of frequency span frequency reference error x tune frequency 30 of resolution bandwidth setting 10 Hz in AUTO resolution bandwidth after adjusting FREQ ZERO at stabilized temperature Description A synthesized signal source that is phase locked to a known frequency standard is used to input a signal to the analyzer The frequency readout of the analyzer is compared to the actual input frequency for several different frequency settings over the analyzer s range The signal source is phase locked to a standard known to be as accurate as the analyzer s internal frequency reference to minimize the frequency
59. Crystal Oscillator HP P N 1081 1 601 11 typically reaches its specified aging rate again within 72 hours after being switched off for a period of up to 30 days and within 24 hours after being switched off for a period less than 24 hours If extreme environmental conditions were encountered during storage or shipment i e mechanical shock temperature extremes the oscillator could require up to 30 days to achieve its specified aging rate Replacement oscillators are factory adjusted after a complete warmup and after the specified aging rate has been achieved Readjustment should typically not be necessary after oscillator replacement and is generally not recommended 1 Set the rear panel FREQ REFERENCE switch on the spectrum analyzer RF Section to INT Note The 22 Vdc STANDBY supply provides power to the heater circuit in the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard assembly whenever line power is applied to the RF Section This allows the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard oven to remain at thermal equilibrium minimizing frequency drift due to temperature variations The OVEN COLD message should typically appear on the spectrum analyzer display for 10 minutes or less after line power is first applied to the RF Section Note The rear panel FREQ REFERENCE switch enables or disables the RF Section 20 Vdc switched supply which powers the oscillator circuits in the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard This switch must be set to INT and the spectru
60. DISPLAY LINE readout The value should be 112 dBm dBm 10 Change center rREaGuENcv to 1 001 MHz Follow the procedure to steps 7 through 9 to determine the average noise level The value should be 135 dBm dBm 11 Change CENTER Frequency to 1501 Mhz Follow the procedure of steps 7 through 9 to determine the average noise level The value should be 135 dBm dBm 2 46 Performance Tests 14 Residual Responses Test nS 14 Residual Responses Test Specification Description Equipment Procedure Note 105 dBm for frequencies gt 500 Hz with 0 dB input attenuation no signal present at input Option 100 lt 99 dBm for frequencies gt 500 Hz with O dB input attenuation SIGNAL INPUT 1 only Option 400 lt 95 dBm for frequencies gt 500 Hz with 0 dB input attenuation 105 dBm for frequencies gt 2 5 kHz with 0 dB input attenuation The spectrum analyzer is checked for residual responses across its frequency range with no signal applied to the input and 0 dB input attenuation 50 Ohm Termination 11593A 1 Press INSTR PRESET 2 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 3 Press 8 Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of 10 00 dbm 0 02 dB 4 Press INSTR PRESET 5 Disconnect CAL OUTPUT from analyzer Terminate SIGNAL INPUT 2 with a 50 ohm coaxial termination 6 Key in control settings as follows EREOUE
61. E aed AE aA aden HS bOus div Press TRIG E GE TRIGGER teme pure auto edge sid Press DISPLAY Connect QOS eerte opt RE aes ord 0n Adjustments 3 33 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below 27 On the oscilloscope press SHOW 28 Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to A1A3TP5 using a long probe extension See Figure 3 7 for the location of 1 5 29 Reconnect the ac line cords to each instrument section Adjust the front panel INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise and then set the LINE switch to ON the INSTR CHECK I LED will light 30 Wait approximately 30 seconds for the dc regulator circuits to stabilize again 31 With the front panel INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise adjust ALAZR35 INT LIMIT clockwise until a spot is just visible in the lower left corner of the CRT See Figure 3 8 for the location of the adjustment Note The A1A2R35 INT LIMIT adjustment compensates for the variation in beam cut off voltage of different CRTs and indirectly sets the maximum beam intensity A1A2R35 INT LIMIT should have enough range to turn the CRT spot on and off If the spot is always on decrease the value of AlA2R9 If the spot is always off increase the value of A1A2R9 Refer to Table 3 3 for the acceptable range of values and to Table 3 4 for HP part numbers Refer to Figure 3 8 for the location of ALA2RO9 R35 R5 R36 INT INT ASTIG LIMIT GAIN R9
62. Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument The caution sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The warning sign denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met General Safety Considerations Warning Warning Caution Before this instrument is switched on make sure it has been properly grounded through the protective conductor of the ac power cable to a socket outlet provided with protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor inside or outside the instrument or disconnection of the protective earth terminal can result in personal injury There are many points in the instrument which can if contacted cause personal injury Be extremely careful Any adjustments or service procedures that require operation of the instrument with protective covers removed should be performed only by trained service personnel Before this instrument is switched on make sure its primary power circuitry has been adapted to
63. K to 6 81 K A4A7R57 5 11 K to 6 81 K A4A7R68 99 to 133 A4A7R70 383 to 681 A4A7R76 99 to 133 4 4 99 to 133 A4A7R86 316 to 619 A4A7R92 99 to 133 A4A7R94 316 to 619 A4A7R100 99 to 133 A4A7R102 316 to 619 A4A8R30 6 19 K to 16 K A4A8R55 6 8 K to 17 6 K A4A8C43 1 0 to 8 2 A4A9R3 4 22 K to 6 19 K A4A9R6 21 5 K to 34 8 K A4A9R7 51 1 K to 75 0 K A4A9R10 11 0 K to 162 K A4A9R11 2 87 K to 4 22 K A4A9R83 7 50 K to 14 7 K A4A9R85 162 K to 348 K A4A9R86 28 7 K to 61 9 K A4A9R87 4 22 K to 8 25 O ption 067 215 K to 316 K Sets TC of 1 KHz RBW Opt 067 100 K to 511 Centers 1 kHz BW adjustment range Option 067 388 to 550 K Centers 1 kHz BW adjustment range Opt 067 Adjustments 3 19 Table 3 4 Standard Value Replacement Capacitors Type Tubular Type Dipped Mica Range 1 to 24 pF Range 27 to 680 pF Tolerance 1 to 9 1 pF 0 25 pF Tolerance 5 10 to 24 pF 5 Value pF 19 0160 2236 0160 2237 0150 0091 0160 2239 0160 2240 0160 2241 0160 2242 0160 2243 0160 2244 0150 0059 0160 2246 0160 2247 0160 2248 0160 2249 0160 2250 0160 2251 0160 2252 0160 2253 0160 2254 0160 2255 0160 2256 0160 2257 0160 2258 0160 2259 0160 2260 0160 2261 0160 2262 0160 2263 0160 2264 0160 2265 0160 2266 0160 2306 0160 2199 0160 2150 0160 2308 0140 0190 0160 2200 0160 2307 0160 2201 0140 0191 0140 0205 0140 0192 0160 2202 0140 0193 0160 2203 0160 2204 0140 0194 0160 2205 0140 0195 0140 01
64. Lock Loops 14 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments 15 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments 22 Comb Generator Adjustments RF Signal Conversion and RF Gains 16 Second IF Amplifier Adjustments 17 Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments 19 Second Converter Adjustments Sweep Times 18 Frequency Control Adjustments Frequency Tuning Frequency Control Adjustments 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments Frequency Span Frequency Control Adjustments START and STOP Frequency Frequency Control Adjustments FM Span Frequency Control Adjustments Frequency Response Slope Compensation Adjustment Digital Storage Video Processing Analog to Digital Converter Adjustments Track and Hold Adjustments Factory Selected Factory selected components are identified with an asterisk on the schematic diagram For most components the range of their values Components and functions are listed in Table 3 3 Factory Selected Components Part numbers for selected values are located in Table 3 4 HP Part Numbers of Standard Value Replacement Components Adjustments 3 3 Related Adjustments Location of Test Points and Adjustments 3 4 Adjustments Any adjustments which interact with or are related to other adjustments are indicated in the adjustments procedures It is important that adjustments so noted are performed in the order indicated to ensure that the instrument meets specifications Illustrations showing the loc
65. SPECIAL DEVICES Display Adjustment PC Board Low Noise DC Supply Crystal Filter Bypass Network 4 required 1 6 General Information requency 200 Hz to 18 GHz HP 8491B ype N Connectors Option 020 Impedance 500 BNC HP 11593A Jatness 0 25 dB Telonic Cut off Frequency 2400 MHz and 500 MHz TLS450 7EE Rejection gt 40 dB at 1750 MHz Sut off Frequency 300 MHz HP 0955 0455 Cut off Frequency 50 MHz HP 0955 0306 requency 1 MHz to 1500 MHz HP 11667A backing 0 2 dB HP 8721A Required for preliminary display adjustments HP 85662 60088 to Figure 70 Optional Refer to Figure 71 Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment 5 of 5 Critical Specifications for Recommended Perf Adj Equipment Substitution Model Test Frequency Range 200 Hz to 22 GHz HP 8120 4921 Instrument CABLES Cable Assembly Cable Test Cable Test Cable Test Cable ADAPTERS Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter Adapter BOARD EXTENDERS Extender 2 required Extender 8 required Extender Extender 2 required PC Board Extractor Part of Service Accessories APC 3 5 Male Connectors Length 91 cm 36 inches SWR lt 1 4 at 22 GHz BNC 122 cm 48 in 3 required BNC m to SMB Snap On f SMA m to SMA m SMA m to SMA m Type N f to BNC m Type N m to BNC m Tee SMB Male Connectors Type N m to N m Typ
66. Section Low Voltage Adjustments Connect DVM to A24TP3 with the ground lead to A24TP1 Adjust A24R60 20V ADJ for DVM indication of 20 000 0 010 V de The 15V indicator A24DS4 yellow LED should be lit Connect the DVM to A24TP2 The DVM indication should be 15 000 0 050 V dc The 15V supply is referenced to the 20V supply therefore if the 15V supply is out of tolerance a circuit malfunction is indicated The 5V indicator A24DS5 yellow LED should be lit Connect the DVM to A24TP5 The DVM indication should be 5 230 0 050 V dc The 5V supply is referenced to the 20V Adjustments 3 27 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments 3 28 Adjustments 17 18 19 20 supply therefore if the 5V supply is out of tolerance a circuit malfunction is indicated The 5V indicator A24DS6 yellow LED should be lit Connect the DVM to A24TP7 The DVM indication should be 5 200 0 050 V The 5V supply is referenced to the 20V supply therefore if the 5V supply is out of tolerance a circuit malfunction is indicated The 15V indicator A24DS3 yellow LED should be lit Connect the DVM to A24TP4 The DVM indication should be 15 000 0 050 V dc The 15 supply is referenced to the 20V supply therefore if the 15V supply is out of tolerance a circuit malfunction is indicated 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below Note Note Reference Description
67. The 60 dB points for the 10 Hz bandwidth setting are also measured The CAL OUTPUT provides a stable signal for the measurements Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test must be performed before this test None required 1 On the spectrum analyzer press and connect the CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 2 Key in spectrum analyzer control settings as following 20 MHz E DO 20 MHz hee tae Bete ate An ty E voce Saat 3 MHz ux po MC RE DUM MU ie 100 Hz SWEEP m MM HT m 3 On the spectrum analyzer press MARKER and position the marker at the peak of the signal trace using the DATA knob Press MARKER and position the movable marker 60 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive going edge of the signal trace the MARKER amplitude readout should be 60 00 dB 1 00 dB It may be necessary to press SWEEP and to adjust so that both 60 dB points are displayed see Figure 4 5 Option 462 4 13 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test 4 14 Option 462 MKA 4 14 04 MHz o REF 0 0 ATTEN 10 dB 0 30 dB Figure 4 5 60 dB Bandwidth Measurement Press MARKER In and position the positive movable marker 60 dB down from the signal peak on the negative going edge of the signal trace the MARKER A amplitude readout should be 0 00 dB 0 50 dB Read the 60 dB bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth setting from the MARKER 4 frequency re
68. Time to 20 ms Allow the universal counter enough time to settle at this sweep time 3 Sweep Time Accuracy Test gt 20 ms NOTE PULSE WIDTH APPROXIMATE 15Y t SWEEP RETRACE j 4 ACTIVE SWEEP gt v A e START TIME STOP TIME INTERVAL INTERVAL MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT Figure 2 5 Penlift Output Signal 6 Note the measured sweep time on the universal counter and record this value in Table 2 5 The measured sweep time should be a value between the minimum and maximum values given in Table 2 5 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each sweep time setting in Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 ms SWEEP TIME Marker A Time Mi Measured Max 8 Press MARKER NORMAL 12 13 Use J to place the marker at the second vertical graticule 10 11 Press SHIFT SINGLE J Set analyzer sweep time to 20 s Allow the universal counter enough time to settle at this sweep time Note the measured sweep time on the universal counter and record this value in Table 2 6 The measured sweep time should be a value between the minimum and maximum values given in Table 2 6 Repeat steps 11 and 12 for 200 s sweep time Performance Tests 2 11 3 Sweep Time Accuracy Test gt 20 ms Table 2 6 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 s SWEEP TIME Marker A Time 20s 3 6s 4 4 s 200 s 32s 48 s Sweep Times gt 20 ms 14 Sweep times gt 20 ms are te
69. Video Processor Related Performance Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test Test Description The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT through a step attenuator The instrument is placed in zero frequency span to produce a dc level output from the log amplifier The A4A2 ZERO adjustment which sets the dc offset of the output buffer amplifier of the log board is checked and adjusted if necessary The level into the video processor is adjusted by varying the input signal level and reference level The offsets and gains on the A4A1 Video Processor are adjusted for proper levels using a DVM SPECTRUM ANALYZER asaitp1 DIGITAL VOLTMTER RF INPUT 10dB STEP ATTENUATOR Figure 3 35 Video Processor Adjustments Setup Equipment Digital Voltmeter DVM HP 3456A 10 dB Step Attenuator HP 355D Note The voltage at A4AITP3 may drift noticeably with temperature during this adjustment Allow 4 1 Video Processor to warm up at least one half hour prior to adjustment Procedure 1 Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 35 Remove the top cover 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press _ INSTR_ PRESET 3 Connect DVM to A4AITP1 and DVM ground to the IF casting 4 Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT through 10 dB step attenuator 5 Key in center Frequency 20 MHz and Frequency span 0 Hz Press LIN pushbutt
70. Warning 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below This procedure is for IF Display Sections with serial number prefixes 3001A and below The procedure for serial prefixes 3004A and above is located immediately after this procedure This procedure should be performed whenever the A1A11 High Voltage Multiplier AIV1 CRT or A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly is repaired or replaced IF Display Section 1 2 Z Axis Amplifier A1A3 High Voltage Regulator 1 15 V Regulator A1A7 100 V 5 2 V Regulator This procedure is intended for adjustment purposes only Voltages are present which if contacted could cause serious personal injury Approximately 4000 V dc can be present on the A1A3 High Voltage assembly even when the ac line cord is disconnected Do not attempt to remove the A1A3 High Voltage Assembly from the instrument Do not disconnect the CRT s post accelerator cable the CRT can hold a 18 kV dc charge for several days If for any reason the A1A3 High Voltage Assembly or the post accelerator cable must be removed refer to Discharge Procedure for High Voltage and CRT at the end of this adjustment procedure A 1000 divider probe is used to measure the CRT cathode voltage First the high voltage probe is calibrated by comparing measurements of the 100 V dc supply voltage with and without the probe Any measurement error due to the use of the high voltage probe is calculated
71. YTX delay compensation A6A12C2 0 1 to 0 68 Sets YTX delay compensation A6A12C3 OPEN Not loaded for HP 85660B A6A12C11 0 1 to 0 68 uF Sets YTX delay compensation A6A12C23 0 1 to 0 68 pF Sets YTX delay compensation A6A12R64 13 356 K 15K Sets adjustment range of A6A12R63 5 8 GHz A7TA2C8 Open to 15 pF Sets tuning range of A7A2C4 2 0 22 to 0 68 uH the adjustment range of A7A2 around A A2R3 A7A2R67 A7A2R68 ATA2R69 A8R6 A10A3C26 A10A4C49 A10A4C49 A10A4R29 A10A4R33 196 to 511 Open to 825 6 8 to 61 9 110 to 825 213 to 261 0 to 15 10 to 15 pF 10 to 15 pF 68 1 to 90 9 68 1 to 90 9 100 MHz Sets biasing of A7A2Q5 Sets 10 dBm output level of the 400 MHz signal Sets 10 dBm output level of the 400 MHz signal Sets 10 dBm output level of the 400 MHz signal Sets adjustment range of A8R2 22 V ADJ Selected to minimize mixer distortion Sets adjustment range of A10A4C50 160 MHz PEAK Sets adjustment range of A10A4C50 160 MHz PEAK Sets output power to 20 dBm at A10A4J2 Sets output power to 20 dBm at A10A4J2 Adjustments 3 17 Table 3 3 Factory Selected Components continued Reference Adjustment Range of Values Function of Component Designator Procedure Q or pF Al 1A4R24 348 to 562 Sets YTO loop gain crossover to 20 2 kHz Al 1A5C22 130 to 220 pF Sets YTO loop response 20 MHz A11A5L10 2 2 to 3 3 pF Sets YTO loop response Al
72. adjustment range of SYM 180 to 270 adjustment range of LC CTR 1 0 to 8 2 adjustment range of SYM 180 to 270 adjustment range of LC CTR 180 to 270 adjustment range of LC CTR 180 to 270 adjustment range of LC CTR 4 to 13 adjustment range of center cap 4 to 13 adjustment range of center cap Adjustments 3 15 Table 3 3 Factory Selected Components continued Designator Procedure 0 or pF A4A8R19 100 K1 to 1M Sets adjustment range of LC amplitude A4A8R24 0 to 100 Adjusts bandwidth shape in 10 kHz bandwidth A4A8R26 3 83 K to 9 09 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A8R29 909 to 2 37 K Adjusts LC mode feedback A4A8R30 3 16 K to 8 25 Adjusts LC filter bandwidth A4A8R34 100 K to OPEN A4A8R36 100 to OPEN 85662 60131 only A4A8R36 10 K to OPEN 85662 60190 only A4A8R52 3 83 K to 9 09 K Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A8R55 3 16 K to 8 25 Adjusts LC filter bandwidth A4A9R3 6 81 K to 10 0 Sets TC of 3 kHz RBW A4A9R6 38 3 K to 56 2 Sets TC of 10 kHz RBW A4A9R7 28 7 K to 422 Sets TC of 300 kHz RBW A4A9R10 6 19 K to 9 09 Sets TC of 1 MHz RBW A4A9R11 1 96 K to 2 87 Sets TC of 3 MHz RBW A4A9R46 82 5 K to 147 Sets 1 0 dB step size A4A9R48 261 K to 464 K Sets 0 2 dB step size A4A9R50 56 2 K to 100 Sets 1 2 dB step size A4A9R52 562 K to 1M Sets 0 4 dB step size A4A9R55 46 4 K to 82 5 Sets 1 8 dB step size A4A9R57 316 K to 562 Sets 0 6 dB step siz
73. adjusts reference oscillator frequency 3 12 Adjustments Table 3 3 Factory Selected Components Designator P rocedure 0 or pF A1A2R9 2 87 K to 6 19 Sets intensity level A3A1R72 19 6 K to 42 2 Sets intensity level A3A2R17 121 K to 162 K Sets intensity level 2 21 10 0 to 26 1 Sets intensity level A3A3C27 Open or 1 0 10 0 Compensates for feedthrough of INTG signal to Ul A3A3C32 1 0 to 10 0 Compensates for feedthrough of INTG signal to 011 A3A3R47 5 0 K to 12 5 Compensates for DAC ladder resistance A3A3R48 5 0 K to 12 5 Compensates for DAC ladder resistance A4A1R10 562 to 1 33 K Sets adjustment range of A4A1R36 FS A4A1R67 56 2 K to 825 Compensates for ON resistance of A4A1Q6 A4A2R18 68 1 to 178 Sets adjustment range of 1 620 A4A2R22 1 96 K to 5 11 Adjusts log fidelity A4A2R24 1 Kto31 6K Log fidelity A4A2R36 90 9 to 237 Adjusts overall linear gain A4A2R62 16 2 to 46 4 Sets adjustment range of ATTEN A4A2R86 100 to OPEN Temperature compensation AAA2R88 to OPEN Temperature compensation A4A2R89 1 K to OPEN Temperature compensation A4A2R96 1 K to OPEN Temperature compensation A4A2R97 1 K to OPEN Temperature compensation A4A2R99 to OPEN Temperature compensation A4A3C51 390 to 680 Adjusts bandpass filter shape in wide bandwidths gt 100 kHz A4A3C52 OPEN or 5 6 15 0 Sets adjustment range of CTR A4A3C53 91 to 130 Sets adjustment range of CTR A4A3R15 1
74. and Figure 3 77 See Figure 3 73 for location of adjustments The bandpass response should be gt 22 MHz CH1 A R 05 dB 1 0 dB REF 10 22 dB Figure 3 76 Typical Bandpass SHIFT 1 CHI A R 00 gB 1 0 dB REF 10 22 dB RSRd Figure 3 77 Typical Bandpass SHIFT 51 Key in and note amplitude of the bandpass signal peak Key in SHIFT II T and note amplitude of the bandpass signal peak 52 Continue to key in then QD T while adjusting A23A3Z4 for maximum amplitude and the same amplitude in both states of the Second LO lt 0 1 dB 3 128 Adjustments Second Converter Final Adjustments 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 19 Second Converter Adjustments Repeat steps 14 through 19 to ensure that Second LO frequency and shift are still properly adjusted Check the bandpass at the 3 dB points for both the ZND LO f and On the scalar network analyzer press Max Press cursor A and set the cursor at the 3 dB point 0 1 dB Press cursor A cursor A and set the cursor to the corresponding 3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal The cursor should now read 0 0 1 dB On the synthesized sweeper press and place the marker on either cursor A Press M4 and place the marker on the cursor A on the opposite side of the trace On the synthesized sweeper press MKR A and
75. and set AMPLITUDE to 3 dBm Set HP 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 13 20 MHz Reference Adjustments 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer center Frequency to 20 34 MHz and SCALE to 10 dB division Adjust A16 20 34 MHz NULL A16C12 for minimum 20 34 MHz signal at A16J3 as indicated by HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer display With signal nulled the plates of the NULL adjustment capacitor should be meshed approximately halfway If fully meshed or fully unmeshed a circuit malfunction is indicated Disconnect frequency synthesizer from A16J1 and reconnect cable 2 red to 161 Connect power meter to rear panel INT REF OUT connector Power meter indication should be no more than 5 dB less than that noted in step 3 A27 Time Base output Disconnect A16TP4 from ground Connect power meter to A16J3 Adjust A16 COMB DRIVE A16R31 for power meter indication of 10 0 dBm 1 0 dB Connect power meter to Al6J4 through cable 3 orange Power meter indication should be at least 15 dBm Reconnect cable 3 orange to A6J2 Connect power meter to A16J5 through cable 4 yellow Power meter indication should be at least 10 dBm Reconnect cable 4 yellow to A8J1 On the oscilloscope key in RECALL CLEAR to perform a soft reset Connect the channel 1 probe to the oscilloscope s rear panel PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector Press auro _scate Adjust the channel 1 probe for an optimum
76. graticule pattern illuminating a large rectangular area If necessary adjust the reference level until the graticule pattern is completely filled 10 Press and then to turn off the CRT annotation and graticule pattern Connect a 56503 photometer probe to the Tektronix J 16 digital photometer Set the photometer to the range 11 Place the photometer light probe hood against the IF Display Section glass RFI filter and adjust A1AZR319 INT GAIN for a photometer reading of 80 NITS cd m This reading must be made with the glass RFI filter in place in front of the CRT It might be necessary to slightly trim the top and bottom of the photometer probe s hood so that it will fit flush against the glass RFI filter If a standard J 16 photometer is used instead of metric option 02 adjust A1A2R319 for a photometer reading of 23 5 fl footlamberts 12 Set the LINE switch to STANDBY and then back to ON The spectrum analyzer power up annotation should be visible on the CRT display This includes the firmware datecode 13 For the best focus near the center of the CRT display adjust the following potentiometers in the sequence listed below Repeat as needed to optimize center screen focus A1A8R14 FOCUS LIMIT A1A2R517 ASTIG A1A2R513 3D for best focus of annotation short vectors A1A2R409 FOCUS COMP for best focus of graticule lines long vectors 14 Adjust A1A2R426 T B FOC for best focus at the top and bottom
77. into the adjustment specification of the CRT cathode voltage which is adjusted with the Al1A6 HV ADJUST control When the CRT cathode voltage is properly adjusted the CRT filament voltage will be 4 45 0 04 V rms measured with CRT beam at cut off which is required for maximum CRT life The filament voltage is referenced to the high voltage cathode and can only be measured directly with special equipment Adjustments 3 29 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below Equipment High Voltage Adjustment Procedure Warning Warning 3 30 Adjustments DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE FUNCT ION FUNCTION DIGITAL VOLTMETER E GENERATOR GENERATOR TE EERO dex HI VOLTAGE even oon 50 PROBE ooo ooon seme BEES SIGNAL ANALYZER Figure 3 5 High Voltage Adjustment Setup Digital Voltmeter DVM HP 3456A DC High Voltage Probe 1000 1 divider HP 34111A Display Adjustment PC Board service accessory 85662 60088 Digitizing Oscilloscope 2v copie a co od HP 54501A 10 1 Divider Probe cvei 10482 Function Generator 2 required enne HP 3312A In the following procedure it is necessary to probe voltages which if contacted could cause serious personal injury Use a nonmetallic alignment tool when making adjustments Be extremely care
78. is disconnected The CRT can hold a 9500 V dc charge for several days if the post accelerator cable is improperly disconnected Remove the ac line cord from both instrument sections With the ac power cords disconnected voltages can still be present which if contacted could cause serious personal injury 2 Obtain an electrician s screwdriver which has a thin blade at least eight inches long The handle of the screwdriver must be made of an insulating material Adjustments 3 43 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above 3 44 Adjustments Note 3 Connect one end of a jumper wire made of insulated wire and two alligator clips to the blade of the screwdriver Connect the other end of the jumper wire to the metal chassis of the IF Display Section This grounds the screwdriver 4 Slide the screwdriver s blade between the CRT and the sheet metal as shown in Figure 3 15 Gently work the tip of the screwdriver under the post accelerator cable s rubber shroud Make sure that the screwdriver s tip touches the connection between the post accelerator cable and the CRT You should hear a cracking sound when the cable discharges 5 Remove the cover from the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator assembly 6 Touch the screwdriver s tip to the top lead of each of the 11 large vertical capacitors on the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator assembly 7 The 1 High Voltage Regulator and AIV CRT assemblies should now be dischar
79. known frequency standard and adjusted for minimum frequency error This procedure does not adjust the short term stability or long term stability of the 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator which are determined by characteristics of the particular oscillator and the environmental and warmup conditions to which it has been recently exposed The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously not in STANDBY for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment to allow both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize O bb eG TIMEBASE FREQUENCY COUNTER in our FREQUENCY STANDARD aooosoo ooo opopo Sac ao Figure 3 54 Time Base Adjustment Setup Frequency Standard HP 5061A B Frequency Counter HP 5334A B Cables BNC cable 122 cm 48 in 2 required HP 10503A The spectrum analyzer must be ON continuously not in STANDBY for at least 72 hours immediately prior to oscillator adjustment This allows both the temperature and frequency of the oscillator to stabilize Adjustment should not be attempted before the oscillator is allowed to reach its specified aging rate Failure to allow sufficient stabilization time could result in oscillator misadjustment Adjustments 3 99 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2848A to 3217A05567 The A27A2 10 MHz Quartz
80. noted in step 9 0 0005 V dc See Figure 3 34 for location of adjustment If unable to adjust A4A3R67 AMPTD for proper indication increase or decrease value of A4A3R66 If A4A3R67 is fully counter clockwise increase the value of A4A3R66 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Repeat steps 9 through 11 until DVM indication is the same 0 0005 V dc with A4A3TP7 jumpered to 4 8 and with A4A3TP7 and A4A3TP8 not jumpered Remove the jumper VTV and ATTEN Adjustments Press LIN pushbutton Adjust frequency synthesizer output level for DVM indication of 1 000 0 0002 V dc Synthesizer level ____ dBm Press LOG enter dB DIV Wait three minutes for the log assemblies to stabilize Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level by 50 dB Adjust A4A2R91 12 VTV for DVM indication of 500 1 mV dc See Figure 3 34 for location of adjustment Increase the frequency synthesizer output level by 50 dB to the level of step 14 Adjust A4A2R61 ATTEN for DVM indication of 1 000 0 0001 V dc See Figure 3 34 for location of adjustment If unable to adjust A4A2R61 ATTEN for proper indication increase or decrease value of A4A2R62 If A4A2R61 is fully clockwise increase the value of A4A2R62 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Repeat steps 17 through 20 until specifications of steps 18 and 20 are achieved without further adjustment Because adjustments A4A2R61 and A4A2R91 are interactive several iterations are ne
81. of graticule and centered on center graticule line Press MARKER OFF then MARKER Using DATA knob adjust marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 707 X Adjust A4A9R65 10 kHz for MKR A indication of 5 00 kHz while maintaining marker at 3 dB point 707 X using DATA knob See Figure 3 45 for location of adjustment Press MARKER A Adjust marker to 3 dB point on opposite side of signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3 dB bandwidth of the 10 kHz bandwidth 3 dB bandwidth should be 10 0 fl O kHz Key in 3 kHz and FREQUENCY span 5 kHz If necessary readjust REFERENCELEVEL and center Frequency using DATA knob to place signal peak near top of graticule and centered on center graticule line Press MARKER OFF then MARKER Using DATA knob adjust marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 707 X Adjust A4A9R66 3 kHz for MKR A indication of 1 5 kHz while maintaining marker at 3 dB point 707 X using DATA knob See Figure 3 45 for location of adjustments Press MARKER A Adjust marker to 3 dB point on opposite side of signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3 dB bandwidth of the 3 kHz bandwidth 3 dB bandwidth should be 3 00 0 30 kHz 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments 10 Step G
82. of the 10 kHz filter using the formula in step 8 Record in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer FREGuENcv to 30 kHz Set the pulse function generator WID to 3 33 ys On the spectrum analyzer key in RES BW 3 kHz i 30 kHz center FREQUENCY 30 kHz Frequency span 12 kHz 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 48 44 45 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test SWEEP TIME auTO SWEEP SINGLE MARKER PEAK SEARCH Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer to 300 Hz On the spectrum analyzer key in 0 Hz 0 5 seconds SWEEP MARKER PEAK SEARCH Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Calculate the Impulse BW of the 3 kHz filter using the formula in step 8 Record in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer to 10 kHz Set the pulse function generator WID to 10 pus On the spectrum analyzer key in 1 kHz i 10 kHz 10 kHz 4 kHz SWEEP TIME AUTO SWEEP SINGLE MARKER PEAK SEARCH Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer to 200 Hz On the spectrum analyzer key in 0 Hz 0 5 seconds SWEEP siNGLE MARKER PEAK SEARCH Record MARKER amplitude in Table Table 4 2 Calculate the Impulse BW of the 1 kHz filter using the formula in step 8 Record in Table 4 2 On the spectrum analyzer press and select SIGNAL INPUT 1 Connect the spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 1 On the spectrum analyzer
83. of the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly 3 38 Adjustments 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above Note Note Reference Description Warning 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above This procedure is for IF Display Sections with serial number prefixes 3004A and above The procedure for serial prefixes 3001A and below is located immediately before this procedure This procedure should be performed whenever the A1V1 CRT or 1 High Voltage Regulator Assembly is repaired or replaced IF Display Section A 1A2 Z Axis Amplifier A1A3 High Voltage Regulator 1 15 V Regulator A1A7 120 V 5 2 V Regulator This procedure is intended for adjustment purposes only Voltages are present which if contacted could cause serious personal injury Approximately 2400 V dc can be present on the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly even when the ac line cord is disconnected Do not attempt to remove the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly from the instrument Do not disconnect the CRT s post accelerator cable the CRT can hold a 9500 V dc charge for several days If for any reason the A1A3 High Voltage Assembly or the post accelerator cable must be removed refer to Discharge Procedure for High Voltage and CRT at the end of this adjustment procedure A 1000 1 divider probe is used to measure the CRT cathode voltage First the high voltage probe is calibrated by comparing measure
84. pits Power sSensor eee RC en ase aa Detector 2 required 20 dB Attenuator 3 112 Adjustments SPECTRUM ANALYZER ooo aa a aoooo ooo aocoo pocoo Got z c5 nn Come RF INPUT POWER METER Spectrum Analyzer Synthesized Sweeper cxx ca 6 l3 POWER SENSOR DETECTOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER Devise Under Test A2043 A19J1 A19J2 a a L1 oroa oS cona HP 8566A B HP 8340A B HP 8757A HP 11667A Opt 001 HP 436A HP 8482A HP 11664A HP 8491A Opt 020 pon pgo epoca 206020920 Procedure Second IF Amplifier Adjustments 1 3 10 16 Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment Adapters N f to 3 5 0 1250 1745 N to BNC f 2 1250 0780 Type N f to BNC f 2 required 1250 1474 APC 3 5 f to APC 3 5 f 1250 1749 Cables BNC to SMB Snap On Service Accessory 2 required 85680 60093 BNC 122 cm 48 in 3 required 10503A SMA m to m zs eee dee RR UR 5061 5458 Position instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3 63 with bott
85. reference error x center frequency term of the specification FREQUENCY SPECTRUM ANALYZER STANDARD SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER OMe o oo See Doono aa FREG STANDARD EXT J ADAPTER ADAPTER CABLE ASSEMBLY Figure 2 1 Center Frequency Accuracy Test Setup Performance Tests 2 3 1 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Equipment Procedure 1 2 2 4 Performance Tests Synthesized Sweeper HP8340A Frequency Standard 10 MHz standard accy within 1 part in 1016 e g HP 5061A Adapter N m to SMA f HP1250 1250 61 cm 24 in Cable Assembly SMA Male Connectors HP 5061 1086 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 Press INSTR PRESET RECALL 9 on the analyzer 3 Adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitude trace 4 5 Press INSTR PRESET Set the synthesized sweeper for a 100 000 MHz signal at a level of approximately 0 dBm Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 1 Set analyzer CENTER_Frequency and FREQUENCY SPAN and synthesized sweeper frequency according to Table 2 2 At each setting press PEAK SEARCH MKR CF to center the signal Adjust REFERENCE LEVEL as necessary to place signal peak at a convenient level Record the CENTER readout frequency in the table for each setting The limits for this frequency are given in the table See Figure 2 2 t PEF 0 dBm ATTEN 18 dB 19 dB LENTER 1
86. spans chosen are based on the architecture of the HP 8568B RF hardware Span Assembly Being Swept 200 Hz VTO Oscillator low divide 100 kHz VTO Oscillator low divide 100 1 kHz VTO Oscillator high divide 1 MHz VTO Oscillator high divide 1 01 MHz FM Coil of Yig Oscillator 20 MHz FM Coil of Yig Oscillator 20 1 MHz Main Coil of Yig Oscillator 1 5 GHz Main Coil of Yig Oscillator SPECTRUM ANALYZER SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER ees 10 MHz 10 MHz FREQ nan REF INPUT E Doo 000 REF OUTPUT s onano nano aO of 0500 SIGNAL INPUT 2 ADAPTER Figure 2 3 Frequency Span Accuracy Test Setup 2 6 Performance Tests Spectrun Equipment Procedure Analyzer 2 Frequency Span Accuracy Test Synthesized Sweeper esses 83640A AdapterTypeN m to 1250 1250 8 5061 5458 Cable BNC122cm 48in eeeeetseeeeeeseeeceeeaceeceeeeeeeeneees 0503 1 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 3 2 Press INSTR PRESET on analyzer 3 Press CENTER FREQUENCY 100 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN 200 Hz Connect synthesized sweeper tot spectrum analyzer RF input 2 5 On synthesized sweeper select external REFERENCE and key in 10 11 12 13 0 dBm Press and key in 99 999
87. sweep then press MARKER PEAK SEARCH MKR CF 6 Press SHIFT VIDEO SWEEP SINGLE 10 to initiate video averaging of 10 sweeps Wait for completion of sweeps 7 Press MARKER SEARCH A and position movable marker at the peak of each line related sideband 120 Hz 180 Hz and 240 Hz for 60 Hz line frequency 100 Hz 150 Hz and 200 Hz for 50 Hz line frequency etc The MARKER A amplitude for each sideband should be lt 85 dB see Figure 2 31 120 Hz 100 Hz dB 180 Hz 150 Hz dB 240 Hz 200 Hz dB Option 400 1 2 3 4 17 Line Related Sidebands Tests hp PEF 19 0 48m ATTEN 1 10 48 D hi Dm 9 999976 RES Bw 1 CENTER 1 10 Hz Figure 2 31 Line Related Sidebands Measurement Press INSTR Preset Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 Press 8 and adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of 10 00 dBm e 0 02 dB Press INSTR PRESET Key in the following analyzer settings CENTER FREQUENCY gt III 20 MHz REFERENCE LEVEL e Ie 10 dBm FREQUENCY SPAN ee n 3 kHz Wait for completion of the sweep then press MARKER PEAK SEARCH MKR CF Press SHIFT VIDEO BW SWEEP SINGLE 10 to initiate video averaging of 10 sweeps Wait for completion of sweeps Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH Q and position movable marker at the peak of each line related sideband 400 Hz 800 Hz and 1200 Hz The MARKER A amplitude f
88. the location of the test point With power supplied to the instrument 1 is at a voltage level of approximately 4000 V dc Be extremely careful AIA3 HighVoltage Regu lator HV TP A1A3TPS Figure 3 7 Location of Label and Test Point 13 Reconnect ac line cords to both instrument sections Set the LINE switch to ON 14 Wait approximately 30 seconds for the dc regulator circuits to stabilize 15 Adjust ALA6R32 HV ADJ for DVM indication equal to the calibration factor calculated in step 8 times the voltage labeled on the top of A1A3 High Voltage Regulator noted in step 11 See Figure 3 6 for the location of the adjustment V dc EXAMPLE Focus and Intensity Adjustments 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below If the calibration factor calculated in step 8 is 0 00099 and 1 is labeled for 3875 V then adjust ALA6R32 HV ADJ for a DVM indication of 0 00099 x 3875 V 3 836 V dc With the front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise wait approximately 30 minutes to allow the high voltage supply to stabilize and the CRT to normalize This soft turn on will extend CRT life expectancy particularly if a new CRT has just been installed Readjust A1A6R32 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the voltage determined in step 1
89. the same as the level of the narrow bandwidth signal Optionally the input signal is removed and the IF signal is monitored at the output of the Bandwidth Filters using a spectrum analyzer with an active probe The 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator and all harmonics are then adjusted for minimum amplitude P 85024 HIGH FREOUENCY PROBE E SPECTRUM ANALYZER 7 7 SPECTRUM ANALYZER 55 oooo O 6 oono Sad b do bonno b 1 o 20 ona 9000 90005 moo nnon anoon Soo V 2222o Boo Figure 3 50 Down Up Converter Adjustments Setup 8566B 85024 Spectrum Analyzer Active Probe 1 Position Instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 50 and remove top cover 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET 3 Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT 4 Key in cENrTER FREQUENCY 20 MHz Frequency span 10 kHz 0 dB RES BW 1 kHz ress LIN pushbutton PEAK SEARCH and then MARKER 5 Key in 1 MHz Optional Note 11 Down Up Converter Adjustments 6 Adjust A4A6A1R29 WIDE GAIN to align markers on CRT display MKR A level should indicate 1 00 X See Figure 3 51 for location of adjustment 7 Disconnect CAL OUTPUT from RF INPUT Perform the following procedure
90. to the DVM Connect the probe to 1 7 Note the DVM indication DVM Indication 8 Divide the DVM indication in step 7 by the DVM indication in step 5 This gives the calibration factor needed to compensate for high voltage probe error Calibration Factor 9 Disconnect the high voltage probe from AlATTP3 Set the LINE switch to STANDBY Remove the ac line cord from both instrument sections The MAINS power on indicator AIASDSI red LED should be completely off before proceeding with this procedure See Figure 3 6 The indicator will remain lit for several seconds after the ac line cord has been removed and will go out slowly the light becomes dimmer until it is completely out Adjustments 3 3 1 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below Warning Note Warning 3 32 Adjustments With the protective cover removed in the following step do not place hands near the A1A3 High Voltage assembly High voltage approximately 4000 V dc can be present even when the ac line cord is disconnected 10 Wait at least one minute for capacitors to discharge to a safe level 11 Remove the protective cover from the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator A label should be visible on the A1A3T1 High Voltage Transformer Record the voltage listed on the label for use in step 15 If the label is missing use the nominal value of 3790 V dc 12 Connect the high voltage probe to ALA3TP3 See Figure 3 7 for
91. using the parts listed in Table 3 7 TO 415v te doo R1 1960 15V R2 3 8 gi R3 584 10K 2 100K OUTPUT OVdc 2Vde or 10Vdc R8 1000 27 R6 OFFSET Xj AbJusT GS HEC TO 15V Figure 3 93 Low Noise DC Supply Table 3 7 Parts for Low Noise DC Supply R eference D esignation HP Fart Number CD 0160 2055 9 CAPACITOR FXD 01 pf 1250 0083 CONNECTOR BNC 0698 0083 RESISTOR FXD 1 96K 1 125W 0757 0442 RESISTOR FXD 10K 1 125W 0757 0442 RESISTOR FXD 10K 1 125W 0757 0465 RESISTOR FXD 100K 1 125W 0757 0290 RESISTOR FXD 6 19 K 1 125W RESISTOR VARIABLE 50K 20 RESISTOR FXD 1K 1 125W RESISTOR FXD 1K 1 125W SWITCH TOGGLE S POSITION IC DUAL OP AMP DIODE BREAKDOWN 6 19V RESISTOR FXD 1 96K 1 125W 2100 2733 0757 0280 0757 0280 3101 1792 1826 0092 1902 0049 1902 0049 no N Q DW QN tn Oo oO oco 3 150 Adjustments Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration The Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration shown in Figure 3 94 can be constructed using the parts listed in Table 3 8 and Table 3 9 Table 3 8 list the parts required for the construction of 21 4 MHz IF crystal filter bypass networks used with the A4A4 and A4A8 assemblies Two 21 4 MHz bypass networks are required Table 3 9 list the parts required for the construction of 3 MHz IF crystal filter bypass networks
92. wait for the MAINS indicators red LEDs to go completely out Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been disconnected from its source of power Use a non metallic tuning tool whenever possible This manual contains procedures for testing and adjusting HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzers including those with Option 001 75 Ohm RF INPUT Option 400 400 Hz operation Option 462 and Option 857 installed The procedures in this manual can also be used to adjust HP 8568A Spectrum Analyzers that have been converted into HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzers through the installation of an HP 8568AB Retrofit Kit formerly HP 8568A 01K Retrofit Kit General Information 1 1 Operation Verification Option 462 Instruments Option 857 Instruments 1 2 General Information A high confidence level in the instrument s operation can be achieved by running only the Operation Verification Program since it tests most of the instrument s specifications It is recommended that the Operation Verification Program be used for incoming inspection and after repairs since it requires much less time and test equipment A description of the program can be found in the Installation and Verification manual Option 462 instruments require that the performance tests and adjustment procedures listed below be performed instead of their standard versions included in chapters two and three Information on Option 462 versions are
93. will conduct heat away from the oscillator circuit shifting the operating conditions 17 18 19 20 Use nonconductive adjustment tool to adjust the 18 turn FREQ ADJ capacitor on the A27A1 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator for a Frequency Counter indication of 0 00 Hz See Figure 3 53 for the location of the A27A1 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator RF Section bottom view A27A1 Figure 3 53 Location of A27A1 Adjustment On the Frequency Counter select a 10 second gate time by pressing 10 GATE TIME The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal and 10 0 MHz with a resolution of 0 001 Hz 1 mHz Wait at least 2 gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle and then adjust the 16 turn FINE adjustment on the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard for a stable Frequency Counter indication of 0 000 Frequency Correction Factor 0 010 Hz Replace the RF Section bottom cover and reconnect the short jumper cable between the FREQ REFERENCE INT and EXT connectors 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2848A to 3217A05567 Reference Related Performance Test Description Equipment Procedure Note 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2848A to 3217A05567 RF Section A27A1 Frequency Standard Regulator A27A2 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test The frequency of the internal 10 MHz Frequency Standard is compared to a
94. 0 0 01 Hz at 10 MHz Hz Table 2 19 Performance Test Record Hewlett Packard Company Tested by Model HP 8568B Report No Serial No Date IF Display Section RF Section Performance Tests 2 69 Test 1 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Step 8 Center Frequency Readout Error Test Record Spectrum Analyzer Generator Comb FREQUENCY SPAN CENTER FREQUENCY Center Readout Frequency MHz MHz M easured 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz EXT TRIG 10 MHz 1 2 5 or 10 MHz 10 MHz trigger signal 10 MHz 10 MHz 1499 8 99 8 100 2 499 8 500 2 999 8 1000 2 1500 2 1 MHz 999 98 1000 02 100 kHz 999 998 1000 002 10 kHz 999 9998 1000 0002 2 70 Performance Tests Test 2 Frequency Span Accuracy Test Test 2 Frequency Span Accuracy Test Steps 7 9 and 11 Wide Span Error Spectrumn Analyzer Synthesized Sweeper DUT Measured Span IFrequency Cf 45 span cf 45 span B A D C 99 999 910 MHz 100 000 090 MHz 180 Hz 99 955 000 MHz 100 045 000 MHz 90 000 Hz 99 954955 MHz 100 045045 MHz 90 090 kHz 99 550000 MHz 100 450 000 MHz 900 000 kHz 99 550 550 MHz 100 450 500 MHz 909 000 kHz 91 000000 MHz 109 000000 MHz 18 000 MHz 90 955 000 MHz 109 045 000 MHz 18 090 MHz 225 MHz 1575 MHz 1350 MHz Step 12 Span Error Freq Span Span Error ADUT ASyn from Table 2 3 10 Hz 10 Hz 5000 Hz 5000 Hz 5
95. 0 GATE TIME Offset the displayed frequency by 10 0 MHz by pressing MATH SEtect EnTER CHS EEX 10 CHS EEX 6 SELECT ENTER SELECT ENTER The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard and 10 0 MHz with a displayed resolution of 1 mHz 0 001 Hz Wait at least two gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle and record the frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard as reading 1 Reading 1 ________ mHz The A27A2 Quartz Crystal Oscillator has a typical adjustment range of 10 MHz 10 Hz The oscillator frequency should be within this range after 48 hours of continuous operation 10 11 12 13 14 Allow the spectrum analyzer to remain powered not in STANDBY and undisturbed for an additional 24 hours Repeat steps 3 through 7 and record the frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard as reading 2 Reading 2 mHz If the difference between reading 2 and reading 1 is greater than 1 mHz the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard has not achieved its specified aging rate the spectrum analyzer should remain powered not in STANDBY and undisturbed for an additional 24 hour interval Then repeat steps 3 through 7 recording the frequency of the 10 MHz Frequency Standard at the end of each 24 hour interval until the specified aging rate of 1 mHz day 1x10E9 day is achieved Reading 3 mHz Reading 4
96. 0 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Set REFERENCE LEVEL to O dB Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of 2 00 dBm Set the amplitude increment for 0 1 dB steps Press MARKER peak SEARCH A Set the analyzer and the frequency synthesizer amplitude according to Table 2 14 At each setting note the MKR A amplitude and record it in the table Find the largest positive deviation and the largest negative deviation for reference level settings from 0 dBm to 70 dBm in Table 2 12 Also find the largest positive and negative deviations for the last five settings in the table A B Reference Level Range 0 to 70 dBm 80 to 120 dBm Largest Positive Deviation dB dB Largest Negative Deviation dB dB Find the largest positive and negative deviations in Table 2 13 and Table 2 14 Table 2 13 Table 2 14 Largest Positive Deviation dB dB Largest Negative Deviation dB dB Performance Tests 2 37 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test 2 38 Performance Tests 25 26 27 28 Table 2 14 IF Gain Uncertainty 0 1 dB Steps a Frequency Deviation dBm Synthesizer MKR A Amplitude Amplitude 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 The sum of the positive deviations recorded in A C and D should not exceed 0 6 dB The sum of the negative deviations recorded in A C and D should not be less than 0 6 dB
97. 0 0 to 82 5 Log fidelity A4A3R25 19 6 to 82 5 Log fidelity A4A3R29 51 1 to 1 K Log fidelity A4A3R35 10 0 to 61 9 Log fidelity A4A3R38 61 9 to 1 96 Log fidelity A4A3R47 2 15 K to 13 3 Log fidelity A4A3R54 51 1 to 133 adjustment range of 1610 A4A3R66 f 46 4 K to 215 K adjustment range of AMPTD Adjustments 3 13 Table 3 3 Factory Selected Components continued Designator Procedure 0 or pF A4A3R74 1 78 K to 13 3 Log fidelity A4A3R79 8 25 K to 82 5 Bandpass filter temperature compensation A4A3R80 1 0 K to 6 81 Bandpass filter temperature compensation A4A3R81 1 K OPEN Bandpass filter temperature compensation A4A4C10 1 0 to 8 2 Sets adjustment range of SYM A4A4C17 180 to 270 Sets adjustment range of LC CTR A4A4C38 1 0 to 8 2 Sets adjustment range of SYM A4A4C66 1 0 to 8 2 Sets adjustment range of SYM A4A4C70 180 to 270 Sets adjustment range of LC CTR A4A4C92 180 to 270 Sets adjustment range of LC CTR A4A4C97 180 to 270 A4A4C99 4 to 13 Sets adjustment range of center cap A4A4C100 4 to 13 Sets adjustment range of center cap A4A4C101 4 to 13 Sets adjustment range of center cap A4A4R3 0 to 9 09 Matches amplitude of LC to XTAL bandwidths A4A4R16 3 16 K to 8 25 K Adjusts LC filter bandwidth A4A4R20 6 19 K to 12 1 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A4R35 383 to 825 Matches amplitude of LC to XTAL bandwidths A4A4R40 6 19 K to 12 1 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A4R42 1 K to OP
98. 1 8 51 Use Figure 3 2 for IF Display Sections with serial numbers 3001A and below Use Figure 3 3 for IF Display Sections with serial numbers 3004A and above 3 Verify that the 15 V indicator A1A6DS1 yellow LED is lit Adjustments 3 25 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments 4 Connect the DVM to A1AG6TP3 on the IF Display Section DVM indication should be 15 000 0 010 V dc If the voltage is out of tolerance adjust ALA6R9 15 ADJ for the specified voltage A1A7TP2 A1 A7DS1 ATA 5 20 ES REG ASSY REG ASSY A1A6DS1 mh ies K A1A8DS1 237 ECT IF IER 1 6 3 AS Tt jew Bo MIS o 415v ore b 56 eNO 0o A1A6R9 A1A7DS2 me jw Oik A1A7TP3 Ps 052 iz AG ATA6TP4 5 Hi E DA E NI i 25 e a Figure 3 2 IF Display Section Low Voltage Adjustments SN 3001A and Below 1 7 2 oh 7051 6 5 2 120 A1A6DS1 COR KL A1A8DS 1 e ATAGTP3 acies EE day 205 PY tisy aay Ke zz o o oss TPI 08 G L Or A e Go ATA6R9 i Al 7052 052 15v fera mo im E ATA7TP3 Ld A1A6DS2 d a AG ATAGTP4 E Y 5 ij TT H e 25 o 28 Figure 3 3 IF Display Section Low Voltage Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 5 Verify that the 15 V indicator ALA6DS2 yellow LED is lit 6 Connect the DVM to AL
99. 1 Down Up Converter Adjustments Down Converter Gain Adjustment Note If a gain problem is suspected in the 10 Hz to 1 kHz resolution bandwidths perform the following procedure to test and adjust the gain through A4A6A2 1 Place A4A6 on extender boards 2 On the spectrum analyzer being tested press INST preset and set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings CENTER FREQUENCY 20 MHz RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH 1 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN 0Hz REFERENCE LEVEL 0 00004 10 dBm INPUT ATTENUATION 10 dB 3 Connect an active probe to a second spectrum analyzer and set the spectrum analyzer to the following settings CENTER FREQUENCY 21 4 MHz RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH 100 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN 200 Hz REFERENCE LEVEL 30 dBm INPUT ATTENUATION 10 dB SCALE iubes dave hgh gt ta detente LOG 1 dB div 4 Measure the signal at A4A6A2TP4 using the active probe and record below The signal level should be approximately 33 dBm Signal level at TPA dBM 5 Change the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer used for measuring the signals to 3 MHz Measure the signal at A4A6A2P1 9 The signal level should be 10 dB 0 6 dB lower than the signal measured in the previous step Signal level at PI 9 1 dBM
100. 1 MHz bandwidth 1 O dB MHz bandwidth 30 kHz and 100 kHz bandwidth switching uncertainty figures only applicable lt 90 Relative Humidity The CAL OUTPUT signal is applied to the input of the spectrum analyzer The deviation in peak amplitude of the signal trace is then measured as each resolution bandwidth filter is switched in None required 1 Press INSTR PRESET 2 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 3 Key in the following control settings CENTER FREQUENCY 20 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN 5 MHz ERES 8 dBm t denen MHz 4 Press LOG enter dB DIV and key in 1 dB Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH 5 Key in settings according to Table 4 6 Press MARKER PEAK sEARCH at each setting then read the amplitude deviation from the MARKER A readout at the upper right of the display see Figure 4 6 The allowable deviation for each resolution bandwidth setting is shown in the table 6 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test c REF 8 0 dBm ATTEN 10 dB 0 00 d 1 dB eee Lg dT Figure 4 6 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement Table 4 6 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Frequency Deviation Allowable Span MKR A Deviation Readout dB dB 1 MHz i 0 ref 3 MHz 1 300 kHz 1 100 kHz 1 30 kHz i 10 kHz i 3 kHz i 1 kHz 1 300 Hz i 100 Hz 1 30 Hz 1 10 Hz i Option 462 4 17 Te
101. 10 0 K to 17 8 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R46 10 0 K to 17 8 K Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R56 7 50 K to 13 3 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R57 7 50 K to 13 3 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R60 38 3 to 68 1 Compensates for gain of A4A6A1 A4A7R66 38 3 to 68 1 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R68 100 to 178 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R70 383 to 681 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R72 1 47 K to 2 61 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R74 38 3 to 68 1 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R76 100 to 178 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R78 383 to 681 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R80 1 47 K to 2 61 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R82 38 3 to 68 1 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R84 100 to 178 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth AAATR86 383 to 681 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R88 1 47 K to 2 61 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R90 3 83 to 68 1 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R92 100 to 178 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R94 383 to 681 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R96 1 47 K to 2 61 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth AA4A TTR98 3 83 to 68 1 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R100 100 to 178 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R102 383 to 681 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R104 1 47 K to 2 61 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth For Option 462 see back of this table for exceptions to A4AT 1 0 to 8 2
102. 1A2C209 in approximately equal amounts Do not adjust one to its minimum value and the other to its maximum value 18 Use the oscilloscope markers to measure the risetime falltime and percent overshoot of the composite X defection waveform Rise and fall times should both be less than approximately 65 ns between the 10 and 90 points on the waveform Overshoot should be less than 3 approximately 0 25 divisions See Figure 3 28 OVERSHOOT 90 OVERSHOOT Figure 3 28 Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment W aveform 3 56 Adjustments 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 19 Connect the oscilloscope s channel 1 probe to ALA2TP104 and the channel 4 probe to A1A2TP105 See Figure 3 25 for the location of the test points Connect the output of the pulse function generator to J2 Y input on the Display Adjustment PC board in the A3AZ slot 20 The Y Deflection Amplifier is identical to the X Deflection Amplifier Repeat steps 12 through 18 for the Y Deflection Amplifier using R127 R120 R117 C104 and C109 respectively Pulse Response of 21 Disconnect the oscilloscope channel 4 probe from the spectrum Control Gate Z analyzer Connect the oscilloscope channel 1 probe to Amplifier to BLANK AlA2TP301 and connect the probe s ground lead to A1A2TP501 Input 22 On the oscilloscope press RECALL CLEAR to perform a soft res
103. 1A5R22 15 to 51 1 Q Sets YTO lorgspdifse to 30 MHz A13C22 620 to 1300 Sets period of microprocessor clock A15C10 62 to 91 Sets oscillator frequency to 10 MHz 0 75 MHz A16R46 13 73 874 K 74 25 K Sets adjustment range of A16R72 GAIN 1 Serial Prefix 2813A to 2816A 8 25 to 12 1 Centers 3 kHz BW adjustment range 82 5 to I21 K Centers 10 kHz BW adjustment range 110 to 162 K Centers 300 kHz BW adjustment range 14 7 to 21 5 Centers 1 MHz BW adjustment range 162 to 237 K Centers 3 MHz BW adjustment range 82 5 to 147 K Sets 1 0 dB step size 261 to 464 K Sets 0 2 dB step size 56 2 to 100 K Sets 1 2 dB step size 562Kto1MO Sets 0 4 dB step size 46 4 to 82 5 Sets 1 8 dB step size 316 to 562 K Sets 0 6 dB step size 422 to 750 K Sets 0 8 dB step size 619 K to 1 1 MQ Sets 0 1 dB step size 90 to 162 Sets 1 6 dB step size 61 9 to 110 K Sets 1 4 dB step size Serial Prefix 2810A and Below A4A9R69 196 K to 348 Sets 1 4 dB step size A4A9R70 215 K to 383 Sets 1 dB step size A4A9R71 147 K to 261 K__ Sets 1 8 dB step size 3 18 Adjustments Table 3 3 Factory Selected Components continued Reference Adjustment Range of Values Function of Component Designator Procedure 2 or pF O ption 462 A4A7R12 5 62 K to 7 5 K A4A7R13 5 62 K to 7 5 K A4A7R23 5 62 K to 7 5 K A4A7R24 5 62 K to 7 5 K A4A7R34 5 62 K to 7 5 K A4A7R35 5 62 K to 7 5 K A4A7R45 5 11 K to 6 81 K A4A7R46 5 11 K to 6 81 K A4A7R56 5 11
104. 2 for location of adjustments If unable to adjust A4A4C65 SYM for satisfactory signal symmetry increase or decrease value of A4A4C66 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values 23 All crystal filter bypass networks are removed Signal should be centered and symmetrical If not go back to step 16 and repeat adjustments 24 Press MARKER PEAK searcH and MARKER In 25 Key in FREQUENCY span 20 kHz 3 kHz and MARKER PEAK SEARCH 26 Adjust A4A4R49 XTAL to align markers on display MARKER A level should indicate 1 00 X See Figure 3 42 for location of adjustment A4A8 LC Adjustments 27 Disconnect cable 97 white violet from A4A6J1 and reconnect to A4A8J1 Reconnect cable 89 gray white to A4A6J1 28 Key in 100 kHz and_ rrequency span 200 kHz 29 Press REFERENCE LeveL and adjust DATA knob to place signal peak two division from the top graticule line 30 Adjust A4A8C32 LC CTR and A4A8C46 LC CTR for maximum MARKER level as indicated by CRT annotation See Figure 3 43 for location of adjustments If unable to adjust A4A8C32 and A4A8C46 LC CTR adjustments for satisfactory signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A8C35 and A4A8C49 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter R7 10dB R6 20dB C66 LC DIP C32 1 CTR C67 LC DIP C46 LC CTR R35 LC TR e Figure 3
105. 2 1 Recommended Test Equipment at the beginning of this manual Any equipment that satisfies the critical specifications given in the list may be substituted for the recommended model Equipment Required Test Record The Operation Verification Program provides a detailed test record when a printer is used with the controller If manual performance tests are done results of the performance tests may be tabulated in the HP 8568B Performance Test Record at the end of this section The HP 8568B Performance Test Record lists all of the tested specifications and the acceptable ranges for the measurement values obtained during the tests Allow 1 2 hour warm up time for the HP 8568B before beginning the Performance Tests Note Table 2 1 Performance Test Cross Reference Function or Characteristic ld Performance Test No Center Frequency Readout Frequency Spans Sweep Time Accuracy gt 20 ms 3 dB Bandwidths Bandwidth Shape Bandwidth Amplitudes Input Attenuator Accuracay Frequency Response RF Gains IF Gains Log Scales Accuracy Log and Linear Amplifier Fidelity Noise Floor Residual Responses Spurious Responses Residual FM Line Related Sidebands CAL OUTPUT Level Fast Sweep Times 1ST LO OUTPUT Amplitude Frequency Reference 2 2 Performance Tests u tn A Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Frequency Span Accuracy Test Sweep Time Accuracy Test Resolution Bandwidth
106. 2 R127 Y POSN A1A2 R220 X GAIN A1A2 R227 X POSN A1A2 R319 INT GAIN 1 2 R409 FOCUS COMP A1A2 R426 T B FOC Al A2 R427 T B CTR Al A2 R437 R L FOC A 1A2 R440 R L CTR A1A2 R512 ORTHO A1A2 R513 3D 2 R516 INT LIM A1A2 R517 ASTIG Front panel INTENSITY Front panel FOCUS Front panel ALIGN Position centered centered centered centered two thirds clockwise centered centered centered centered centered centered centered fully counterclockwise centered fully counterclockwise centered centered Set the spectrum analyzer s LINE switch to ON and wait at least 5 minutes to allow the CRT and high voltage circuits to warm up Set the front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise and adjust A1A2R516 INT LIM until the display is just visable See Figure 3 32 Set the front panel INTENSITY control fully clockwise 7 Adjust ALA2R220 X GAIN A1A2R227 X POSN A1A2R120 Y GAIN and A1A2R127 Y POSN for optimum centering of the display annotation and graticule pattern Note Note 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 8 For an initial coarse focus adjust the following potentiometers in the sequence listed 1 14 FOCUS LIMIT A1A2R517 ASTIG A1A2R513 3D A1A2R409 FOCUS COMP 9 Press INSTR PnEsET then adjust the reference level to bring the displayed noise to the top division of the graticule Press CENTER dB DIV and key in 1 dB DIV The noise should now completely fill the CRT
107. 22 MHz ENTER 190 MHz SPAN 100 Mes BW 1 MHz VBW 3900 kHz SWP 290 miec Figure 2 2 Center Frequency Readout Error Measurement 1 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Note Spectrum analyzer center frequency readout can fall outside of specified limits if 10 MHz frequency reference has not been calibrated within the past year To eliminate frequency reference error x tune frequency term substitute spectrum analyzer 10 MHz FREQ REFERENCE rear panel output for frequency standard and repeat test Table 2 2 Center Frequency Readout Error Test Record Spectrum Analyzer FREQUENCY SPAN CENTER FREQUENCY Center Readout MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 10 MHz 99 8 100 2 10 MHz 499 8 500 2 10 MHz 999 8 1000 2 10 MHz 1499 8 1500 2 1 MHz 999 98 1000 02 100 kHz 999 998 1000 002 10 kHz 999 9998 1000 0002 Performance Tests 2 5 mimeo 2 Frequency Span Accuracy Test Related Adjustments Frequency Control Adjustments 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments Specification Uncertainty gt 1 MHz 2 of the actual frequency separation between two points 0 5 of span setting lt 1 MHz 5 of the actual frequency separation between two points 0 576 of span setting Description Frequency Span accuracy is determined by measuring a frequency at 5 of sweep and then at 95 of sweep These frequencies correspond to half a division from each edge of the CRT The
108. 25 0 V div Note 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below 16 Three waveforms should be displayed on the oscilloscope as shown in Figure 3 20 The lower composite waveform represents the combined X deflection voltage applied to the CRT Use the oscilloscope s front panel knob to adjust waveform fl sensitivity for approximately 8 vertical divisions Apstopped DISPLAY remote listen avg env persistence fi 1r mm of screens 4 i off frame grid onnect dots off M 125 000 s 125 000 ns 375 000 ns 50 0 ns div Figure 3 20 Composite X Deflection W aveform 17 Adjust A1A4R28 HF GAIN 1 4 10 and A1A4C11 for minimum overshoot and minimum rise and fall times of the composite X deflection waveform Always adjust A1A4C10 and 1 4 11 in approximately equal amounts Do not adjust one to its minimum value and the other to its maximum value 18 Use the oscilloscope markers to measure the risetime falltime and percent overshoot of the composite X defection waveform Rise and fall times should both be less than approximately 65 ns between the 10 and 90 points on the waveform Overshoot should be less than 3 approximately 0 25 divisions See Figure 3 2 1 OVERSHOOT Figure 3 2 1 Rise Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment W aveform Adjustments 3 49 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below
109. 250 nsec HP 8116A Generator Rise and Fall Times lt 6 nsec Output Level 4 2 5V Function Output Sine Wave and Triangle Wave 2Vp p HP 3312A Generator Range 100 Hz to 500 kHz Sweep Function Available Frequency Output 1 2 5 or 10 MHz HP 5061B Standard Accuracy lt 1 x 107 Aging Rate 1 x 10 day General Information 1 3 Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment 2 of 5 Equipment Substitution Model Test ANALYZERS Spectrum Frequency 100 Hz to 2 5 GHz HP 8566A B Analyzer 2 to 22 GHz Preselected Spectrum RF Spectrum Analyzer Analyzer Frequency 9 kHz to 1 8 GHz AC Probe High Frequency Probe HP 85024A Scalar 10 MHz l10 GHz HP 8757E Network Analyzer Detector Compatible with HP 8757E HP 11664A 2 required COUNTERS Frequency Frequency 10 MHz to 18 GHz HP 5340A Counter Sensitivity 30 dBm HP IB Compatible HP 5343A may be substituted Electronic Range gt 10 MHz HP 5345A Counter Resolution 2 x 10 gate time Ext Time Base 1 2 5 or 10 MHz j Universal Frequency dc to 100 MHz HP 5316B Counter Time Interval A B 100 nsec to 200 sec Sensitivity 50 mV rms Range 30 mV to 5V p p OSCILLOSCOPE Oscilloscope Digitizing OSCOPE 4 Channel HP 54501A Frequency 100 MHz Sensitivity 005V Division 10 1 Divider compatible with oscilloscope HP 10432A 1 4 General Information Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment 3 of 5 Instrument Critical Specifications for Recommended Perf
110. 38 Hz DP 18 sec Figure 2 30 Peak to Peak Amplitude Measurement 2 58 Performance Tests 13 14 15 16 16 Residual FM Test Press MARKER and position movable marker at the lowest point on the trace see Figure 2 30 Read the MARKER A amplitude from the display and record its absolute value MARKER A amplitude p p amplitude dB Divide the peak to peak amplitude by the slope computed in step 8 to obtain the residual FM p p amplitude filter slope residual FM dB ____ d B Hz Hz residual FM The residual FM should be less than 3 Hz Press INSTR PRESET Press 9 and adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitude trace Performance Tests 2 59 17 Line Related Sidebands Tests Specification Description Equipment Procedure 2 60 Performance Tests gt 85 dB below the peak of a CW signal Option 400 gt 75 dB below the peak of a CW signal The spectrally pure calibrator signal of the spectrum analyzer is applied to the analyzer input and the line related sidebands near the signal are measured None required 1 Press INSTR on the analyzer Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 2 Press 8 and adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of 10 00 dBm 0 02 dB 3 Press INSTR PRESET 4 Key in the following analyzer settings CENTER FREQUENCY 20 MHZ REFERENCE LEVEL lee 10 dBm FREQUENCY SPAN 2 2 ee 2 ee eee ee rns 600 Hz 5 Wait for completion of
111. 3A9 Track and Hold The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT The instrument is placed in zero frequency span to produce a dc level output from the IF Video section and this dc level is regulated by adjusting the reference level The Offsets and Gains on the Track and Hold assembly are adjusted for proper levels using a DVM Ya a A U N SPECTRUM ANALYZER ooo o booo 1 ceca DIGITAL VOLTMETER peed soo ocoooo Zoo Figure 3 87 Track and Hold Adjustments Setup Digital Voltmeter HP 3456A Place instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 87 with top and A3 Digital Storage covers removed Set LINE switch to ON and press_ iNsTR PRESET Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT Connect DVM to A3A9TP3 and ground to 9 Key in CENTER FREQUENCY 20 MHz FREQUENCY span Hz Disconnect cable 7 violet from A4A1J1 Short ASA9TP1 to A3A9TP3 or use an SMB snap on short to A3A9J1 DVM indication should be 0 000 40 001 V dc Key in SINGLE TRACE A crean warre MARKER NORMAL MARKER A SWEEP CONT SHIFT TRACE A e Adjust A3A9R59 T H OFS until MARKER A level indication as indicated by CRT annotation flickers back and forth between OO and 10 dB See Figure 3 88 for location of adjustment 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 22
112. 43 Location of A4A8 21 4 MHz LC Filter and Attenuation Adjustments 31 Key in 1 MHz and 1 MHz 32 Press MARKER Peak search and MARKER 4 3 80 Adjustments 33 34 35 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Key in 100 kHz 200 kHz and MARKER PEAK SEARCH Adjust A4A8R35 LC to align makers on display MARKER A level should indicate 1 00 X See Figure 3 43 for location of adjustment Repeat steps 31 through 34 until no further adjustment is necessary A4A8 XTAL Adjustments 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Key in 3 kHz and MARKER PEAK search Key in 30 kHz Frequency span 100 kHz Press MARKER OFF Connect crystal filter bypass network between A4A8TP1 and A4A8TP2 Press REFERENCE LeveL and adjust DATA knob to place signal peak two division from the top graticule line Adjust A4A8C44 CTR to center signal on center graticule line Adjust A4A8C42 SYM for best symmetry of signal See Figure 3 44 for location of adjustments If unable to adjust A4A8C42 SYM for satisfactory signal symmetry increase or decrease value of A4A8C43 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter C13 SYM C14 C29 CTR R40 XTAL C42 SYM C43 C44 CTR 4 Figure 3 44 Location of A4A8 21 4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments Remove cr
113. 456A Press 6 orr 20 Connect DVM to A22TP9 21 Key in srEP size 0 Hz If using an HP 3456A DVM press STORE 7 7 ENTER EXP 5 STORE G then MATH x z y If not using an HP 3456A DVM note voltage indication for reference later Adjustments 3 121 18 Frequency Control Adjustments START and STOP Adjustments FM SPAN Adjustment 3 122 Adjustments 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 31 32 2 1023 Hz Adjust 22 LSD 2267 for DVM indication of 0 0218 0 0001 V dc If not using an HP 3455A DVM adjust for specified voltage plus the DVM indication in step 20 See Figure 3 71 for location of adjustment On the HP 34564 press 6 orr Connect frequency counter to rear panel 1ST LO OUTPUT connector Press INSTR preset then key in GHD CF step SIZE CRT annotation should indicate DACS 0 Adjust A22 START A22R39 for frequency counter indication of 2 050 GHz 0 002 GHz See Figure 3 71 for location of adjustment Key in J 1023 MHz CRT annotation should indicate DACS 1023 Adjust 22 STOP A22 STOP A22R35 for frequency counter indication of 3 7891 0 002 GHz See Figure 3 71 for location of adjustment Press INSTR preset then key in cENrER FREGuENcv 10 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN 20 MHz Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 Adjust A22 FM SPAN A22R64 so that the LO Feedthrough signal is centered on the left edge graticule and the 20 M
114. 4V WIDTH WID rine ee cede fee be ene dead Rem 10 ns DISABLE sea aging off 4 4 Option 462 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Note The spectrum analyzer setting should remain at 0 dBm throughout steps 4 through 38 to prevent possible IF gain compression of the pulse signal 3 On the spectrum analyzer press and select SIGNAL INPUT 1 Set the controls as follows MOMENTE 15 MHz aS UE 12 MHz SEXE A MAREC AR OK emir a eee 20 dB EET EE ewe Ot 3 MHz i dp 3 MHz NTIS 0 dBm On the spectrum analyzer press SHIFT D SWEEP MARKER PEAK SEARCH Note the MARKER amplitude for the 3 MHz filter in the HIGH FREQUENCY REPITITION RATE column in Table 4 2 5 Set the frequency synthesizer to 300 kHz 6 On the spectrum analyzer press 0 Hz 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 5 seconds SWEEP SINGLE Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH Note the MARKER amplitude for the 3 MHz filter in the LOW FREQUENCY REPITITION RATE column in Table 4 2 Calculate the Impulse Bandwidth of the 3 MHz filter using the formula shown below and record the results for the 3 MHz filter in Table 4 2 BW i High frequency rep rate 15 MHz x Low frequency reading step 7 Hi frequency reading step 4 Set the frequency synthesizer to 10 MHz 10 On the spectrum analyzer key in 10 MHz 1 MHz i 4 MHz SWEEP TIME AUTO SWEEP SIN
115. 5 If a new CRT has just been installed do the following a Set the front panel INTENSITY control so the CRT trace is barely visible b Wait an additional 30 minutes for the CRT to normalize c Readjust ALAGR32 HV ADJ for DVM indication equal to the voltage determined in step 15 Set the LINE switch to STANDBY Remove the ac line cord from each instrument section Wait at least one minute for the MAINS power on indicator AlAS8DSI red LED to go out completely before proceeding Disconnect the high voltage probe from AlA3TP3 Remove the A3A2 Intensity Control Assembly from the IF Display Section and install in its place the Display Adjustment Board HP part number 85662 60088 Set the switch on the Display Adjustment Board in the down position This applies approximately 2 7 V dc to the front panel INTENSITY control Connect a calibrated 10 1 divider probe to the oscilloscope Channel 1 input On the oscilloscope press RECALL CLEAR to perform a soft reset On the oscilloscope press CHAN more preset probe select channel 1 and use the front panel knob to select a 10 1 probe Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press CHAN Channel cd sensed vua esae tmp ceca T tetas on amplitude scale 0 eee cee teenies 10 0V div A wick a Na het Mooi e M eae EEN 60 0000V ox id Se pd eked eae eae ed de Press TIME BASE time scale sober pb
116. 6 1 6 2 Major Assembly and Component locations 6 3 Figure 6 1 RF Section Top View 6 4 Major Assembly and Component locations A23A2 W14 W3 W43 W31 421 5 5 A5A3 W2 ASA2 ASAI A5A1J1 W42 5 1 INPUT SELECT KEYBOARD Figure 6 2 RF Section Front View Major Assembly and Component locations 6 5 6 6 Major Assembly and Component locations A26 SA 6 3A Qi 02 Q4 Q3 05 i T1 UC o c5 C 20 i C3 i4 o lo C2 CI o mi A23A6 2 2 e BO A23 2 E x Do o o E A A23A5 E 8 A23A4 2 b e DIA o 2 2 MM KROS A23A2 Z 2 o 3 A23A1 X D 285 z e SL SE Jet Tel 2 1 504 ASUS A22 All A9 ASul 551 Figure 6 3 RF Section Bottom View U1 A15 A12 A21 A20 A18 A17 A16 19 10 7 27 A8 A1A10C1 ATA10C4 V A1A6 A1A7 A1A8 ATAO FLI ATTI A1A10C2 e e e e e A1A10C3 9 A4A9 A1A5 8 w7 OT hje A4AB 0o e A4A7 e A4A6 W21 e A4A5 1 4 shar oF ius 1 11 6 A4A3 O A4A2 1 e se A3A9 A1A2 z 3 1 e des ASAT o s Soo dfe foo A3A6 EE BEEN A3AS e 4 AW rm 6
117. 757 1001 0698 3408 0757 1002 0698 3409 0757 0794 0698 0024 0757 0795 0698 3101 0757 0796 0698 3410 0757 0797 0698 3411 0757 0198 0698 3412 0757 0798 0698 3346 0757 0799 0698 3348 0698 3399 0757 0833 0698 3400 0757 0834 0757 0802 0757 0196 0698 3334 0757 0835 0757 1060 0757 0836 0698 340 1 0757 0837 0698 3102 0757 0838 0757 1090 0757 0839 0757 1092 0757 0841 0698 3402 0698 3413 0698 3403 0698 3414 9 Ye tn GONA DAAA gt DO WA fs APM tn 4C HPN 3 ADDA Adjustments 3 23 3 24 Adjustments Table 3 6 Standard Value Replacement 0 5 Resistors continued Resistors Type Fixed Film Range 10 to 1 47M Ohms Wattage 0 5 at 125 C Tolerance 1 0 HP Fart Number CD Value Q Value Q CD HP Fart Number 0757 0844 5 0757 0130 2 0698 0025 8 0757 0129 9 0698 3415 6 0757 0063 0 0698 3416 7 0757 0127 7 0698 3417 8 0698 3424 7 0698 3418 9 0757 0064 1 0698 3103 9 0757 0154 0 0698 3419 0 0698 3425 8 0698 3420 3 0757 0195 9 0698 342 1 4 0757 0133 5 0698 3422 5 0757 0134 6 0698 3423 6 0698 3426 9 0757 0853 6 0757 0135 7 0757 0854 7 0757 0868 3 0757 0309 7 0757 0136 8 0757 0855 8 0757 0869 4 0757 0856 9 0757 0137 9 0757 0857 0 0757 0870 7 0757 0858 0757 0188 0 0757 0367 7 0757 0059 4
118. 80 MHz signal On the synthesized sweeper press power LeveL and use the ENTRY knob to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 280 MHz signal for a marker indication of 30 00 dBm 40 0 dBm at the input mixer with 10 dBm of input attenuation On the spectrum analyzer key in MARKER CENTER FREQUENCY 840 MHz MARKER sEARCH to position a second marker on the peak of the third harmonic distortion product of the 280 MHz input signal The response should be below the display line gt 75 dB below the input signal level Third Harmonic dBm Performance Tests 2 51 15 Spurious Responses Test Intermodulation Distortion SPECTRUM ANALYZER ITT RET O 556 coco SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER SYNTHES IZERALEVEL GENERAT onono oon oocooo Soo DIRECTIONAL BRIDGE Figure 2 26 Intermodulation Distortion Test Setup 11 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 26 12 Set the controls of the spectrum analyzer as follows CENTER FREQUENCY seraa sanoi e 29 5 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN oie te errem ts 5 MHz REFERENCE LEV BL eaat a E 20 dBm IDISBIGAY STUN E EE E EE us OFF 13 On the synthesized sweeper key in 30 MHZ power LEVEL 4 dBm and use the ENTRY knob to position the peak of the displayed 30 MHz signal at the top CRT graticule line 14 On the frequency synthesizer key in
119. 88 RECORDER e cla SENSOR ADAPTER coool 2000 no OUTPUT coool coo Q O Q oooo OO LEVELING RE EXT INPUT OUTPUT INPUT PMR SPLITTER Figure 3 80 Slope Compensation Adjustment Setup Synthesized Sweeper HP 8340A B Power Meter euet duced dd HP 436A Power SensoE HP 8482A Power Splitter HP 11667A Opt 001 Adapters N m to N M 1250 0778 N m to APC 3 5 f 1250 1744 APC 3 5 f to APC 3 5 f 1250 1749 Cables SMA m eee ete tenes 5061 5458 Adjustments 3 133 2 1 Slope Compensation Adjustments Procedure 3 134 Adjustments Note 1 Place instrument on right side as show in Figure 3 80 and remove bottom cover 2 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 3 80 with power splitter connected to the output of the synthesized sweeper with a cable Connect one arm of the splitter directly to the SIGNAL INPUT of the HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer using a Male to Male adapter and the other arm to the power sensor 3 Connect the power meter s recorder output to the HP 8340A B s LEVELING EXT INPUT 4 Press INSTR Preset on the synthesized sweeper and set its controls to the following settings COW asi sexum e DR tay Eee eos 100 MHz POWER
120. 96 0160 2206 0140 0197 0140 0198 0160 0134 0140 0199 0140 0210 0160 2207 0160 2208 0160 2209 0140 0200 0160 0939 0160 3533 0160 3534 0160 3535 0160 3536 0160 3537 8 9 8 1 4 5 6 7 8 8 0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 2 v qc tn tn dq Q0 CO WO C OO BD YAN tA r2 3 20 Adjustments Table 3 5 Standard Value Replacement 0 125 Resistors Resistors Type Fixed Film Range 10 to 464K Ohms Wattage 0 125 at 125 C Tolerance 1 0 HP Fart Number HP Fart Number 2 Value 0 0757 0346 0698 3447 0757 0378 0698 0082 0757 0379 0757 0416 0757 0417 0698 3427 0698 3428 0757 0418 0757 0419 0757 0382 0757 0294 0757 0420 0757 0421 0698 3429 0698 3430 0757 0422 0757 0280 0698 3431 0698 3432 0757 0424 0698 3433 0757 0274 0757 0180 0757 0317 0698 3434 0757 1094 0698 3435 0757 0428 0757 0316 0757 0278 0698 4037 0698 0083 0757 0394 0698 0084 0698 3150 0757 0395 0757 0276 0698 0085 0698 3151 0757 0397 0757 0398 0757 0279 0757 0399 0698 3152 0757 0400 0698 3153 0757 0401 0698 3154 0698 3155 0757 0402 0757 0403 0757 0438 0698 3437 0757 0200 0757 0290 0698 3438 0757 0405 0757 0439 0757 0440 0698 3439 0698 3440 0757 0441 0757 0288 0698 3441 0698 3442 0757 0442 0757 0443 0698 3132 0698 3443 0757 0444 0757 0289 0698 3444 0698 3156 0698 3445 0698 3446 0757 0447
121. A2R30 A1A3R14 A1A4C10 A1A4C11 AlAART A1A4R27 A1A4R28 A1A5C10 A1A5C11 AlASRT 1 5 27 1 5 28 1 9 A1A6R32 A3A8R9 A3A8R14 Table 3 2 Adjustable Components continued Reference Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Function D esignator Name N meet ORTHO PATTERN INTENSITY LIMIT ASTIG FOCUS GAIN FOCUS LIMIT C10 C11 X POSN X GAIN HFGAIN C10 C11 15 SV ADJ HV ADJUST FS Sets orthogonality of CRT Adjusts for optimum rectangular shape of CRT display Sets adjustment range of front panel INTENSITY control Adjusts astigmatism of CRT Adjusts for optimum focus of CRT display Coarse adjusts CRT focus Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts horizontal position of trace Adjusts horizontal gain of trace Adjusts rise and fall times or X deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts vertical position of trace Adjusts vertical gain of trace Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts 15 V dc supply voltage Adjusts CRT high voltage Adjusts high end of digitized sweep Adjusts low end of digitized sweep IF Serial Prefix 2637A and Below A22 COARSE 12 Coarse adjusts reference oscillator frequency A22 FINE 12 Fine
122. A3A3R8 YSL Adjusts vertical short lines on graticule information A3A3R9 YLL Adjusts vertical long lines on graticule information A3A3R43 YOS Adjusts bottom line of graticule to align with fast sweep signal A3A8R5 GAIN Adjusts high end of digitized sweep A3A8R6 OFFS Adjusts low end of digitized sweep A3A9R36 OFS NEG Adjusts offset of negative peak detect mode A3A9R39 GPOS Adjusts gain for positive peak detect mode A3A9R44 OFS POS Adjusts offset of positive peak detect mode A3A9R52 GNEG Adjusts gain for negative peak detect mode A3A9R57 T H GAIN Adjusts overall gain of track and hold A3A9R59 T H OFS Adjusts overall offset of track and hold A4A1R2 LG OS Adjusts linear gain offsets A4A1R14 OS Adjusts video processor offset A4A1R32 ZERO Adjusts low end of video processor sweep A4A1R36 FS Adjusts high end of video processor sweep A4A2R14 Adjusts 20 dB linear gain step A4A2R79 Adjusts log amplifier offset A4A2R61 Adjusts log amplifier tuning voltage A4A3C55 Adjusts log amplifier center to IF A4A3R67 Adjusts amplitude of log amplifier bandpass filter A4A3R83 Adjusts 10 dB linear gain step 3 6 Adjustments Table 3 2 Adjustable Components continued Reference Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Function D esignator Name Number A4A4C9 SYM 8 Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole 1 symmetry A4A4C19 LC CTR 8 Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter LC pole 1 A4A4C20 CTR 8 Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal p
123. A4A4 21 4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments Location of A4A8 21 4 MHz LC Filter and Attenuation Adjustments lll llle Location of A4A8 21 4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments Location of 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments Setup ae i um Location of IF Gain Adjustment Location of 10 dB Gain Step Adjustments Location of 1 dB Gain Step 18 4 MHz LO and 10V Adjustments Down Up Converter Adjustments Setup Location of Down Up Converter Adjustments Time Base Adjustment Setup 2 Location of A27A1 Adjustment Time Base Adjustment Setup Location of A27A2 Adjustment uo gt MN co Contents 5 Contents 6 4 8 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup 6 6 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Setup Location of 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Typical Signal at 16 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments Setup Location of 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustment Setup Location of 275 MHz PLO Adjustment Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Setup Location of 301 4 MHz BPF and 280 MHz AMPTD AdjustmentS 2408 X a ag ede Sk 301 4 MHz Bandpass Filter Adjustment Waveform Minimum Image Response at 258 4 MHz Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments
124. A6TP4 DVM indication should be 15 000 0 050 V The 15 V supply is referenced to the 15 V supply therefore if the 15 V supply is out of tolerance a circuit malfunction is indicated 3 26 Adjustments Note Note RF Section 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments 7 Verify that the 120 V indicator ATA7DS2 yellow LED is lit On IF Display Sections serial prefixed 3001A and below indicator 1 7 82 is a 100 V indicator 8 Connect the DVM to 1 DVM indication should be 120 0 8 0 V dc The 120 V supply is referenced to the 15 V supply therefore if the 120 V supply is out of tolerance a circuit malfunction is indicated On IF Display Sections serial prefixed 3001A and below the DVM indication should be 100 0 2 0 V dc 9 Verify that the 5 2 V indicator ALA7DS1 yellow LED is lit 10 Connect DVM to ALA7TP2 DVM indication should be 5 200 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 050 V dc The 45 2 V supply is referenced to the 15 V supply therefore if the 5 2 V supply is out of tolerance a circuit malfunction is indicated The 20V indicator A24DS2 yellow LED should be lit See Figure 3 4 A24 VOLTAGE A24R60 REGULATOR 20VADJ A24R60 20VADJ ona 20 9 R pR R poo mel ud UO 0000 i 8 5 CAE 1 0000 24 Figure 3 4 Location of RF
125. AN 0 Hz m S SINGLE Disconnect cable from A7J1 and connect cable 89 gray white to one branch of a tee Using a short coaxial cable see Note below connect the other branch of the tee back to A7J1 Connect the stem of the tee to the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer RF INPUT The short cable 9 white in the IF Display Section A3A9J2 to A3A2J1 can be disconnected and used for this adjustment Be sure to reconnect the cable 9 white when finished 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Press on the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer and key in FREQUENCY SPAN 5 MHz center Frequency 1547 MHz PEAK search and MKR CF On the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer key in siGNAL TRACK FREQUENCY sPAN 10 kHz 300 Hz REFERENCE LEVEL 50 dBm and 0 dB On the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer turn off siGNAL TRACK and set CF step size to 500 kHz on the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer Press center FREQUENCY then key Disconnect cable from the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer RF INPUT and connect cable from tee to PRE AMP input of HP 8447F Amplifier Connect cable from PRE AMP output to the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer RF INPUT Adjust A7 500 kHz TRAP adjustments A7L15 and A7L17 to null the 500 kHz sideband displayed on the spectrum analyzer The 500 kHz sideband should be less than 90 dBm See Figure 3 60 for location of adjustments Press 1 on HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer Set LINE switch to STANDBY and plac
126. ANDARD EXT FREQ INT C BNC TEE EXT Figure 2 36 Frequency Reference Test Setup Equipment Electronic Counter 0000000 cece eee cece HP 5345A 1 2 5 or 10 MHz Frequency Reference with aging rate lt 1 x T0 e E Vos Ore to epe te eee ere HP 5061A BNC Tee cvi can HOD ER qun dR oa HP 1250 0781 Procedure 1 Allow analyzer to warm up at 25 C ambient temperature for a Note 2 68 Performance Tests period of 30 days 2 Set controls of electronic counter as follows FUNCTION sta Ee E P es FERES FREQ A DISPLAY POSITION eee teed AUTO TIME tw ctetu tes b 100 S CHANNEL A Input Impedance esses 50 CHANNEL A ATTEN ooon 00002 s e e xl CHANNEL A Coupling cece cnet eens AC CHANNEL A LEVEL s midrange 3 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 36 4 Record the frequency of the analyzer time base as measured by the counter Frequency 10 MHz Date Time L n o Ambient Temperature 5 Allow the analyzer to remain undisturbed for 24 hours then note the time base frequency again Frequency 10 MHz Date Time IA Ambient Temperature If the ambient temperatures recorded in steps 4 and 5 differ by more than 1 C the frequency measurements may be invalid 6 The difference in frequency between the two measurements should be 1 part in 1
127. Adjustments Note 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above Connect a 10 1 10 MQ divider probe to the oscilloscope s channel 1 input and a 10 1 divider probe to the channel 4 input 2 On the oscilloscope press RECALL to perform a soft reset 3 On the oscilloscope press more preset probe select channel 1 and use the front panel knob to select a 10 1 probe Select channel 4 and use the front panel knob to select a 10 1 probe Press SHOW Connect the channel 1 probe to the oscilloscope s rear panel PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector Press AUTO scate Adjust the channel 1 probe for an optimum square wave display on the oscilloscope Connect the channel 4 probe to the oscilloscope s rear panel PROBE COMPENSATION AC CALIBRATOR OUTPUT connector Press auto scale Adjust the channel 4 probe for an optimum square wave display on the oscilloscope Each probe is now compensated for the oscilloscope input to which it is connected Do not interchange probes without recompensating 8 Connect the channel 1 10 1 divider probe to ALA2TP204 and the channel 4 probe to 1 2 205 as shown in Figure 3 23 Connect the probe ground leads to A1A2TP106 See Figure 3 24 and Figure 3 25 for the location of the assemblies and test points 507 TERMINATION BNC TEE 34210205 AlA2TP204 PULSE F UNCT I ON GENERATOR 10 00000 0000
128. Adjusts IF gain 2 to 5 8 GHz Adjusts IF gain 5 8 to 12 5 GHz Adjusts IF gain 12 5 to 18 6 GHz Adjusts IF gain 18 6 to 22 GHz Adjusts linearity 5 8 to 12 5 GHz high end Adjusts linearity 12 5 to 18 6 GHz low end Adjusts linearity 12 5 to 18 6 GHz high end Adjusts linearity 5 8 to 12 5 GHz Adjusts linearity 12 5 to 18 6 GHz low end Adjusts linearity 12 5 to 18 6 GHz high end Adjusts linearity 18 6 to 22 GHz Adjusts linearity 18 6 to 22 GHz high end Adjusts IF gain in external mixer band Adjusts flatness 0 01 to 2 5 GHz low end Adjusts flatness 2 to 5 8 GHz low end Adjusts flatness 5 8 to 12 5 GHz low end Adjusts flatness 12 5 to 18 6 GHz low end Adjusts flatness 18 6 to 22 GHz low end Adjusts flatness 0 01 to 2 5 GHz high end Adjusts flatness 2 to 5 8 GHz high end Adjusts flatness 5 8 to 12 5 GHz high end Adjusts flatness 12 5 to 18 6 GHz high end Adjusts flatness 18 6 to 22 GHz high end Adjusts overall slope gain Adjusts auto sweep tracking Adjusts auto sweep tracking Adjusts auto sweep tracking Adjusts tracking at 5 8 GHz 2 to 5 8 Adjusts tracking at 2 GHz 2 to 5 8 Adjustments 3 9 Table 3 2 Mina ds Components continued D esignator N umber A6A12R82 Adjusts tracking at 18 6 GHz 18 6 to 22 A6A12R83 Adjusts tracking at 12 5 GHz 12 5 to 18 6 A6A12R84 Adjusts tracking at 5 8 GHz 5 8 to 12 5 A6A12R85 Adjusts tracking at 4 GHz 2 to 5 8
129. Al 1A5C2 IMPEDANCE Optimizes sampler output MATCH Al 1A5R1 IF GAIN Adjusts level of 30 MHz output A16R62 OFFSET Adjusts scan ramp offset A16R67 SWEEPTIME Adjusts time of sweep ramp A16R68 AUX Adjusts AUX OUT sweep ramp A16R71 GAIN 2 Adjusts frequency span accuracy YTO sweep A16R72 GAIN 1 Adjusts frequency span accuracy YTO sweep A17R50 20V ADJ Adjusts 20 V de supply voltage A19R9 12 6 VR Adjusts 12 6 V reference for YTO dAC high end 6 2 GHz A19R19 OFFSET Adjusts summing amplifier offset A19R32 2 5 GHz SPAN Adjusts 5 8 GHz switchpoint overlap A19R41 25 GHz SPAN Adjusts 25 GHz span offset OFFSET A19R43 25 GHz SPAN Adjusts 5 8 and 12 5 GHz switchpoint overlaps A19R50 10 VR Adjusts HOV reference for YTO DAC low end 2 GHz A19R56 2 5 GHz SPAN Adjusts 2 5 GHz span offset OFFSET A20R25 6 15 GHz Sets high end frequency of YTO A20R34 2 3 GHz Sets low end frequency YTO A22A2 FREQ ADJ Adjusts reference oscillator frequency For Serial Prefix 2737A and below see back of table for A22 exceptions IF Serial Prefix 3001A and Below 1 2 10 C10 3 Adjusts rise and fall times of Z axis amplifier pulse A1A2R5 INTENSITY 3 Sets adjustment range of front panel INTENSITY control GAIN A1A2R22 HF GAIN 3 Adjusts rise and fall times of Z axis amplifier pulse A1A2R30 FOCUS GAIN 3 Coarse adjusts CRT focus sets range of front panel FOCUS control Adjustments 3 11 A1A2R31 A1A2R32 A1A2R35 A1A2R36 A1
130. Analyzer HP 8757A Synthesized Sweeper HP 8340A B Amplifier eo ss tench tene ned BATES t he fet HP 8447F Power Splitter HP 11667A Opt 001 Power Meter HP 436A Power Sensor Je ge ks eid eds HP 8482A Detector 2 required HP 11664A Adjustments 3 123 19 Second Converter Adjustments Procedure Second LO Frequency and Shift Adjustments Note Note 3 1 24 Adjustments 1 Remove A23 RF Converter assembly from HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer Removal and installation procedures are contained as a repair procedure in the RF Section of the Troubleshooting and Repair Manual Volume 1 2 Position instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3 72 with the RF Converter removed but with cables still connected 3 Set HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer LINE to ON and press INSTR PRESET The second LO and pilot second LO output power is typically 35 dBm or less An HP 8447F amplifier is used in steps 1 through 26 to amplify the LO power to a useable level for the counter and power meter The following adjustment tools are required to adjust the second converter allen driver 08555 20121 and hex nut driver 08555 20122 Place the allen driver through the center hole of the hex nut driver Loosen the adjustment nut using the hex nut driver while adjusting the bandpass with the allen dri
131. B MKR A level should be OO 0 5 dB If not increase or decrease the value of A4A5R62 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values 1 dB Gain Step Adjustment 29 30 3 32 Key in LIN SHIFT AUTO resolution bandwidth and REFERENCE LEvEL 19 9 dBm Set step attenuators to 13 dB Press MARKER 4 twice to establish a new reference Key in REFERENCE LeveL 18 0 dBm Set step attenuators to 11 dB Adjust A4A5R51 VR for MKR A level of 0 10 dB See Figure 3 49 for location of adjustment Remove all test equipment from the spectrum analyzer Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustment 33 Press INSTR Preset and RECALL 9 34 Set front panel FREQ ZERO control to midrange 35 Adjust A4A5C10 FREQ ZERO to peak signal trace on CRT See Figure 3 49 for location of adjustment 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments A4A5 STEP GAIN R2 C1OFREO R51 10VADJ R10 ZERO COARSE CQ R A4A5 Figure 3 49 Location of 1 dB Gain Step 18 4 MHz LO and 10V Adjustments Key in Frequency SPAN 1kHz 100 Hz and PEAK SEARCH A Adjust front panel FREQ ZERO control fully clockwise Press PEAK sEancH Signal should move at least 60 Hz away from center CRT graticule line Adjust front panel FREQ ZERO control fully count
132. B 0 to 90 dB dBm lt 1 0dB lt 1 5 dB 2 42 Performance Tests 12 Amplitude Fidelity Test 8 The fidelity error for amplitude steps from 10 dB to 80 dB should be lt 1 0 dB 9 The fidelity error at the 90 dB setting should be lt 1 5 dB Linear Fidelity 10 11 12 13 14 MKA 8 808 peoc hp REF 9 7 dBm ATTEN 28 10 00 dB a 19 dB CENTER 28 800 152 MHz SPAN Hz RES BW 1 kHz VBW 1 Hz SWP 3090 meec Figure 2 22 Amplitude Fidelity Measurement Key in analyzer settings as follows 300 Hz Peu E 1MHz aT ae A PRs Ca eT EUM 1 MHz Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of 10 dBm Press SCALE LIN pushbutton Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH MKR CF to center the signal on the display Set FREquENcy SPAN to 0 Hz and to 1 Hz Press sHiFT AUTO resolution bandwidth MARKER Decrease frequency synthesizer output amplitude by 10 dB steps noting the MARKER A amplitude and recording it in column 2 of Table 2 17 Performance Tests 2 43 12 Amplitude Fidelity Test Table 2 17 Linear Amplitude Fidelity 2 44 Performance Tests 13 Average Noise Level Test Specification Description Equipment Procedure 13 Average Noise Level Test 135 dBm for frequencies gt 1 MHz 112 dBm for frequencies lt 1 MHz but gt 500 Hz with 10 Hz resolution bandwidth
133. B 0 to 90 dB dBm Linear Fidelity lt 1 0dB lt 1 5 dB 22 Key in analyzer settings as follows A E E dne eoe eee lett ent nee 300 Hz Meise pep En ieee Seale UE ad 20 kHz onu uc etae temet 10 kHz 23 Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of 10 dBm 24 Press SCALE LIN pushbutton Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH MKR CF to center the signal on the display 25 Set FREauENcv span to 0 Hz and VIDEO BW to 1 Hz Press SHIFT resolution bandwidth MARKER 26 Decrease frequency synthesizer output amplitude by 10 dB steps noting the MARKER A amplitude and recording it in column 2 of Table 5 3 Option 857 5 5 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Table 5 3 Linear Amplitude Fidelity Frequency MARKER A Allowable Range Synthesizer Amplitude 3 of Reference Level Amplitude dB dBm 0 Lc 10 87 9 21 10 ss 23 10 17 72 5 6 Option 857 Performance Test Record Hewlett Packard Company Tested by Model HP 8568B Report No Serial No gt oo Date IF Display Section RF Section Option 857 5 7 Test 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Step 9 Log Amplitude Fidelity 10 Hz RBW Option 857 Frequency Fidelity Error Cumulative Cumulative Synthesizer TUNE MARKER A Amplitude Column 2 Column 1 Error Error Amplitude Amplitude dB 0 to 80 dB 0 to 90 dB dB
134. COLD message should typically appear on the spectrum analyzer display for 10 minutes or less after line power is first applied to the RF Section The rear panel FREQ REFERENCE switch enables or disables the RF Section 20 Vdc switched supply which powers the oscillator circuits in the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard This switch must be set to INT and the spectrum analyzer must be switched ON continuously not in STANDBY for at least 72 hours before adjusting the frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard 2 Set the LINE switch to ON Leave the spectrum analyzer ON not in STANDBY and undisturbed for at least 48 hours to allow the temperature and frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard to stabilize 3 Press TRACE B cLean wnrre 8 to turn off the display This prolongs CRT life while the spectrum analyzer is unattended To turn the CRT back on press TRACE B a 4 Connect the Cesium Beam Frequency Standard to the Frequency Counter s rear panel TIMEBASE IN OUT connector as shown in Figure 3 52 5 Disconnect the short jumper cable on the RF Section rear panel from the FREQ REFERENCE INT connector Connect this output FREQ REFERENCE INT to INPUT A on the Frequency Counter A REF UNLOCK message should appear on the CRT display 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2840A and Below also 3217A05568 and Above 6 10 11 12 13 Set the Frequency Counter controls as follows INPUT season eit OG ie oe wh
135. EN Sets level of 10 V TC supply A4A4R44 1 K to OPEN Sets level of 10 V TC supply A4A4R45 0 to 100 Adjusts bandwidth shape in 10 kHz bandwidth A4A4R60 3 1 6 K to 8 25 Adjusts LC filter bandwidth A4A4R64 6 19 K to 12 1 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A4R65 909 to 2 73 K Adjusts positive feedback A4A4R94 100 K to 1M Sets adjustment range of LC amplitudes A4A5C9 0 16 Sets adjustment range of FREQ ZERO COARSE A4A5R10 1 62 K to 2 61 Sets 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator power A4A5R62 1 33 K to 3 48 Adjusts A8dB step A4A5R70 472 to 1 62 K Adjust A4dB step A4A5R86 215 to OPEN Adjusts A2dB step A4A6A2R33 42 2 to 75 0 Adjusts level of 3 MHz output A4A7C5 56 to 82 Centers first pole A4A7C12 56 to 82 Sets adjustment range of second pole P K A4A7C21 56 to 82 Sets adjustment range of third pole P K A4A7C30 56 to 82 Sets adjustment range of fourth pole P K A4A7C39 56 to 82 Sets adjustment range of fifth pole P K A4A7C93 1 5 to 12 0 Centers first pole A4A7R12 j stal filter bandwidth 3 14 Adjustments Table 3 3 Factory Selected Components continued Designator Procedure 0 or pF A4A7R13 10 0 K to 17 8 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R23 10 0 K to 17 8 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R24 10 0 K to 17 8 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R34 10 0 K to 17 8 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R35 10 0 K to 17 8 Adjusts crystal filter bandwidth A4A7R45
136. FERENCE LeveL 10 dBm Set step attenuators to 5 dB Adjust A4A8R6 204 to align markers on display MARKER A level should indicate 0 00 dB See Figure 3 43 for location of adjustment Adjustments 3 83 9 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments Reference Related Performance Test Description Note Equipment 3 84 Adjustments Procedure IF Display Section A4A9 IF Control Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT Each of the adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for the proper bandwidth at the 3 dB point Do not perform this adjustment on Option 462 instruments Option 462 instruments require a different procedure Adjustment 9 for Option 462 6 dB or Impulse Bandwidth is located in Chapter 4 Option 462 No test equipment is required for this adjustment Position instrument upright and remove top cover 1 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET 3 4 Key in center rREauENcv 20 MHZ Frequency span 5 MHz LIN Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT and 3 MHz Press REFERENCE reve and adjust DATA knob to place signal peak near top CRT graticule line Signal should be centered about the center line on the graticule If not press PEAK sEARcH and MRK CF Press MARKER 7 Using DATA knob adjust marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 707 X A
137. FILTER STEP GAIN 05 H Figure 3 47 Location of IF Gain Adjustment 3 88 Adjustments 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments If A4A5R33 CAL adjustment does not have sufficient range to adjust trace to the top CRT graticule line increase or decrease the value of A4A7R60 as necessary to achieve the proper adjustment range of A4A5 CAL adjustment See Figure 3 39 for the location of A4A7R60 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values for A4A7R60 dB Gain Step Adjustment Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT through 10 dB step attenuator and 1 dB step attenuator Key in LOG enter dB DIV 1 dB and nerenEwce LEVEL 30 dBm Set step attenuators to 25 dB Key in MARKER A Signal trace should be at the center CRT graticule line and MKR A level as indicated by CRT annotation should be OO dB Key in REFERENCE LeveL 40 dBm Set step attenuators to 35 dB Adjust A4A5R32 SG10 for MKR A level of OO dB CRT MKR A annotation is now in upper right corner of CRT display See Figure 3 48 for location of adjustment A4A5S GAIN R32 R44 R54 5610 5620 1 5620 2 R70 R62 A4A5 Figure 3 48 Location of 10 dB Gain Step Adj
138. FREQUENCY 1 MHz MARKER Peak SEARCH to position a second marker at the peak of the 1 MHz second order intermodulation distortion product The response should be below the display line gt 75 dB below the total input power SOI Distortion 1 MHz separation 30 MHz dBm 15 Spurious Responses Test 35 On the spectrum analyzer key in cenTeR FREQUENCY 59 MHz MARKER sEaRcH to position a second marker at the peak of the 59 MHz second order intermodulation distortion product The response should be below the display line gt 75 dB below the total input power SOI Distortion 1 MHz separation 30 MHz dBm Performance Tests 2 55 re 16 Residual FM Test Specification lt 3 Hz peak to peak in lt 10 s frequency span 100 kHz resolution bandwidth 30 Hz video bandwidth 30 Hz Description The spectrum analyzer CAL OUTPUT is used to supply a stable 20 MHz signal to the analyzer The analyzer is tuned in zero span to a point on the 30 Hz bandwidth response for which the slope of the response is known from direct measurement The residual FM is then slope detected over a 10 second interval yielding a trace whose peak to peak excursion is proportional to the residual FM Equipment None Required Press NET PRESET 2 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 3 Press RECALL 8 and adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of 10 00 dBm 0 02 dB 4 Press 9 and adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitud
139. GLE MARKER PEAK SEARCH Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer to 100 kHz On the spectrum analyzer key in 0 Hz 0 5 seconds SWEEP SINGLE Press MARKER PEAK_SEARCH Record the MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Calculate the impulse bandwidth of the 1 MHz filter using the formula in step 8 Record the result in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer to 3 MHz Set the pulse function generator WID to 33 3 ns On the spectrum analyzer key in 300 kHz i 3 MHz 1 2 MHz SWEEP TIME SWEEP SINGLE MARKER PEAK SEARCH Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Option 462 4 5 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 4 6 Option 462 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Set the frequency synthesizer to 30 kHz On the spectrum analyzer key in_ rrequency SPAN 0 Hz WEEP TIME 0 5 seconds SWEEP SINGLE MARKER peak Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Calculate the Impulse BW of the 300 kHz filter using the formula in step 8 Record in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer FREquency to 1 MHz Set the pulse function generator WID to 100 ns On the spectrum analyzer key in 100 kHz i 1 MHz center Frequency MHz FREQUENCY SPAN 400 kHz SWEEP TIME SWEEP SINGLE MARKER _sEARCH Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthe
140. Hz CAL OUTPUT signal is centered on the right edge graticule See Figure 3 71 for location of adjustment 19 Second Converter Adjustments 19 Second Converter Adjustments Reference Related Performance Test Description Equipment RF Section A23 RF Converter RF Gain Uncertainty Test Spurious Responses Test First the second LO frequency is adjusted for proper frequency and then the LO shift is adjusted by using the front panel keys to shift the LO up and down Next the Pilot IF Bandpass Filter is adjusted for proper bandpass and amplitude then the signal IF Bandpass Filter is adjusted The second LO frequency and shift are checked and readjusted if necessary SYNTHESIZED WEEPER RF AMPLIr i ek POWER METER Z AXIS vo E WE o o crx of QUTPUT o Q SWEEP POL UE i ODULAT ION OUTPUT PDWER SENSOR ATO ECTRUM ANALYZER Li ATTENUATOR evice dern VER a 1 SWEEP IN fe TOR Un ved mu ajae o dn POWER 22 sags SPLITTER 808 Se AP EM es 4 BLANK H ole O off 580 o PRO PONTEM of 2 2 0 A INPUT INPUT DETECTOR EE EORR tuo NETWORK ANALYZER SCALAR oaao POU Figure 3 72 Second Converter Adjustments Setup Frequency Counter HP 5340A Scalar Network
141. Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings devenu Me eco tte p M den 100 kHz E 20 MHz TRACE A 24 Set frequency synthesizer FREQUENCY to 10 05 MHz and press SWEEP START SINGLE 50 S REF dBm ATTEN 10 dB 1 dB START 104 kHz STOP 20 68 MHz RES BW 100 KHz VBW 38 kHz SWP 20 msec Figure 2 14 Frequency Response Measurement 100 kHz to 20 MHz 2 26 Performance Tests 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 8 Frequency Response Test After completion of sweep press DISPLAY LINE on the spectrum analyzer Use the Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points on the trace Record the measurements below SIGNAL INPUT 1 100 kHz to 20 MHz Maximum dBm Minimum dBm Measure and record signal level at start of trace 100 kHz SIGNAL INPUT 1 100 KHz dBm Connect output of frequency synthesizer to SIGNAL INPUT 2 Activate this input with the pushbutton Option 001 Do not use HP 11852A Minimum Loss Pad Set frequency synthesizer output amplitude to 2 dBm Press TRACE A and DISPLAY LINE on spectrum analyzer Set frequency synthesizer FREQUENCY to 20 MHz Set spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQUENCY to 20 MHZ and rREoQuENCY SPAN to 1 MHz Repeat steps 22 through 24 After completion of sweep press DISPLAY LINE on the spectrum analyzer Use the Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points on the trace Record the measurements be
142. N Channel 226 deben c awed a tu on amplitude scale 10 0 V div OffSet sansa anres hey CE LI ats 25 0000 V Channel ett uU EUR c had eet Bev on amplitude scale zerena io ind a cece cen 10 0 V div etm oe nes e 60 0000 V Press TRIG Cani D uu 1 level dicen EM EM M tfe s heel 25 0000 V Press TIME BASE tame scale sete steeds Gee oed a eund 50 0 ns div delay uu onn acs ie 125 000 ns Press DISPLAY cOonnecUudolts o sese cedet RUM Nette tih on Press SHOW 13 Set the spectrum analyzer s front panel INTENSITY control fully 14 counterclockwise and then set the LINE switch to ON The X deflection and X deflection waveforms should be superimposed on the oscilloscope display as shown in Figure 3 19 If necessary adjust ALA4R7 X POSN and A1A4R27 X GAIN for a centered display of at least four vertical divisions See Figure 3 18 for the location of the adjustments stopped remote listen 10 0 Vv div fset 25 00 V 0 00 1 dc 10 0 V div fset 60 00 V 0 00 1 dc T CT es 50 0 ns div 1 25 00 v Figure 3 19 X and X Waveforms 15 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows 3 48 Adjustments Press WFORM MATH Bel ie C RAD E dead MAST ae OU erate on ee MAb sree earth tee a st ct channel 1 channel 4 SensItlVIty ee een ee acd
143. NGCY 50 MHz REFERENCE LEVEL sees en 60 dBm CENTER FREQUENCY 25 MHz CF STEP SITEP SIZE 3 oes onn eere RE OE HR A xe 45 MHz D LOL E EC ROUES EP 1kHz 3 kHz SOR ey Miter UD E N gods Nel a 0 dB 7 Press DISPLAY LINE and key in 105 dBm 8 Reduce or VIDEO BW if necessary for a margin of at least 4 dB between the noise trace and the display line refer to Figure 2 24 Do not reduce either bandwidth to less than 300 Hz This test will require approximately 30 minutes to complete using the settings given in step 6 If the resolution bandwidth or video bandwidth are further reduced a full band check of residual responses will take up to 15 hours to complete Performance Tests 2 47 14 Residual Responses Test 2 46 Performance Tests 9 10 hp REF 60 0 dBm ATTEN 48 CENTER 25 8 MHz RES BW VBW 1 kHz Swe 50 sec Figure 2 24 Residual Responses Measurement Press SWEEP and wait for completion of sweep Look for any residual responses at or above the display line If a residual is suspected press SWEEP again and see if the response persists A residual will persist on repeated sweeps but a noise peak will not Any residual responses must be lt 105 dBm Option 400 Any residual 500 Hz to 2 5 kHz must be lt 95 dBm any residuals gt 2 5 kHz must be lt 105 dBm If a response appears margi
144. PUT a tt SIGNAL INPUT 1 1 ADAPTERS V POWER SENSOR POWER SPLITTER TYPE N CABLE OPTION 001 ADD 50 OHMS 75 PAD AND ADAPTER gb12b Figure 2 11 Frequency Response Test Setup 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz 2 22 Performance Tests Note Equipment Procedure 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz 8 Frequency Response Test Equipment listed is for three test setups Figure 2 11 Figure 2 13 and Figure 2 15 Synthesized Sweeper HP 8340A Power Meter sag eee rex aA oops HP 436A Power Sensor ze reed ees ever queres es goes edes Goose tes gue HP 8482A Frequency Synthesizer oere eerca RR HP 3335A Function Generator sess HP 3312A Power Splitter eret aer beth rer her reet HP 11667A Adapter Type N m to BNC f HP 1250 0780 Adapter Type N m to BNC m HP 1250 0082 Adapter N m to Type N m HP 1250 0778 Adapter Type N m to SMA f HP 1250 1250 Adapter APC 3 5 f to APC 8 5 f HP 1250 1749 Cable SMA Connectors HP 5061 5458 Additional Equipment for Option 001 500 700 Minimum Loss Pad HP 11852A Adapter Type N f to BNC m 7561 HP 1250 1534 1 Press
145. Performance Tests and Adjustments Manual HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer HP Part No 08568 90118 Printed in USA September 1993 Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1993 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws 1212 Valley House Drive Rohnert Park CA 94928 4999 USA Certification Warranty Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members This Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett Packard and Hewlett Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for pro
146. RES BW 100 kHz _ rREquency SPAN 200 kHz and press LIN pushbutton 8 Press REFERENCE LEVEL and adjust front panel knob to set signal peak on screen two divisions from the top graticule 9 Adjust A4A4C67 LC CTR and A4A4C19 LC CTR for maximum MARKER level as indicated by CRT annotation See Figure 3 41 for location of adjustments If unable to adjust LC CTR adjustments for satisfactory signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A4C17 and A4A4C70 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values A4A4 Bandwidth Filte P Tuis oj P 18 98 0o T 5 s o s its C67 LC CTR C43 LC DIP RAS LC CTR C70 R60 C19 LC 7 C41 LC DIP R16 Figure 3 41 Location of A4A4 21 4 MHz LC Filter Adjustments 3 78 Adjustments 10 11 12 13 14 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Key in 1 MEZ and 1 MHz Press MARKER PEAK searcH MARKER A Key in 100 kHz 200 kHz and MARKER PEAK SEARCH Adjust A4A4R43 LC to align markers on display MARKER A level should indicate 1 00 X See Figure 3 41 for location of adjustment Repeat steps 10 through 13 until no further adjustment is necessary A4A4 XTAL Adjustments 15 16 17 18 19 Press MARKER OFF Key in 30 kHz and FREQUENCY SPAN 100 kHz Press REFERENCE LeveL and adjust DATA knob to s
147. STR PRESET Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT Press 8 Adjust AMPTD CAL for a MARKER amplitude of 10 00 dBm 0 02 dB Press INSTR PRESET Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 20 0010 MHz and an output power level of 2 0 dBm Set the amplitude increment for 10 dB steps 6 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 2 17 7 Key in analyzer settings as follows 20 001 MHZ 2 kHz 8 Press MARKER SEARCH MKR CF or adjust CENTER FREQUENCY to center signal trace on display 9 Set analyzer as follows wale tle fe cU uod tes fade Me lade 100 Hz dead LE 1 2 LOG ENTER GB DIV ire 1dB 10 Press MARKER PEAK search ll Press SHIFT ATTEN to permit extended reference level settings 12 Set the analyzer REFERENCE LEVEL VIDEO BW and frequency synthesizer amplitude according to Table 2 12 settings Use the frequency synthesizer I for 10 dB steps At each setting note the MKR A amplitude displayed in the upper right corner of the analyzer display deviation from the O dB reference setting and record it in the table See Figure 2 18 Note After measurement at the REFERENCE LeveL 70 dBm setting press SHIFT ENTER dB DIV as indicated in Table 2 12 2 34 Performance Tests 10 IF Gain Uncer
148. See Figure 3 14 for the location of the test point ATASATLABEL 2 2 Figure 3 14 Location of A1A3 Label and Test Point Reconnect ac line cords to both instrument sections Set the LINE switch to ON Wait approximately 30 seconds for the de regulator circuits to stabilize Adjust ALA6R103 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the calibration factor calculated in step 8 times the voltage labeled on the top of the A1A3A1 High Voltage Assembly noted in step 11 See Figure 3 13 for the location of the adjustment V dc EXAMPLE If the calibration factor calculated in step 8 is 0 00099 and 1 1 is labeled for 2400 V then adjust ALA6R103 HV ADJ for a DVM indication of 0 00099 x 2400 V 2 376 V dc Discharge Procedure for High Voltage and CRT Warning Warning 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above 16 With the front panel INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise wait approximately 10 minutes to allow the high voltage supply to stabilize and the CRT to normalize This soft turn on will extend CRT life expectancy particularly if a new CRT has just been installed 17 Readjust ALA6R103 HV ADJ for a DVM indication equal to the voltage determined in step 15 18 If a new CRT has just been installed do the following a Set the front panel INTENSITY control so the CRT trace is barely visible b Wait an additional 30 minutes for the CRT to normalize
149. Setup Location of 269 MHz Bandpass Filter Adjustments 269 MHz Bandpass Filter Adjustments Waveforms Frequency Control Adjustments Setup Location of Frequency Control Adjustments Second Converter Adjustments Setup Location of Second Converter Adjustments Typical PILOT 2ND IF Bandpass SHIFT f Typical PILOT 2ND IF Bandpass SHIFT Typical Bandpass SHIFT f Typical Bandpass SHIFT 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments Setup Location of 50 MHz Adjustments Slope Compensation Adjustment Setup Location of A22R66 TILT Adjustment Slope Compensation Adjustment Waveforms Location of Comb Generator Adjustments Comb Teeth Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments Setup Location of Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments Track and Hold Adjustments Setup Location of Track and Hold Adjustments Digital Storage Display Adjustments Setup Location of Digital Storage Display Adjustments Sample and Hold Balance Adjustment Waveforms Waveform Before Adjustment Low Noise DC Supply 02 Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configurations Resolution Bandwidth Measurement Impulse Bandwidth Test 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Measuremen
150. TA knob Refer to Figure 4 7 for the adjustment location Press MARKER Adjust the marker to the 6 dB point on the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6 dB bandwidth of the 10 kHz bandwidth filter The bandwidth should be 10 0 fl O kHz Key in 3 kHz _ FrRequency span 5 kHz SEARCH and CF If necessary readjust by pressing_ REFERENCE LEVEL and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule Press MARKER and MARKER 4 Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 6 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 500 X Adjust A4A9R66 3 kHz for MKR A indication of 1 5 kHz while maintaining the marker at 500 X using the DATA knob Refer to Figure 4 7 for the adjustment location Press MARKER In Adjust the marker to the 6 dB point on the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X The CRT MKR 4 annotation now indicates the 6 dB bandwidth of the 3 kHz bandwidth filter The bandwidth should be 3 00 0 30 kHz 9 Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments Re 9 Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments Reference IF Display Section A4AQ9 IF Control Related Performance Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy Test Test Description The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the SIGNAL INPUT 1 Each of the adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for the
151. adout see Figure 4 5 and record the value in Table 4 5 Select the spectrum analyzer RES BW FREQUENCY span and according to Table 4 5 Measure the 60 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 3 through 5 and record the value in Table 4 5 Record the 6 dB bandwidths for each resolution bandwidth setting from Table 4 3 in Table 4 5 Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing the 60 dB bandwidth by the 6 dB bandwidth The bandwidth ratios should be less than the maximum values shown in Table 4 5 The 60 dB bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting should be less than 100 Hz 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Table 4 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Spectrum Analyzer Measured Measured Bandwidth Maximum 60 PE Frequency Video Bandwidth BW Span BW 3 MHz i 1 MHz i 300 kHz i 100 kHz i 3 kHz i 1 kHz i 300 Hz i 100 Hz i 30 Hz i 10 kHz 1 J 8 1 60 dB points separated by lt 100 Hz Option 462 4 15 6 Impuls e and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test Related Adjustment Specification 4 16 Option 462 Description Equipment Procedure 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 21 4 Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Down Up Converter Adjustments 2 0 dB 10 Hz bandwidth 0 8 dB 30 Hz bandwidth 0 5 dB 100 Hz to
152. ain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments Reference Related Performance Tests Description IF Display Section A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter A4A5 Step Gain Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test IF Gain Uncertainty Test Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test First the IF signal from the RF Section is measured with a power meter and adjusted for proper level Next the 10 dB gain steps are adjusted by connecting the CAL OUTPUT signal through two step attenuators to the RF INPUT and keying in the REFERENCE LEVEL necessary to activate each of the gain steps while compensating for the increased gain with the step attenuators The 1 dB gain steps are checked in the same fashion as the 10 dB gain steps and then the variable gain is adjusted The 18 4 MHz oscillator frequency is adjusted to provide adequate adjustment range of front panel FREQ ZERO control and last the 10V temperature compensation supply used by the A4A4 Bandwidth Filter and A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter is checked and adjusted if necessary 97 CABLE A4ASTPI SPECTRUM ANALYZER O d 7 0665 doood POWER METER DIGITAL VOLTMETER oao POWER SENSOR 10dB STEP 1 dB STEP ATTENUATOR ATTENUATOR Figure 3 46 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments Setup Adjustments 3 87 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Os
153. alyzer Connect the test cable from the power splitter output arm to A23A3J2 Pilot First IF IN Connect cable 80 gray black from A23A3J6 PILOT 2ND IF to the scalar network analyzer s A input Set to 10 dB DIV 38 On the spectrum analyzer key in SHIFT FREERUN Hold SHIFT in until the LED lights then press FREERUN until the sweep is free running 39 40 On the synthesized sweeper set for a frequency of 2017 6 MHz and to 50 MHz Adjust on the synthesized sweeper to center the bandpass signal 41 Adjust A23A3 Z5 76 Z7 and L4 for best bandpass shape and flatness at maximum amplitude of signal displayed on Scalar network analyzer A typical properly adjusted bandpass filter response is shown in Figure 3 74 See Figure 3 73 for location of adjustments The bandpass filter response at the 3 dB points should be 222 MHz See Figure 3 74 and Figure 3 75 for a typical PILOT 2ND IF bandpass response for a SHIFT LO f and a SHIFT LO 42 43 44 45 46 47 19 Second Converter Adjustments CH1 A R 01 dB 1 0 dB REF 9 17 dB Figure 3 74 Typical PILOT 2ND IF Bandpass SHIFT 1 CHI A R 01 dB 1 0 dB REF 9 61 dB Figure 3 75 Typical PILOT 2ND IF Bandpass SHIFT Key in D V and note amplitude of signal Key in I T and note amplitude of the bandpass signal peak Conti
154. amplifier pulse Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts horizontal position of trace Adjusts horizontal gain of trace Adjusts rise and fall times or X deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts vertical position of trace Adjusts vertical gain of trace Adjusts rise and fall times of Y deflection amplifier pulse Adjusts 15 V de supply voltage A1A6R103 HV ADJUST Adjusts CRT high voltage For Serial Prefix 3001A and below see back of table for axceptions to AlA2 through A1A6 Adjustments 3 5 Table 3 2 Adjustable Components continued Reference Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Function D esignator Name N umher ASAIR84 SWEEP OFFSET Adjusts digital sweep to begin at left edge of graticule A3A2R12 LL THRESH Adjusts point at which graticule lines switch from short to long lines A3A2R50 X S amp H Adjusts horizontal sample and hold pulse A3A2R51 Y S amp H Adjusts vertical sample and hold pulse A3A3R1 X EXP Adjusts horizontal position of annotation A3A3R2 Y EXP Adjusts vertical position of annotation A3A3R4 X GAIN Adjusts horizontal gain of graticule lines A3A3R5 Y GAIN Adjusts vertical gain of graticule lines A3A3R6 XLL Adjusts horizontal long lines on graticule information XSL Adjusts horizontal short lines on graticule information
155. and 16 9 V dc If DVM indication is within the given range disconnect DVM from and proceed to step 18 Otherwise key in 2 SET LINE switch to STANDBY and place A7 249 MHz PLO on extender with DVM still connected to A7TP1 Set LINE switch to ON and key in 2 on HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer Adjust A7 PLO A7C3 for DVM indication of 13 0 0 1 V dc Key in center FREQUENCY 17 6 MHz FREQUENCY span Hz and Adjust A7 A7L2 for DVM indication of 5 2 0 05 V A7L2 slug should be near center of coil form when A7L2 is properly adjusted Key in 2 and adjust A7C3 for 13 0 fO 1 V dc at Press 1 RECALL 1 and adjust A7L2 for 5 2 0 05 V dc Repeat steps 12 and 13 until A7C3 and A7L2 need no further adjustment Note 20 14 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments Set LINE switch to STANDBY Adjust A7L2 one half turn counterclockwise before placing A7 249 MHz PLO in HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer without extender Leave DVM connected to A TTP1 Set LINE switch to ON and key in 1 DVM indication should be between 5 2 V and 6 0 V Press 2 RECALL 2 DVM indication should be between 12 9 V dc and 16 9 V dc Disconnect DVM from Set LINE switch to STANDBY and place A7 249 MHz PLO on extender Set LINE switch to ON press_ INSTR_presET and set the analyzer as follows CENTER FREQUENCY 16 5 MHz FREQUENCY SP
156. andpass filler amplitude is adjusted by monitoring the output of the filter control line shorted and not shorted to the 15V supply Next log fidelity gain and offset of the log curve is adjusted by adjusting the 12 VTV and the PIN diode attenuator Last the linear gain step adjustments are performed to set the proper amount of step gain in the linear mode of operation A4A1TP 1 56 oooa oh SYNTHESIZER DIGITAL V QLTMET ER aoa Bone nonoo oo F SPECTRUM ANALYZER 1 OUTPUT Figure 3 33 Log Amplifier Adjustments Setup Digital Voltmeter DVM HP 3456A Frequency Synthesizer HP 3335A 1 Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 33 with top cover removed 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press_ instR_ PRESET 3 Key in FREqUENcY sPAN 0 Hz CENTER FREQUENCY 7 6 MHz 10 dBm 10 kHz and press LIN pushbutton Adjustments 3 65 5 Log Amplifier Adjustments 4 Connect DVM to A4AITPI DVM ground to the IF casting Connect the frequency synthesizer to the RF INPUT Key in 80 MHz and_ ampuitupe 86 98 dBm The frequency synthesizer will now provide a 500 load O ffset Adjustment Check 5 Adjust A4A2R79 ZERO for 0 0000 0 0005 V dc See Figure 3 34 for location of adjustment R79 R61 R91 R14
157. ations of assemblies containing adjustments and the location of those adjustments within the assemblies are contained within the adjustment procedures to which they apply Major assembly and component location illustrations are located at the rear of this manual Table 3 2 Adjustable Components Reference Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Function D esignator Name N umher 1 2 808 A1A2R308 A1A2R319 1 2 409 A1A2R426 A1A2R427 A1A2R437 A1A2R440 A1A2R512 A1A2R513 A1A2R515 A1A2R517 1 4 A1A4C204 A1A4C209 A1A4R227 A1A4R219 A1AA4R217 A1A5C104 A1A5C109 AlASRI27 A1A5R120 A1A5R117 A1A6R9 C307 ZHF GAIN INT GAIN FOCUS COMP T B FOC T B CTR R L FOC R L CTR ORTHO 3D INTENSITY LIMIT ASTIG FOCUS LIMIT C204 C209 X POSN X GAIN XHF GAIN C104 C109 Y POSN Y GAIN YHF GAIN 15 ADJ Adjusts rise and fall times of Z axis amplifier pulse Adjusts rise and fall times of Z axis amplifier pulse Sets adjustment range of front panel INTENSITY control Corrects focus for beam intensity Magnitude of top bottom focus correction Centering of top bottom focus correction Magnitude of right left focus correction Centering of right left focus correction Sets orthogonality of CRT Adjusts spot size Sets adjustment range of front panel INTENSITY control Adjusts astigmatism of CRT Coarse adjusts CRT focus Adjusts rise and fall times of X deflection
158. bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 4 through 6 and record the value in Table 2 9 Record the 3 dB bandwidths from Table 2 8 in Table 2 9 Calculate the bandwidth selectivity for each setting by dividing the 60 dB bandwidth by the 3 dB bandwidth The bandwidth ratios should be less than the maximum values shown in Table 2 9 The 60 dB bandwidth for the 10 Hz resolution bandwidth setting should be less than 100 Hz x RES Bw 3 Miz v8w 180 Hz 500 Figure 2 7 60 dB Bandwidth Measurement 5 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Table 2 9 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Spectrum Analyzer Measured Measured Bandwidth 60 dB 3dB Selectivity Selectivity Ratio Bandwidth Bandwidth 60 dB BW mp 20 MHz 15 MHz 5 MHz 2 MHz 500 kHz 200 kHz 50 kHz 10 kHz 5 kHz 2 kHz 500 Hz 100 HZ J 60 dB points separated by lt 100 Hz Performance Tests 2 17 6 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test Related Adjustments Specification Description Equipment Procedure 2 18 Performance Tests For instruments with Option 462 refer to Chapter 4 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Down Up Converter Adjustments uncorrected referenced to 1 MHz bandwidth 20 30 C after 1 hour warm up 2 0 dB 10 Hz bandwidth 0 8 dB 30 Hz bandwidth 0 5 dB 100 Hz to 1 MHz bandwidth
159. ble 4 3 Press SWEEP and measure the 6 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting using the procedure of steps 43 through 45 and record the value in Table 4 3 The measured bandwidths for 300 Hz 100 Hz 30 Hz and 10 Hz should fall between the limits shown in the table Table 4 2 Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy High Frequency Repetition Rate 3 MHz i 1 MHz 1 300 kHz i 100 kHz i 30 kHz i 10 kHz i 3 kHz i 1 kHz i 4 8 Option 462 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Table 4 3 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Frequency MARKER A Readout of 6 dB Span Bandwidth 3 MHz i 1 MHz i 300 kHz i 100 kHz i 30 kHz i 10 kHz 1 3 kHz i 1 kHz 1 300 Hz 1 100 Hz 1 30 Hz i 10 Hz i Option 462 4 9 5 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Related Adjustments Specification Description 4 10 Option 462 Equipment Note Procedure 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments 60 dB 6 dB bandwidth ratio 11 1 3 MHz to 100 kHz bandwidths 8 1 30 kHz to 30 Hz bandwidths 60 dB points on 10 Hz bandwidth are separated by 100 Hz Bandwidth selectivity is found by measuring the 60 dB bandwidth and dividing this value by the 6 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting from 30 Hz to 3 MHz The 60 dB points for the 10 Hz bandwidth setting are also measured
160. cillator Adjustments Equipment Digital Voltmeter DVM HP 3456A Power Meter sseeee eee eee eee HP 436A Power Sensor de du udi Pe SR HP 8481A 10 dB Step Attenuator HP 355D Option H89 1 dB Step Attenuator HP 355C Option H25 Procedure 1 Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 46 and remove top cover 2 The validity of the results of this adjustment procedure is based in part on the performance of the Log Amplifiers the Video Processor and the Track and Hold These adjustments must be done before proceeding with the adjustment procedure of the Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator 3 Set instrument LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT 4 Key in FREQUENCY 20 MHZ REFERENCE LEVEL 1 0 dBm 0 dB rFREauENcv span Hz 1 kHz 100 Hz and sweer_time 20 ms IF Gain Adjustment 5 Disconnect cable 97 white violet from A4A8J1 and connect cable to power meter power sensor Refer to Figure 3 47 for location of cable 97 and A4A8J1 6 Adjust front panel AMPTD CAL adjustment for a power meter indication of 5 dBm 7 Disconnect power meter and reconnect cable 97 to A4A8J1 8 Press LIN pushbutton and MARKER NORMAL 9 Note MARKER amplitude in mV and adjust A45A5R33 CAL to 70 7 mV top CRT graticule line See Figure 3 47 for location of adjustment A4A7 3 MHz BANDWIDTH A4A5 A4A8J1
161. controls as follows RANGE AZ dod ERR ERE EXE ETE 100 button FEREQUENCGY 2 E gu eR UE 10 MODULATION 53 2255935 Se ee EUR EUER all out Adjust function generator FREQUENCY as necessary to place signal near center graticule line and adjust AMPLITUDE VERNIER to place peak of signal at Display Line Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings FREQUENCY SPAN 22364 eel hey XE RA RE EE 100 Hz m v 30 Hz 48 Set CF STEP SIZE to 100 Hz Step spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQUENCY from 1 kHz to 100 Hz with IL while setting function generator FREQUENCY to match spectrum analyzer center frequency at each step Record level at each setting SIGNAL INPUT 1 1000 Hz dBm 900Hz CSC dd B 800 Hz dBm 700 Hz dBm 600 Hz dBm 500 Hz dBm 400 Hz dBm 300 Hz dBm 200 Hz dBm 100 Hz dBm Performance Tests 2 29 8 Frequency Response Test 2 30 Performance Tests 49 For each input subtract the lowest minimum level greatest negative from the highest maximum least negative measurement recorded in steps indicated The result should not exceed 2 dB SIGNAL INPUT 1 100 Hz to 500 MHz from steps 16 25 42 or 48 Spec 2 dB Overall Maximum dBm Overall Minimum dBm Overall Deviaion 1 dBm SIGNAL INPUT 2 100 kHz to 1 5 GHz from steps 12 or 31 Spec 2 dB Overall Maximum dBm Overall Minimum dBm Overall Deviation dBm 50 Subtract the lo
162. dapter and BNC to SMB test cable Connect A9J2 to A input of scalar network analyzer through detector using adapter and another BNC to SMB test cable Connect synthesized sweeper SWEEP OUTPUT rear panel Z AXIS BLANK MKRS rear panel and PULSE MODULATION INPUT front panel to proper rear panel connectors on scalar network analyzer shown in Figure 3 67 On scalar network analyzer turn channel 2 off and press A R Set the scalar network analyzer SCALE to 1 dB and set REF LEVEL to 10 00 dB Set REF POSN press REF POSN to the fourth division from the bottom using the data knob On synthesized sweeper press ON MKR sweep and AF Set SWEEP TIME to 500 ms Adjust REF LEVEL for a mid screen response of signal on HP 8757A Adjust A9 269 MHz Bandpass Filter A9C9 A9C10 A9C11 and A9C12 for best bandpass filter response with gain of greater than 10 dB above REF 1 line See Figure 3 68 for location of adjustments Figure 3 69 shows typical response when the bandpass filter is properly adjusted Adjustments 3 1 17 17 Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments AQPILOT AIOPILOT ZNDIF AMPLIFIER 3RD CONVERTER Y OOO E Q CI Figure 3 68 Location of 269 M Hz Bandpass Filter Adjustments 3 dB Point Figure 3 69 269 MHz Bandpass Filter Adjustments W aveforms 15 On th
163. display 20 30 C lt 1 5 dB max over 0 to 90 dB display 10 Hz Resolution Bandwidth lt 0 8 dB max over 0 to 70 dB display 20 30 C lt 2 1 dB max over 0 to 90 dB display Linear 3 of Reference Level for top 9 1 2 divisions of display Description Amplitude fidelity in log and linear modes is tested by decreasing the signal level to the spectrum analyzer in 10 dB steps with a calibrated signal source and measuring the displayed amplitude change with the analyzers MARKER A function FREQ REFERENCE SPECTRUM ANALYZER rotes 1ZER GENERATOR RF INPUT 2 ADAPTER gb 16b Figure 5 1 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Setup 5 2 Option 857 Equipment 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Frequency HP 3335A Adapter Type N m to HP 1250 0780 2 BNC to BNC HP 10503A Procedure Log Fidelity 1 11 On the spectrum analyzer connect the CAL OUTPUT to INPUT 2 Press 9 and adjust the FREQ ZERO pot for maximum amplitude Press INSTR PRESET on the analyzer Key in analyzer settings as follows CENTER FREQUENCY 20 MHZ FREQUENCY 50 kHz REFERENCE LEVEL ccceccec een 10 dBm Set the frequency synthesizer
164. djust A4A9R60 3 MHz for A indication of 1 5 MHz while maintaining marker at 3 dB point 707 X using DATA knob See Figure 3 45 for location of adjustment 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 1 9 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments 10kHz R66 3kHz R62 300kHz R61 1MH R60 3MHz R65 A4A9 Figure 3 45 Location of 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments Press MARKER Adjust marker to 3 dB point on opposite side of signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X There are now two markers one on each side of the signal at the 3 dB points CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3 dB bandwidth of the 3 MHz bandwidth 3 dB bandwidth should be 3 00 0 60 MHz Key in 1 MHz and rrequency span 2 MHz If necessary readjust REFERENCELEV ENCENTER FREQUENCY using DATA knob to place signal peak near top of graticule and centered on center graticule line Press MARKER OFF then MARKER Using DATA knob adjust marker down one side of displayed signal to the 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 707 X Adjust A4A9R61 1 MHz for MKR A indication of 500 kHz while maintaining marker at 3 dB point 707 X us
165. dth Selectivity p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record Step 9 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Spectrum Analyzer Measured Measured Bandwidth Maximum Selectivity Belectivity Ratio FREQUENCY SPAN VIDEO Bandwidth Bandwidth 60 dB BW 6 dB BW 60 dB points separated by 100 Hz Option 462 4 21 Test 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record 4 22 Option 462 Steps 5 through 9 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Spectrum Analyzer Measured Measured Bandwidth Maximum ien Frequency Video aA gt s Se ectivity Span 3 MHz i MHz i 300 kHz i 100 kHz i 30 kHz i 10 kHz i 3 kHz i 1 kHz i 300 Hz i 100 Hz i 30 Hz i 10 Hz i 100 Hz AUTO _________ 60 dB points separated by 100 Hz Test 6 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty p o Table 2 19 Performace Test Record Test 6 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty p o Table 2 19 Performace Test Record Step 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty 1 MHz i 3 MHz i 300 kHz i 100 kHz i 30 kHz i 10 kHz i 3 kHz i 1 kHz i 300 Hz i 100 Hz i 30 Hz i 10 Hz i Frequency Span 5 MHz 5 MEz 5 MHz 500 kHz 500 kHz 50 kHz 50 kHz 10 kHz 1 kHz 1 kHz 200 Hz 100 Hz Deviation All
166. ducts returned to Hewlett Packard from another country Hewlett Packard warrants that its software and firmware designated by Hewlett Packard for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Hewlett Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HEWLETT PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY eee Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office Safety Symbols Caution Warning The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual
167. dwidth filter pole 3 symmetry A4A7C24 CTR 7 Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 3 A4A7C31 PK 7 Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 4 A4A7C32 SYM 7 Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 4 symmetry A4A7C33 CTR 7 Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 4 A4A7C40 PK 7 Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 5 A4A7C41 SYM 7 Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 5 symmetry Adjustments 3 7 Table 3 2 Adjustable Components continued Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Function Designator Name N umber A4A7C42 CTR Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 5 A4A7R30 10 Hz AMPTD Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter 10 Hz bandwidth amplitude 10 Hz AMPTD Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter 10 Hz bandwidth amplitude A4A8C13 SYM Adjusts A4A8 bandwidth filter crystal pole 1 symmetry A4A8C29 CTR 8 Centers A4A8 bandwidth filter crystal pole 1 A4A8C32 LC CTR Centers A4A8 bandwidth filter LC pole 1 A4A8C42 SYM Adjusts A4A8 bandwidth filter crystal pole 2 symmetry A4A8C44 CTR Centers A4A8 bandwidth filter crystal pole 2 A4A8C46 LC CTR Centers A4A8 bandwidth filter LC pole 2 A4A8C66 LC DIP Dips A4A8 bandwidth filter LC pole 1 A4A8C67 LC DIP Dips A4A8 bandwidth filter LC pole 2 A4A8R6 A20 dB Adjusts attenuation of 21 4 MHz bandwidth filter 20 dB step A4A8R7 A10 dB Adjusts attenuation of 21 4 MHz bandwidth filter 10 dB step A4A8R35 LC Adjusts LC filter amplitudes A4A8R40 XTAL Adjusts crystal filter amplitudes A4A9R60 3 MHz Adj
168. e A4A9R59 422 K to 750 Sets 0 8 dB step size A4A9R70 619 K to 1 1M Sets 0 1 dB step size A4A9R72 90 0 K to 162 Sets 1 6 dB step size A4A9R74 61 9 K to 110 Sets 1 4 dB step size A4A9R83 2 15 K to 825 Centers 3 kHz BW adjustment range A4A9R84 422 K to 100 Centers 10 kHz BW adjustment range A4A9R85 75 K to 178 Centers 300 kHz BW adjustment range A4A9R86 10 0 K to 17 5 Centers 1 MHz BW adjustment range A4A9R87 100 to 5 11 K Centers 3 MHz BW adjustment range or Serial Prefix 2813A to 2816A and Serial Prefix 2810A and below see the back of this table for exceptions to A4A9 3 16 Adjustments Table 3 3 Factory Selected Components continued Reference Adjustment Range of Values Function of Component Designator P rocedure Q or pF A6A9A1R5 23 7 to 180 Sets sampler drive level A6A9AIRIC 909 to 1 21 K Sets adjustment range of AGA9AIRI1 CAL OUTPUT Sets HET UNLOCK delay time constant for HP 85660B 10 HP 85660A A6A9AI1R27 56 2 A6A10R86 A6A10R87 A6A10R88 A6A10R89 A6A10R90 A6A10R91 10 to 40K 10 to 40K 10 to 40 K 10 to 40 K 10 to 40K 10 to 40K Sets adjustment range of A6A10R21 GA Sets adjustment range of AGA10R23 GB Sets adjustment range of A6A10R25 GC Sets adjustment range of A6A10R27 GD Sets adjustment range of A6A10R29 GE Sets adjustment range of A6A10R81 GF A6A11R2 100 K to 196 K Adjusts band A breakpoint for best flatness A6A12C1 0 1 to 0 68 uF Sets
169. e Table 3 2 lists all adjustable components by name reference designator and function Adjustments 3 1 Safety Considerations Warning Equipment Required Adjustment Tools 3 2 Adjustments Although this instrument has been designed in accordance with international safety standards this manual contains information cautions and warnings which must be followed to ensure safe operations and to retain the instrument in safe condition Service and adjustments should be performed only by qualified service personnel Adjustments in this section are performed with power supplied to the instrument while protective covers are removed There are voltages at many points in the instrument which can if contacted cause personal injury Be extremely careful Adjustment should be performed only by trained service personnel Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch in STANDBY There is no OFF position on the LINE switch Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board remove the power cord from the rear of both instruments and wait for the MAINS indicators red LEDs to go completely out Capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if the instrument has been disconnected from its source of power Use a non metallic tuning tool whenever possible The equipment required for the adjustment procedures is listed in Table l l Recommended Test Equipment at the beginning
170. e amplitude sa ee ee 2Vp p 0 2 36 Adjust A1A2R35 INT LIMIT clockwise until the display is just visible 37 Adjust ATA4R7 POS A1A5R7 POS and if necessary the function generator dc offsets for a full screen illumination 38 Set the front panel INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise and if it is not sealed adjust ALA2R5 INT GAIN fully clockwise Adjust A1A2R35 INT LIMIT just below the threshold at which the display illumination becomes visible Adjustments 3 35 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below 39 Slowly adjust the front panel INTENSITY control through its entire range while monitoring the peak to peak voltage at AlAS3TP5 As the INTENSITY control is turned clockwise the peak to peak voltage at 1 5 will drop To prevent long term CRT damage this voltage should not drop below V 50 V p or 12 Vp p whichever is greater See Figure 3 10 The value of was recorded in step 34 If the front panel INTENSITY control cannot be set fully clockwise without dropping below this minimum peak to peak voltage then perform the following a Set the INTENSITY control fully counter clockwise b Set the LINE switch to STANDBY c Increase the value of A1A2R9 d Return to step 34 Note Maximum CRT life expectancy is obtained when the peak to peak voltage at 5 is as large as possible with the INTENSITY control set fully clockwise The display ill
171. e trace 5 Set REFERENCE LEVEL to 10 dBm Adjust FREQ ZERO counterclockwise until trace is at the center graticule line 6 Set FREQUENCY span to 100 Hz Press SWEEP and wait for completion of the sweep 7 Press MARKER NORMAL and place marker 1 division above the center graticule line on the negative going side of the trace Press MARKER In and set the movable marker 1 division below the center graticule line See Figure 2 28 Procedure 2 56 Performance Tests 16 Residual FM Test P AA In E E E Figure 2 28 Bandwidth Filter Slope Measurement 8 Compute the detection slope of the 30 Hz filter between the markers by dividing the MARKER A amplitude by the MARKER A frequency filter slope MARKER A amplitude MARKER Afrequency dB Hz 9 Press SWEEP GF 10 Change FREQUENCY span to 0 Hz Readjust FREQ ZERO if necessary to position the trace at the center graticule line The amplitude variations of the trace see Figure 2 29 represent the analyzer residual FM Performance Tests 2 57 16 Residual FM Test CENTER 20 000000 SPAN 9 He PES Ow 38 Mz vow 39 Hr SRP 10 ec Figure 2 29 Slope Detected Residual FM 11 Press SWEEP and wait for completion of the sweep 12 Press MARKER peak Press DISPLAY LINE and position the display line at the lowest point on the trace hj 18 9 dBm ATTEN 18 dB ae db CENTER 20 908008 SPAN D RES BW 30 Hz vew
172. e 3 91 for information concerning the bypass networks A stable 21 4 MHz signal is then applied to the IF section of the instrument from a frequency synthesizer Each of the first four stages of the 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter is peaked in a 10 Hz bandwidth using an oscilloscope display The final stage is peaked using the spectrum analyzer CRT display After all five filter stages are adjusted for centering symmetry and peaking the CAL OUTPUT signal is used to match the 10 Hz and 1 kHz bandwidth amplitudes SPECTRUM ANALYZER A4A7TP7 A4ABJT SYNTHES ZER LEVEL GENERATOR r O a pgp goo coo nog Gee Saas Bu oo noa ag 000 D 0 9 49095 G Figure 3 37 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup Frequency Synthesizer HP3335A Oscilloscope 144014 b HP 54501A Crystal Filter Bypass Network 4 required See Figure 3 91 Test Cable BNC to SMB snap on HP 85680 60093 7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Procedure 1 Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 37 and remove top cover 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PnEsr Frequency Zero Check 3 Connect CAL OUTPUT signal to RF INPUT 4 Key in 9 5 Adjust front panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display Filter Center and Symmetry Adjustments 6
173. e A7 249 MHz PLO in HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer without extender leave tee connected Set LINE switch to ON and press 1 Verify that 500 kHz remains less than 90 dBm in amplitude Disconnect tee and reconnect cable 89 gray white to A7J 1 Adjustments 3 1 09 15 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustment Reference Description Equipment Procedure 3 110 Adjustments RF Section 18 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator A21 275 MHz Phase Lock The 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator frequency is adjusted using a DVM won on SPECTRUM ANALYZER a 5 AT8TPT a ocS ooaso ooa onaao tao an DIGITAL VOLTMETER goo coon aooo oa O poo Figure 3 61 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustment Setup Digital Voltmeter DVM HP 3456A Place instrument on right side with IF Display Section facing right as shown in Figure 3 61 with bottom cover removed Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET Set controls as follows qM NO 19 850000 MHz nC 1 MHz MARKER 4 en eect eO SEMEL rH dert Using DATA control knob on HP 8568B adjust marker to a position one half of a major division from the right edge of the graticule Press SHIFT SINGLE Connect DVM to A18TPI on lid and ground to A22TP12
174. e CRT display as a reference Adjust function generator amplitude if necessary to provide a signal large enough to produce a stable display The fifth peak from the reference should be within 0 5 division of the sixth graticule from the left edge of the display see Figure 2 34 Using sweep times and function generator frequencies in Table 2 18 check sweep time accuracy for sweep times 20 ms by procedure of step 10 fy REF ATTEN 18 48 1 ENTER 500 000000 MHz t4 Ew 3 MHz WAN C He VBW 3 MHz SW 5 0 ween Figure 2 34 Fast Sweep Time Measurement 20 ms 19 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test lt 20 ms Table 2 18 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy lt 20 ms sweer Time Function Generator Frequency Sweep Time Error kHz divisions 2 00 0 02 5 00 0 05 10 0 0 1 50 0 0 5 100 1 Performance Tests 2 65 20 Ist LO Output Amplitude Test Specification Description Equipment Procedure 2 66 Performance Tests gt 4 dBm from 2 0 GHz to 3 7 GHz The power level at the IST LO OUTPUT connected is measured as the first L O is swept over its 2 0 GHz to 3 1 GHz range SPECTRUM ANALYZER POWER METER 10009905 POWER SENSOR CABLE ASSEMBLY Figure 2 35 1st LO Output Amplitude Test Setup Power Meter TE Sae eem ee ee WRT tech eee eh Te ase HP 436A Power Sensor IRI HP 8482A 1 Press INSTR PRESET 2 Set swEEP time to 100 seconds
175. e N m to BNC f 2 required BNC Tee m f f Type N m to SMA f Type N f to BNC f 2 required APC 3 5 f to APC 3 5 f APC 3 5 f TO N fY 2 required PC Board 36 contacts 2 rows of 18 PC Board 30 contacts 2 rows of 15 PC Board 20 contacts 2 rows of 10 PC Board 12 contacts 2 rows of 6 PC Board extracting tool 10503A HP 85680 60093 HP 85680 20094 HP5061 5458 1250 0077 HP1250 0082 HP 1250 0670 HP1250 0778 HP1250 0780 HP1250 0781 HP1250 1250 HP1250 1474 HP1250 1749 HP 1250 1745 HP 08505 60042 HP 08505 60041 HP 85680 60028 HP08505 60109 HP 03950 4001 General Information 1 7 X X X X X X gbitb Description HP Part Number Extender Board 20 contacts 2 rows of 10 85680 60028 Cable 4 foot long BNC to SMB snap on 85680 60093 PC Board Display Adjustment Test 85662 60088 Extender Board 30 contacts 2 rows of 15 08505 60041 Extender Board 12 contacts 2 rows of 6 08505 60109 Extender Board 50 contacts 2 rows of 25 85680 60034 Extender Board 36 contacts 2 rows of 18 08505 60042 Figure 1 1 Service Accessories HP Part Number 08568 60001 1 8 General Information Performance Tests Introduction Verification of Specifications Calibration Cycle The procedures in this section test the instrument s electrical performance using the Specifications in the Installation and Verification Manual as the performance standards None
176. e scalar network analyzer press MAX Press cursor A ON and set the cursor to the 3 dB point on the low side of the filter response 0 1 dB 16 Press cursor A and set the cursor to the 3 dB point on the high side on the filter response The cursor A should read 0 0 1 dB 17 Press on synthesized sweeper and set to three divisions down 3 dB from top of bandpass filter response Press and set to three divisions down on opposite side of bandpass filter response 18 Press MKR A on synthesized sweeper M3 M4 should be greater than 21 MHz 19 Disconnect cable 80 grey black from A9J1 and cable 81 grey brown from A9J2 and reconnect instrument cables 3 118 Adjustments 18 Frequency Control Adjustments 18 Frequency Control Adjustments Reference RF Section A22 Frequency Control Related Performance Sweep Time Accuracy Test Tests Frequency Span Accuracy Test Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Description The sweep reference voltage is adjusted and then the sweep times are adjusted for proper tolerances The sweep tune voltage is adjusted Then the YTO DAC VTO DAC and LSD VTO DAC are adjusted each to within its tolerance Next the Start and Stop frequencies are adjusted FM Span is adjusted next for the proper amount of FM deviation SPECTRUM ANALYZER FREPUENCY COUNTER DIGITAL VOLTMETER Equipment Digital Voltmeter HP 3456A Fr
177. e toes wins A ATTENUATION 5 gh es AAS s x10 DC Coupled kk RD ER is eee Ran eria OFF 1 MQ input impedance OFF AUTO TRIG ib Rb EE ae ON 100 kHz FILTER eee RII OFF INT EXT switch rear EXT On the Frequency Counter select a 10 second gate time by pressing GATE TIME 10 GATE TIME Offset the displayed frequency by 10 0 MHz by pressing MATH SELECT ENTER CHS EEX 10 CHS EEX 6 SELECT ENTER SELECT ENTER The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signal A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard and 10 0 MHz with a displayed resolution of 1 mHz 0 001 Hz Wait at least two gate periods for the Frequency Counter to settle and record the frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard as reading 1 Reading 1 mHz Allow the spectrum analyzer to remain powered not in STANDBY and undisturbed for an additional 24 hours Repeat steps 3 through 7 and record the frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard as reading 2 Reading 2 ____ mHz If the difference between reading 2 and reading 1 is greater than 1 mHz the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard has not achieved its specified aging rate the spectrum analyzer should remain powered not in STANDBY and undisturbed for an additional 24 hour interval Then repeat steps 3 through 7 recording the frequency of the 10 MHz Frequenc
178. eded Linear Gain Adjustments 22 Press LIN pushbutton DVM indication at AA4AITPI should be 1 000 40 020 V dc 0 980 to 1 020 V dc If indication is not within this range repeat steps 14 through 21 If indication is within this range press Center dB div This disables the IF step gains Adjustments 3 67 5 Log Amplifier Adjustments 3 66 Adjustments 23 24 25 26 2 28 29 Decrease the frequency synthesizer s output level 10 dB Press REFERENCE LeveL 0 dBm and adjust the frequency synthesizer s output level for a DVM indication of 1 00 001 Vdc Verify that attenuator is set at 10 dB Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level by 10 dB Press REFERENCE LeveL 60 dB Adjust A4A3R83 LG10 for DVM indication of 1 000 0 010 See Figure 3 34 location of adjustment If unable to adjust LG10 for proper indication increase or decrease value of A4A3R54 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Decrease the frequency synthesizer output level by 10 dB Key in REFERENCE LEVEL 70 dB Adjust A4A2R14 LG20 for DVM indication of 1 000 0 010 V dc See Figure 3 34 for location of adjustment If unable to adjust LG20 for proper indication increase or decrease value of A4A2R18 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Press INSTR to reenable IF Step Gains 6 Video Processor Adjustments 6 Video Processor Adjustments Reference IF Display Section A4A 1
179. en low and high state of Second LO If necessary readjust 2 2ND LO SHIFT A23A3Z10 for a frequency difference of 5 0 MHz fO l Repeat steps 27 and 28 until specifications contained in each step are achieved Adjustments 3 125 19 Second Converter Adjustments Second Converter Bandpass Filter Adjustments 3 126 Adjustments Note 2T 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Key in SHIFT I T rrequency span 0 Hz On the synthesized sweeper key in 240 MHz 50 MHz and 10 dBm Connect the synthesized sweeper s SWEEP OUTPUT rear panel Z AXIS BLANK MKRS rear panel and PULSE MODULATION INPUT front panel to the proper rear panel connectors on the scalar network analyzer as shown in Figure 3 73 On the scalar network analyzer press PRESET turn channel 2 off and press A R Connect the synthesized sweeper s output to the power splitter as shown in Figure 3 72 Connect one arm of power splitter to scalar network analyzer R input Connect other arm of power splitter to A input using a BNC to SMB snap on test cable and necessary adapters Set the scalar network analyzer SCALE to 1 dB and set REF LEVEL to 16 00 dB Set REF POSN press REF POSN to the fourth division from the bottom using the data knob On the synthesized sweeper press ON MKR_sweep and AF Set to 500 ms Adjust REF LEVEL for a mid screen response of the bandpass signal on the scalar network an
180. ep time accuracy for sweep times gt 20 ms can also be measured using the HP 8568B s internal frequency counter for a time interval measurement SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIVERSAL COUNTER DIGITAL VOLTMETER Figure 2 4 Sweep Time Accuracy Test Setup Performance Tests 2 9 3 Sweep Time Accuracy Test gt 20 ms Equipment Procedure Sweep Times gt 20 ms 2 10 Performance Tests Universal Counter cece ccc cece nne HP 5316A Digital Voltmeter sess HP 3456A Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 4 Press INSTR preset on the spectrum analyzer Key in the following settings CENTER FREQUENCY n IRI In 500 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN In 0 kHz Set up the universal counter as follows Q m k a Set all front panel keys in out position b Set SEP COM A switch to A position Depress T I A B switch making sure the blue shift key is Set POWER switch to ON Set GATE TIME vernier control to 9 o clock out Set Channel A trigger level to trigger on negative slope Set Channel B trigger level to trigger on positive slope Set both Channel A and Channel B ac dc switches to de i Connect the digital voltmeter to Channel A TRIGGER LEVEL OUT Be sure to ground the DVM properly Adjust Channel A trigger level to set a DVM voltage reading of 0 3 v Repeat steps i and j for Channel B Set analyzer SWEEP
181. equency Counter HP 5340A Procedure 1 Place instrument on right side with IF Display facing right as shown in Figure 3 70 and remove bottom cover 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR Pnser 3 Connect DVM to A22TPI5 and ground to A22TP12 4 Adjust A22 REF A22R94 for DVM indication of 10 00 0 01 V dc See Figure 3 71 for location of adjustment Adjustments 3 1 19 18 Frequency Control Adjustments Start Up Time Measurement Note Slow Sweep Adjustment Note 3 120 Adjustments R39 START R64 FM SPAN 22 FREOUENCY CONTROL R35 STOP R66 TILT QO O R25 YTO R7 LSD VTO R17 TUNEREF R94 REF R88 SLOW O R91 FAST Figure 3 71 Location of Frequency Control Adjustments 5 Connect DVM to A22TP13 and ground to A22TP12 6 Adjust 22 TUNE REF A22R17 for DVM indication of 10 285 0 001 V dc See Figure 3 71 for location of adjustment Key in FREQUENCY MHz FREQUENCY span Hz Trace cLEAR wRITE Sweep SINGLE Scale LIN 8 Key in SWEEP time 1s Marker NORMAL Adjust marker to the left edge of the CRT Key in SHIFT then key in SHIFT F three times CRT annotation should indicate SWEEP GEN measured sweep time 1 second start up time The start u
182. erclockwise Press PEAK SEARCH Signal should move at least 60 Hz away from center CRT graticule line If proper indications are not achieved increase or decrease value of A4A5C9 and repeat adjustment from step 33 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Press INSTR preset and RECALL 9 Adjust front panel FREQ ZERO to peak the signal trace on the CRT 10V Temperature Compensation Supply Adjustment Connect DVM to A4ABTPI 10VF If DVM indication is between 9 V dc and 10 0 V dc no adjustment is required If DVM indication is not within tolerance of step 43 adjust A4A5R2 10V ADJ for DVM indication of 9 5 0 1 V dc at normal room temperature of approximately 25 C Voltage change is approximately 30 mV C Therefore if room temperature is higher or lower than 25 C adjustment should be made higher or lower accordingly Adjustments 3 91 11 Down Up Converter Adjustments Reference Related Performance Test Description Equipment Procedure 3 92 Adjustments IF Display Section A4A6 Down Up Converter Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test The CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT connector of the instrument and controls are set to display the signal in a narrow bandwidth A marker is placed at the peak of the signal to measure the peak amplitude The bandwidth is changed to a wide bandwidth and the Down Up Converter is adjusted to place the peak amplitude of the signal
183. ests Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 25 On the spectrum analyzer press INSTR PnEsET Set the controls of the spectrum analyzer as follows CENTER FREQUENCY aA eee 280 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN cere Re RS ebeser eR pPIS 10 kHz REFERENCE LEVEL zie EE gt 20 dBm On the synthesized sweeper key in INSTR PRESET 280 MHz Power LeveL 10 dBm On the spectrum analyzer key in DISPLAY LINE 90 dBm MARKER peak SEARCH to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 280 MHz signal On the synthesized sweeper press POWER eveL and use the ENTRY knob to adjust the amplitude of the displayed 280 MHz 6 8 10 15 Spurious Responses Test signal for a marker indication of 20 00 dBm 30 0 dBm at the input mixer with 10 dBm of input attenuation On the spectrum analyzer key in MARKER 4 CENTER Frequency 560 MHz MARKER PEAK SEARCH to position a second marker on the peak of the second harmonic distortion product of the 280 MHz input signal The response should be below the display line gt 70 dB below the input signal level Second Harmonic dBm On the synthesized sweeper key in POWER Leve to decrease the amplitude of the 280 MHz signal by 10 dB On the spectrum analyzer key in MARKER OFF CENTER rnEauENcv 280 MHz REFERENCE LeveL 30 dBm DISPLAY LINE ENTER 105 dBm MARKER PEAK searcn to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 2
184. et 23 Press CHAN CHANNEL 1 on more preset probe and use the front panel knob to set the probe to 10 00 1 Press more 24 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press CHAN amplitude 20 0 V div A mea as 45 0000 V Press TIME BASE SCALE vei De eot obe bete e dre ed 50 0 ns div delay inne nd asta ERSTE EROS degna 125 000 ns Press TRIG levelu 5 Ert 50 00000 v Press DISPLAY Cconiniect dots o teet t ie Rt Re it eene Ato d on Press SHOW 25 Connect the output of the Pulse Function Generator to J3 Z input on the Display Adjustment PC Board in the A3A2 slot Set the board s switch to the down position Note The pulse function generator s output must be terminated with 50 ohms Use a BNC tee a 500 termination and a BNC female to SMB female adapter Install the 500 termination as close to the Display Adjustment PC Board as possible 26 Set the Pulse Function Generator s controls as follows MODE fe cs hoe eMe RR te P e OS ec Na o NORM M avefOL T quiste onde eerte Mi seen A E pulse Frequency PRO ose tee ree eek SEN Ee 200 kHz Width e tete te ROS eile apt 250 ns Amplitude AMP eira eaaa riana tenes 4 00V Offset OBS penser ee ER A CU e putei 2 00V 27 Disconnect the black connector with three wires 8 98 and 96 from A1A2J5 and set
185. et signal peak on screen two divisions from the top graticule line Connect crystal filter bypass networks between A4A4TP1 and A4A4TP2 and between A4A4TP4 and 4 4 5 Adjust A4A4C20 CTR to center signal on center graticule line Adjust A4A4C9 SYM for best symmetry of signal See Figure 3 42 for location of adjustments If unable to adjust SYM for satisfactory signal symmetry increase or decrease value of A4A4C10 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values A4A4 Bandwidth Filter CTR C65 SYM R49 XTAL C39 SYM C20 CTR C10 C9 SYM C335 C66 C74 C38 Figure 3 42 Location of A4A4 21 4 MHz Crystal Filter Adjustments Remove crystal filter bypass network from between A4A4TP4 and A4A4TP5 20 Adjust A4A4C74 CTR to center signal on center graticule line 21 Adjust A4A4C39 SYM for best symmetry of signal See Figure 3 42 for location of adjustments If unable to adjust A4A4C39 SYM for satisfactory signal symmetry increase or decrease value of A4A4C38 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Remove crystal filter bypass network from between A4A4TP1 and A4A4TP2 Adjustments 3 79 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 22 Adjust A4A4C73 CTR to center signal on center graticule line Adjust A4A4C65 SYM for best symmetry of signal See Figure 3 4
186. f the signal at the 6 dB point CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6 dB bandwidth of the 3 MHz bandwidth filter The bandwidth should be 3 00 MHz 0 60 MHz Key in 1 MHz FREQUENCY span 2 MHz PEAK SEARCH and MKR CF If necessary readjust by pressing REFERENCE LeveL and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule Press MARKER then MARKER 4 9 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments 13 Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one side of the display signal to the 6 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 500 x A4A9 IF CONTROL R66 3kHz R65 10 R62 300kHz R81 IMHz R60 3MHz A4A9 Figure 4 7 Location of Bandwidth Adjustments 14 Adjust A4A9R61 1 MHz for A indication of 500 KHz while maintaining the marker at 0 500 X using the DATA knob Refer to Figure 4 7 for the adjustment location 15 Press MARKER A Adjust marker to the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicate 1 00 X There are now two markers one on each of the signal at the 6 dB point 16 The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 6 dB bandwidth of the 1 MHz bandwidth filter The 6 dB bandwidth should be 1
187. for an output frequency of 20 000 MHz and an output power level of 10 dBm Set the amplitude increment for 10 dB steps Connect equipment as shown in Figure 5 1 Press MARKER peak SEARCH MKR CF MKR REF LVL to center the signal on the display Press SWEEP on the spectrum analyzer and wait for the sweep to be completed Press MARKER MARKER In Step the frequency synthesizer output amplitude down 10 dB On the spectrum analyzer press SWEEP and wait until the sweep is completed Press MARKER PEAK sEARcH and record the marker A amplitude a negative value in column 2 of Table 5 1 Repeat steps 8 and 9 decreasing the output power from the frequency synthesizer in 10 dB steps from 10 dBm to 80 dBm Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for each setting to find the fidelity error Option 857 5 3 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Table 5 1 Log Amplitude Fidelity 10 Hz RBW Option 857 Frequency 5 4 Option 857 Fidelity Error Cumulative Cumulative 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from 10 dB to 70 dB The results should be lt 0 8 dB dB Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from 10 dB
188. ful Do not attempt to measure the CRT filament voltage directly The filament voltage is referenced to the high voltage cathode and can only be measured safely with a special high voltage true rms voltmeter and probe 1 Set the spectrum analyzer s LINE switch to STANDBY 2 Remove the top cover from the IF Display Section and connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 5 and described in the following steps 3 Set the DVM to the 100 V range and connect the DVM to 1 100 V Do not use the high voltage probe See Figure 3 6 for the location of ALA7TP3 Note Warning 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below The accuracy of the high voltage probe is specified for a probe connected to a dc voltmeter with 10 input resistance HP 3456A and HP 3455A digital voltmeters have a 10 MQ input resistance on the 100 V and 1000 V ranges All measurements in this procedure should be performed with the DVM manually set to the 100 V range fOO 0DOO on the HP 3456A display 1 8 51 ATASHIGH VOLTAGE REGULATOR 1 7 3 ATA6R32 Figure 3 6 Location of High Voltage Adjustments 4 Set the LINE switch to ON Set the front panel INTENSITY control fully counterclockwise CRT beam at cut off to prevent possible damage to the CRT 5 Note the DVM indication at ALA7TP3 DVM Indication 6 Connect the high voltage probe
189. ged Grounding Wire Figure 3 15 Discharging the CRT Post Accelerator Cable A small bracket and screw secure the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly to the Al1A10 Display Motherboard Assembly The bottom cover of the IF Display Section must be removed to gain access to this screw prior to removal of the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below Reference Note Note Description Caution Equipment 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below A1A1 Keyboard A1A2 Z Axis Amplifier Al A4 X Deflection Amplifier A1A5 Y Deflection Amplifier Adjustment 2 High Voltage Adjustment should be performed before performing the following adjustment procedure Perform this adjustment only if components have been replaced on the A1A2 Z Axis Amplifier 1 4 X Deflection Amplifier ALA5 Y Deflection Amplifier Assemblies Components A1A2ZR22 HF GAIN A1A2C10 ALA4R28 HF GAIN A1A4C10 ALA4C11 ALA5R28 HF GAIN A1A5C10 and 1 5 11 are factory adjusted and normally do not require readjustment The AI Display Section is adjusted to compensate the CRT drive circuits for proper horizontal and vertical characteristics These preliminary adjustments are necessary only when a major repair has been performed in the display section for example replacement or repair of the 1 2 Z Axis A
190. gh Frequency End Adjustment VTO Low Frequency End Adjustment VTO Center Frequency 3 132 Adjustments Checks 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Adjust All POS SUPPLY A11R6 for a DVM indication the same as that noted in step 12 See Figure 3 79 for location of adjustment Key in CF size gt 112 kHz and SHIFT MKR CF Adjust All OFFSET A11R10 for VTP frequency indication 28 000 MHz 0 005 MHz Key in size 12 kHz and SHIFT MKR CF P Adjust All GAIN A11R9 for VTO frequency indication of 28 750 MHz 0 005 MHz Repeat steps 15 through 18 until specifications of steps 16 and 18 are achieved Key in SHIFT size 912 kHz SHIFT MKR CF Adjust All SHAPING ATTN A11R42 for VTO indication of 22 000 MHz 0 005 MHz See Figure 3 78 for location of adjustment Key in SHIFT CF SIZE 1012 kHz and SHIFT MKR CF P Adjust All SHAPING OFFSET A11R17 for VTO frequency indication of 21 250 MHz 0 005 MHz See Figure 3 78 for location of adjustment Repeat steps 21 through 23 until specifications of steps 20 and 23 are achieved Go back to step 15 and repeat both High Frequency End and Lo Frequency End adjustments until specifications of both contained in steps 16 18 21 and 23 are achieved Key in SHIFT CF ster size 7 512 kHz and GHiFT MKR gt CF VTO fre
191. gt 14 dBm but lt 17 dBm See Figure 3 64 for the location of the bandpass adjustments Adjustments 3 1 13 16 Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment See Figure 3 65 for the typical response when the bandpass filter is properly adjusted 14 On the scalar network analyzer press MAX Press cursor A ON and set the cursor to the 3 dB point on the low side of the filter response 0 1 dB 15 Press cursor A and set the cursor to the 3 dB point on the high side on the filter response The cursor A should read 0 fO 1 dB A19 2ND A20 3RD IF AMPLIFIER CONVERTER 301 4MHz BANDPASS FILTERS Figure 3 64 Location of 301 4 MHz BPF and 280 MHz AMPTD Adjustments CRSRd 4 OD cB 3 dB Point 27 MHz 14 MHz Figure 3 65 301 4 MHz Bandpass Filter Adjustment W aveform 16 On the synthesized sweeper press and set the Marker to the 3 dB point on the low side of the filter response 17 On the synthesized sweeper press and set the Marker to the 3 dB point on the high side of the filter response 3 114 Adjustments Note Note Third Converter Adjustment 16 Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment Place the Markers as accurately as possible within the cursor markers f
192. gure 3 39 for location of adjustment If unable to achieve a peak in signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A7C21 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Move Channel 2 probe to A4A7TPI left side of C41 SYM Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak Channel 1 display Adjust A4A7C31 PK for maximum peak to peak signal on Channel 2 display See Figure 3 39 for location of adjustment If unable to achieve a peak in signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A7C30 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Disconnect Channel 2 probe from A4A7TP1 Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak Channel 1 display Adjust REFERENCE LEVEL using step keys to place signal near top CRT graticule line Adjust A4A7C40 PK for maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display See Figure 3 39 for the location of adjustment If unable to achieve a peak in signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A7C39 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Disconnect Channel 1 probe from A4A7TP7 Disconnect frequency synthesizer output from A4A8J1 and reconnect cable 97 white violet Adjustments 3 75 7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 3 76 Adjustments 10 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Hz Amplitude Adjustments Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT Key in INSTR Preset 9 10 Hz Adjust the instrument front panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display Ke
193. hours Care must be taken not to disturb the spectrum analyzer during the 24 hour test interval since the frequency reference is sensitive to shock and vibration The frequency reference should remain within its attained aging rate if the instrument is left on the instrument orientation with respect to the earth s magnetic field is maintained and the instrument does not sustain any mechanical shock Frequency changes due to orientation with respect to the earth s magnetic field and altitude changes will usually be nullified when the instrument is returned to its original position Frequency changes due to mechanical shock will usually appear as a fixed frequency error The frequency reference is also sensitive to temperature changes for this reason the ambient temperature near the instrument at the first measurement time and the ambient temperature at the second measurement time should not differ by more than 1 C Placing the spectrum analyzer in STANDBY mode turns the instrument off while continuing to provide power for the frequency reference oven helping to minimize warmup time However the frequency reference must be on to attain its aging rate Performance Tests 2 67 21 Frequency Reference Error Test SPECTRUM ANALYZER o bh THU STO INPUT v on CHANNEL A 1 10 MHZ ee coo no di suo o Qu dr acp e n Crede DOLI FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC COUNTER ST
194. if the A4A6ALI assembly is replaced or the A4A6AI 21 4 MHz Bandpass Amplifier Filter is worked on 1 Disconnect CAL OUTPUT from RF INPUT 2 Key in REFERENCE Level 70 dBm RES BW 1 kHz and MARKER it RS 3 Set the second spectrum analyzer s to the following settings RESOLUTION BANDWIDTH 100 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN 10 MHz CENTER FREQUENCY 18 4 MHz RF ATTENUATION eesseeeee eee ee 10 dB REFERENCE LEVEL 0 dBm SCALE S eret tse Nes an ae Dd LOG 10 dB div 4 Connect the second spectrum analyzer to A4A4TP7 using and active probe See Figure 3 50 for test setup 5 Adjust A4A6A1C31 18 4 MHz NULL to null the 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator signal and all displayed harmonics See Figure 3 51 for location of adjustment A4A6 DOWN UP CONVERTER C31 18 4 MHz NULL WIDE GAIN A2R33 Figure 3 51 Location of Down Up Converter Adjustments 6 18 4 MHz signal and displayed harmonics should be below 10 dBm 30 dBm on display due to 10 1 divider If unable to adjust A4A6A1C31 18 4 MHz NULL for proper indication increase value of A4A5R10 See Figure 3 49 for the location of A4A5R10 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Adjustments 3 93 1
195. in Figure 3 93 a b C 3 140 Adjustments Key in TRACE A and SWEEP SINGLE Disconnect cable 0 black from sweep ramp input A3A8J1 Short A8A8TP4 to A3A8TP5 or connect SMB snap on short to Connect the oscilloscope s 10 1 probe to A3A8TP11 and ground the probe s ground to the section s card cage Set the oscilloscope settings as follows amplitude 0 1 V div time E A Tad 5 04s COUPN E vertes D ens ie eg te detti dw aN dc Adjust A3A8R6 OFFS for a square wave displayed on the oscilloscope The square wave should be approximately 4 Vp See Figure 3 86 for location of adjustment ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER Beneath Cover R5 RE GAIN OFFS 3 86 Location of Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments Remove short from A3A8TP4 and A3A8TP5 or disconnect the SMB snap on short from A3A8J1 Press INSTR PRESET Press MARKER NORMAL 1498 MHz and SHIFT SINGLE Connect DVM to A3A8TP5 and ground to ASA8TP4 Set DVM for V de Connect output of the Low Noise DC Supply to A3A8J1 Adjust the Low Noise DC Supply for DVM indication of 10 000 001V dc Alternate Procedure 23 Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments 1 Adjust A3A8R5 GAIN for a square wave displayed on the oscilloscope The squa
196. ine gt 80 dB below the input signals TOI Distortion 1 MHz separation 30 MHz dBm 21 On the spectrum analyzer key in_ centeR FREQUENCY 28 MHz MARKER SEARCH to position a marker at the peak of the 28 MHz third order intermodulation product The response should be below the display line gt 80 dB below the input signals TOI Distortion 1 MHz separation 30 MHz dBm Is fa SECOND HARMONICS FROM SIGNAL 2t SECOND SECOND ORDER THIRD ORDER ORDER Figure 2 27 Intermodulation Distortion Products 22 On the frequency synthesizer key in Jrrequency 29 99 MHz 23 On the spectrum analyzer key in MARKER OFF CENTER FREQUENCY 29 99 MHz DISPLAY LINE 90 dBm MARKER PEAK SEARCH Performance Tests 2 53 15 Spurious Responses Test 2 54 Performance Tests 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 On the frequency synthesizer readjust the signal amplitude as necessary to position the peak of the displayed 29 99 MHz signal at the top CRT graticule line On the spectrum analyzer key in MARKER A CENTER 30 01 MHz MARKER to position a second marker at the peak of the 30 01 MHz third order intermodulation product The response should be below the display line gt 70 dB below the input signals TOI Distortion 10 kHz separation 30 MHz dBm On the spectrum analyzer ke
197. ing DATA knob See Figure 3 45 for location of adjustment Press MARKER A Adjust marker to 3 dB point on opposite side of signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X There are now two markers one on each side of the signal at the 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3 dB bandwidth of the 1 MHz bandwidth 3 dB bandwidth should be 1 00 0 10 MHz Key in 300 kHz and FREQUENCY span 500 KHz If necessary readjust REFERENCE LeveL and cENrER FREQUENCY using DATA knob to place signal peak near top of graticule and centered on center graticule line Press MARKER OFF then MARKER Using DATA knob adjust marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 707 X Adjust A4A9R62 300 kHz for MKR A indication of 150 kHz while maintaining marker at 3 dB point 707 X using DATA knob See Figure 3 45 for location of adjustment Press MARKER 4 Adjust marker to 3 dB point on opposite side of signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X Adjustments 3 85 9 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments 3 86 Adjustments 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3 32 33 34 CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the 3 dB bandwidth of the 300 kHz bandwidth 3 dB bandwidth should be 300 0 430 0 kHz Key in 10 kHz and FReaueNcv SPAN 20 kHz If necessary readjust REFERENCE LEVEL and cENrER FREQUENCY using DATA knob to place signal peak near top
198. input and adjusting the OFFS and GAIN controls until the ramp output at 8 11 toggles high to low This sets the horizontal end points for the CRT trace display when the sweep ramp input is at O V dc the left graticule edge trace position 1 is set and when the sweep ramp input is at 10 V dc the right graticule edge trace position 1000 is set This procedure requires a 10 V dc source which is stable and noise free A simple supply circuit which can be built with common components is illustrated in Figure 3 93 If these components are unavailable the alternate procedure provided below using only the digital voltmeter can then be used LOW NOISE DC SUPPLY ASABTP5 SPECTRUM ANALYZER HP 54501A DIGITIZING OSCILLOSCOPE ad 1 b vad acd o 90099 oao oonoao Sao gb 4b Figure 3 85 Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments Setup OSCOS COPE mr EE HP 54501 Digital Voltmeter odes Ate oe rr IS ANS Gene deus HP 3456A Low Noise DC Supply Optional See Figure 3 93 Adjustments 3 139 23 Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments Procedure 1 Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 85 and remove top cover 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET Standard Procedure 3 Procedure using Low Noise DC Supply is illustrated
199. ion Bandwidth Accuracy Test For instruments with Option 462 refer to Chapter 4 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments 20 3 MHz 10 3 kHz to 1 MHz 20 10 Hz to 1 kHz 30 kHz and 100 kHz bandwidth accuracy figures apply only with lt 90 Relative Humidity lt 40 C The 3 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting is measured with the MARKER function to determine bandwidth accuracy The CAL OUTPUT is used for a stable signal source None Required 1 Press INSTR PRESET 2 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 3 Key in spectrum analyzer setting as follows CENTER FHEGUENCY 4 x xd Ir OR d en AUR aie 20 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN ibid E dei 5 MHz mem MTM RET DN 3 MHz REFERENCE 10 dBm 4 Press SCALE LIN pushbutton Press resolution bandwidth 5 Adjust REFERENCE LEVEL to position peak of signal trace at reference level top graticule line Press SWEEP SINGLE 6 Press MARKER NORMAL and place marker at peak of signal trace with DATA knob Press MARKER In and position movable marker 3 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive going edge of the signal trace the MARKER A amplitude readout should be 3 00 dB 0 05 dB It may be necessary to press SWEEP and adjust cENrER FREQUENCY to center trace on screen 7 Press MARKER and position movable marker 3 dB down from the signal peak on the negative going edge of the trace the MARKER A am
200. ior to performing the following adjustment procedure 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 31 SPECTRUM ANALYZER 66 4 50006 CABLE TO PHOTOMETER Figure 3 31 Final Display Adjustments Setup 2 Set the photometer probe to NORMAL Press POWER on the photometer to turn it on and allow 30 minutes warm up Zero the photometer according to the manufacturer s instructions 3 With the spectrum analyzer s LINE switch set to STANDBY set the potentiometers listed in the Table 3 6 as indicated See Figure 3 32 for the location of the adjustments Note In this procedure do not adjust the following potentiometers and variable capacitors on the A1A2 X Y Z Amplifier Assembly C104 C109 C204 C209 C307 R117 R217 or R308 These components are adjusted in the factory and in Adjustment Procedure 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above Adjustments 3 61 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 3 62 Adjustments R120 R220 R512 R127 R227 R513 R319 R426 R437 R516 J R517 R409 R427 R440 Figure 3 32 Location of Final Display Adjustments on 1 2 Table 3 6 Initial Adjustment Positions 1 2 R120 Y GAIN A1A
201. key in the following settings A PE 20 MHz 5 MHz por MEINEM EP 3 MHz i Mar PEUT OW 10 dBm On the spectrum analyzer press SCALE Press RES BW for units in dBm On the spectrum analyzer press the REFERENCE LEVEL and use the DATA knob to position the signal peak near the reference level top graticule line Press SWEEP SINGLE On the spectrum analyzer press MARKER NORMAL and place the marker at the signal peak with the DATA knob Press MARKER and position the movable marker 6 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive going edge of the signal trace the MARKER 4 amplitude readout should be 6 00 dB 0 05 dB To center the trace on screen it may be necessary to press SWEEP CONT and adjust CENTER FREQUENCY Press MARKER and position movable marker 6 dB down from the signal peak on the negative going edge of the trace the MARKER 4 amplitude readout should be 0 00 dB 0 05dB The 6 dB bandwidth is given by the MARKER frequency readout See Figure 4 3 Record in Table 4 2 Option 462 4 7 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Note 6 dB resolution bandwidth measurements are used in Performance Test 5 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test MKA A 3 103 MHz 00 dB LINEAR Figure 4 3 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Measurement 46 Select the spectrum analyzer and FREQUENCY span settings according to Ta
202. keying in the necessary reference level to activate the 10 dB and the 20 dB control lines adjusting the step attenuators to compensate for the attenuation and adjusting the attenuators for the proper amount of attenuation SPECTRUM ANALYZER 44astTPi oodd DIGITAL VOLTMETER 4 CAL OUTPUT RF INPUT Q 1098 STEP 14 STEP ATTENUATOR ATTENUATOR Figure 3 40 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup Adjustments 3 77 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Equipment Digital Voltmeter HP 3456A 10 dB Step Attenuator HP 355D Option H89 1 dB Step Attenuator HP 355C Option H25 Crystal Filter Bypass Network 2 required Refer to Figure 3 91 Procedure 1 Position instrument upright as shown in Figure 3 40 and remove top cover 2 Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET 10 V Temperature Compensation Supply Check 3 Connect DVM to 4 5 1 10 VF 4 DVM indication should be between 9 0 V dc and 10 0 V dc If voltage is within tolerance proceed to next step If voltage is not within tolerance refer to Adjustment 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments for adjustment procedure A4A4 LC Adjustments 5 Set step attenuators to 0 dB 6 Disconnect cable 97 white violet from A4A8J1 and connect to 4 7 Key in 20 MHz
203. lace signal between the last two graticule lines right side on the signal analyzer display Adjust AMPLITUDE VERNIER on the function generator until the peak of the signal is at the reference graticule line on the spectrum analyzer display Press LOG ENTER dB DIV 1 dB on the spectrum analyzer Press DISPLAY LINE and set the Display Line to the level recorded for 100 kHz in step 25 Adjust function generator AMPLITUDE VERNIER to place peak of signal at the Display Line Adjust FREQUENCY on the function generator to position the signal trace at the right edge of the spectrum analyzer display last graticule line Press MODULATION SWP on the function generator and allow the function generator to make at least two complete sweeps Press TRACE A MAX HOLD Allow the function generator to make one complete sweep After completion of the sweep press TRACE A vie 8 Frequency Response Test 42 Press DISPLAY LINE on the spectrum analyzer Use the 43 44 45 46 47 Display Line to measure the maximum and minimum points on the trace Disregard LO Feedthrough at 1 kHz Record the measurements below SIGNAL INPUT 1 1 kHz to 100 kHz Maximum dBm Minimum dBm Set Display Line to peak of trace at 1 kHz Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings TRACE 4A cLEAR WRITE Tupdie d adiu eee SY 1 kHz MEET 1kHz arm ete Le 100 Hz Set function generator
204. libration Equipment Required Test Record 1 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test 2 Frequency Span Accuracy Test 3 Sweep Time Accuracy Test 220 ms 4 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 5 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test 6 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test 7 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test 8 Frequency Response Test 9 RF Gain Uncertainty Test 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test 11 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test 12 Amplitude Fidelity Test 13 Average Noise Level Test 14 Residual Responses Test 15 Spurious Responses Test 16 Residual FM Test css 17 Line Related Sidebands Tests 18 Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test 19 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test 20 ms 20 1st LO Output Amplitude Test 21 Frequency Reference Error Test Table 2 19 Performance Test Record Test 1 Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Test 2 Frequency Span Accuracy Test Test 3 Sweep Time Accuracy Test 4 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 5 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test 6 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty TESE we teh x emet tid RD e o NS Test 7 Input Attenua
205. ll display focus and appearance R7 R27 R31 R32 R36 R30 POSN GA IN ORTHO PATT AST IG FOCUS GAIN Figure 3 30 Location of Final Display Adjustments on A1A2 A1A4 and 1 5 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above Reference A1A1 Keyboard A1A2 X Y Z Axis Amplifiers Description This procedure is used to optimize the appearance of the CRT display during routine maintenance or after CRT replacement or minor repairs First the display is adjusted for best focus over the full CRT then the graticule pattern is adjusted for optimum rectangular display Equipment Digital Photometer Tektronix J 16 Option 02 Photometer Probe Tektronix 56503 Photometer interconnect cable Tektronix 012 0414 02 Photometer light occluder Tektronix 016 0305 00 Procedure Note Adjustment Procedure 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above should be performed pr
206. located in Chapter 4 Option 462 6 dB Bandwidths Test 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Test 5 6 dB Resolution Selectivity Test Adjustment 9 6 dB Bandwidth Adjustments Impulse Bandwidths Test 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Test 5 Impulse and Resolution Selectivity Test Test 6 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test Adjustment 9 Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments Option 857 instruments require that the performance test procedure listed below be performed instead of the standard version included in Chapter 2 Information on Option 857 is located in Chapter 5 Option 857 Test 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Table 1 1 Recommended Test Equipment 1 of 5 Equipment Substitution Model SIGNAL SOURCES Synthesized Frequency 10 MHz to 1500 MHz HP 8340A Sweeper Output Power 10 dBm maximum leveled Aging Rate 1 x 10 day Spurious Signals 35 dBc lt 7 GHz lt 25 dBc lt 20 GHz Amplitude Modulation dc to 100 kHz Leveling Internal External Power Meter Signal Frequency 20 MHz to 450 MHz HP 8640B Generator SSB Phase Noise gt 130 dB below carrier at 20 kHz away Stability lt 10 ppm 10 min HP 8340A may be substituted Frequency Frequency 200 Hz to 80 MHz HP 3335A Synthesizer Stability 1 x 10 5 day Amplitude Range 13 to 86 dBm with 0 01 dB resolution Attenuator Accuracy lt 0 07 dB 13 to 47 dBm Pulse Pulse Width 10 nsec to
207. low SIGNAL INPUT 2 100 kHz to 20 MHz Maximum dBm Minimum dBm SPECTRUM ANALYZER O b o 5 FUNCT LON GENERATOR SIGNAL OUTPUT INPUT 1 Vp p Figure 2 15 Frequency Response Test Setup 100 Hz to 100 kHz Performance Tests 2 27 8 Frequency Response Test 100 Hz to 100 kHz 2 28 Performance Tests 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 Press INSTR PRESET on the spectrum analyzer Activate SIGNAL INPUT 1 Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings pe 1 kHz P P a ep 100 kHz Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 15 with function generator to SIGNAL INPUT 1 Set the function generator controls as follows RI pete bd Cede ee at I e a ON RANGEHZ Re et duet CEN ets 10K FUNC TION S 1 E ERROR e eee es ORES Bs bist CAL button in AMPELTUDE aroe tu E pear EA En 1V AMPLITUDE VERNIER 0000 cc cece eee eee midrange SY MEA ica VEU VU ERE NU EE eG EE M TN CAL TRIGGER PHASE FREE RUN MODULATION sseeeee RR RIRs all out MODULATION RANGE Hz 0 0 0 0 0c cece n I MODULATION RANGE Hz VERNIER fully CCW MODULATION SYM seeeee RR CAL Percent Modulation ssssssss e fully CW Adjust function generator FREQUENCY to p
208. lution Bandwidth Selectivity Spectrum Analyzer M easured M easured Bandwidth M aximum Selectivity Belectivity Ratio 20 MHz 15 MHz 5 MHz 2 MHz 500 kHz 200 kHz 50 kHz 10 kHz 5 kHz 2 kHz 500 Hz 100 Hz J 60 dB points separated by lt 100 Hz 2 74 Performance Tests Test 6 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test Test 6 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Test Step 6 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty RES BW FREQUENCY SPAN Deviation Allowable MKR A Deviation Readout dB dB Performance Tests 2 75 Test 7 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test nm Step 7 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty REFERENCE LEvEL Frequency Deviation Corrected Allowable dB Synthesizer MARKER A Deviation Deviation Amplitude Amplitude dBm dB 2 76 Performance Tests Test 8 Frequency Response Test Test 8 Frequency Response Test M easured M ax itep Signal Input Min 12 SIGNAL INPUT 2 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz 15 SIGNAL INPUT 1 20 MHz to 1 5 GHz 16 SIGNAL INPUT 1 20 MHz to 500 MHz 25 SIGNAL INPUT 1 100 kHz to 20 MHz 26 SIGNAL INPUT 1 100 kHz 31 SIGNAL INPUT 2 100 kHz to 20 MHz 42 SIGNAL INPUT 1 1 kHz to 100 kHz 48 SIGNAL INPUT 1 1000 Hz 900 Hz 800 Hz 700 Hz 600 Hz 500 Hz 400 Hz 300 Hz 200 Hz 100 Hz 49 SIGNAL INPUT 1 deviation in dB 100 Hz to 500 MHz step
209. m Equipment Procedure 1 FUNCTION FREQUENCY GENERATOR COUNTER Figure 2 33 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy lt 20 ms Test Setup Function Generator e cece cece eee een en HP 3312A Universal Counter 0 HP 5316A Signal Generator IR HP 8340A Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 33 Press INSTR PRESET on spectrum analyzer Key in analyzer settings as follows CENTER FREQUENCY nnn 500 2 FHERUENCY SEAN verteret ou ite he 100 kHz Set synthesized sweeper for an output frequency of 500 MHz and an output power level of 10 dBm Performance Tests 2 63 SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER 19 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test lt 20 ms 10 11 2 64 Performance Tests Press MARKER Peak SEARCH MKR CF OFF Set FREQUENCY span to 0 Hz RES BW to 3 MHz VIDEO BW to 3 MHz and press TRIGGER VIDEO Set synthesized sweeper for an amplitude modulated output Set function generator controls as follows FUNCTION eese triangular wave approximately 1 Vp p OFFSET CAL position in SYM CAL position in TRIGGER PHASE FREE RUN MODULATION all out Key in sweep time 5 ms and set function generator for a counter reading of 2 00 0 02 kHz Adjust spectrum analyzer TRIGGER LEVEL to place a peak of the triangular waveform on the first graticule from the left edge of th
210. m Step dB dB lt 1 0dB lt 1 5 dB Step 18 Log Amplitude Fidelity 10 kHz RBW Option 857 Frequency 1 Fidelity Error Cumulative Cumulative Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER A Amplitude Column 2 Column 1 Error Error Amplitude Amplitude dB 0 to 80 dB 0 to 90 dB dBm Step dB dB lt 1 0dB lt 1 5 dB 5 8 Option 857 Test 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test Step 26 Linear Amplitude Fidelity Frequency MARKER A Allowable Range Synthesizer Amplitude 3 of Reference Level Amplitude dB dBm Option 857 5 9 Major Assembly and Component Locations IF Display Section Assembly See Figure 6 6 Figure Index EET 6 4 6 5 uie c D DN CL T 6 4 6 5 WANA cher sors ert ma HUND HM M 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 5 6 4 6 5 IC ks 6 4 6 5 OC MNA aa 6 4 6 5 a TATA PA ATOM 6 7 WNT OOD esee 6463 EO RN NN NN 6 4 6 5 AIA10C3 6 4 6 5 COE ARAS ALARMA AMAA 64 65 6 4 E E 64 6564 PUO ION DI A QUU 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 dite a 6 4 6 5 a en 6 4 6 5 T 64 65 C NNNM howd kasd a he 6 4 6 5 CIAM OH VAR OR MAN 64 65 O on anata an anaes 6 4 6 5 UTC AES AQUI ONES 6 4 6 5 6 4 6 5 PUO POM HR M MM AMEN 6 7
211. m analyzer must be switched ON continuously not in STANDBY for at least 72 hours before adjusting the frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard 2 Set the LINE switch to ON Leave the spectrum analyzer ON not in STANDBY and undisturbed for at least 48 hours to allow the temperature and frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard to stabilize 3 Press TRACE B_ cuear write 5 to turn off the display This prolongs CRT life while the spectrum analyzer is unattended To turn the CRT back on press SHIFT TRACE B MAX HLD 4 Connect the Cesium Beam Frequency Standard to the Frequency Counter s rear panel TIMEBASE IN OUT connector as shown in Figure 3 54 5 Disconnect the short jumper cable on the RF Section rear panel from the FREQ REFERENCE INT connector Connect this output FREQ REFERENCE INT to INPUT A on the Frequency Counter A REF UNLOCK message should appear on the CRT display 6 Set the Frequency Counter controls as follows INPUT ig tte hee ss m E Res A ATTENUATION eseeIII x10 DC Coupled ii dud boules o Rmo o bebes OFF 1 MQ input impedance OFF AUTO toon te aoe ees ON 100 KHz FILTER 2 0 ieee cee cee eens OFF 3 100 Adjustments Note 7 9 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2848A to 3217A05567 INT EXT switch rear EXT On the Frequency Counter select a 10 second gate time by pressing GATE TIME 1
212. ments of the 120 V supply voltage with and without the probe Any measurement error due to the use of the high voltage probe is calculated into the adjustment specification of the CRT cathode voltage which is adjusted with the AlA6 HV ADJUST control When the CRT cathode voltage is properly adjusted the CRT filament voltage will be 6 00 0 05 V rms measured with CRT beam at cut off which is required for maximum CRT life The filament voltage is referenced to the high voltage cathode and can only be measured directly with special equipment Adjustments 3 39 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above Equipment High Voltage Adjustment Procedure Warning Warning Note 3 40 Adjustments Digital Voltmeter DVM 00 ccc cece e ee eee eens HP 3456A DC High Voltage Probe 1000 1 divider HP 34111A In the following procedure it is necessary to probe voltages which if contacted could cause serious personal injury Use a nonmetallic alignment tool when making adjustments Be extremely careful Do not attempt to measure the CRT filament voltage directly The filament voltage is referenced to the high voltage cathode and can only be measured safely with a special high voltage true rms voltmeter and probe 1 Set the spectrum analyzer s LINE switch to STANDBY 2 Remove the top cover from the IF Display Section and connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 12 1 7
213. mplifier 1 4 X Deflection Amplifier or A1A5 Y Deflection Amplifier assemblies For routine maintenance CRT replacement or minor repairs only adjustment procedure 4 Final Display Adjustments needs to be performed Be sure not to allow a high intensity spot to remain on the spectrum analyzer CRT A fixed spot of high intensity may permanently damage the CRT s phosphor coating Monitor the CRT closely during the following adjustment procedures If a spot occurs move it off screen by adjusting either the front panel INTENSITY control or the horizontal or vertical deflection position controls Digitizing Oscilloscope seI HP 54501A Pulse Function Generator HP 8116A 10 1 Divider Probe 10 MQ 7 5 pF 2 required HP 10432A Display Adjustment PC Board service accessory 85662 60088 Termination BNC 500 esses HP 11593A Adapters Adapter BNG fee cs oan os ex tate eate ewe vro ades 1250 0781 Adapter BNC f to SMBT o AREE 1250 1236 Adjustments 3 45 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below X and Y Deflection Amplifier Pulse Response Adjustments 3 46 Adjustments Procedure Note Connect a 10 1 10 MQ divider probe to the oscilloscope s channel 1 input and a 10 1 divider probe to the channel 4 input 2 On the oscilloscope press RECALL CLEAR to perform a soft reset 3 On the oscilloscope press more preset probe
214. mplitude Fidelity 10 kHz RBW Option 857 5 5 5 3 Linear Amplitude Fidelity 5 6 General Information Introduction Warning Instruments Covered by this Manual This HP 8568B Tests and Adjustments Manual contains two sections Performance Tests and Adjustments Procedures The Performance Tests provided should be performed for the following reasons w If the test equipment for the Operation Verification Program is not available If the instrument does not pass all of the Operation Verification tests m For complete verification of specifications not covered by the Operation Verification program The adjustment procedures should be performed for the following reasons If the results of a performance test are not within the specifications m After the replacement of a part or component that affects electrical performance The adjustment procedures require access to the interior of the instrument and therefore should only be performed by qualified service personnel There are voltages at many points in the instrument which can if contacted cause personal injury Be extremely careful Adjustments should be performed only by trained service personnel Power is still applied to this instrument with the LINE switch in STANDBY There is no OFF position on the LINE switch Before removing or installing any assembly or printed circuit board remove the power cord from the rear of both instruments and
215. nal do the following to determine whether or not it exceeds the specification a Press b Press MARKER and place the marker on the peak of the response in question c Press MARKER MKR CF then activate SWEEP CONT d Reduce Frequency span to 1 MHz or less The amplitude of the response should be 105 dBm below the display line e Press RECALL to resume the search for residuals Step CENTER FREQUENCY to 1510 MHz with ff checking for residual responses at each step by the procedure of steps 9 and 10 There should be no residual responses at or above the display line below 1500 MHz Maximum Residual Response dBm MHz 15 Spurious Responses Test Related Adjustment Specification Description 15 Spurious Responses Test Second Converter Adjustments For total signal power of lt 40 dBm at the input mixer of the analyzer all image and out of band mixing responses harmonic and intermodulation distortion products are gt 75 dB below the total signal power for input signals 10 Mhz to 1500 MHz gt 70 dB below the total signal power for input signals 100 Hz to 10 MHz Second Harmonic Distortion For a signal 30 dBm at the mixer and gt 10 MHz second harmonic distortion is gt 70 dB down 60 dB down for signals lt 10 MHz Third Order Intermodulation Distortion For two signals each 30 dB at the mixer third order intermodulation products are T O I Signal Distortion
216. not using an HP 3456A DVM voltage indication should be 10 230 0 010 V de plus the indication noted in step 4 If voltage is within tolerance proceed to next step If voltage indication is incorrect go to Adjustments 18 Frequency Control Adjustments and perform YTO and VTO DAC adjustments On the HP 3456A press MATH off Key in amp FREQUENCY MHz Frequency span 1 MHz Connect DVM to 11 5 and ground lead to Al 1 cover Key in SHIFT CF step size 12 kHz CRT annotation should indicate DACS 12 Key in SHIFT MKR CF CRT annotation should indicate VTO frequency of approximately 28 75 MHz This corresponds to a VTO frequency of 57 5 MHz since the counter indication is divided by two Adjust All OFFSET A11R10 and or All GAIN A11R9 for frequency of 28 750 MHz 0 005 MHz as indicated by CRT annotation See Figure 3 79 for location of adjustment All 50MHz VOLTAGE TIJ NED OSCILLATOR R6 POS SUPPLY R17 SHAPING OFFSET R42 SHAPING ATTN RQ GAIN R10 OFFSET Figure 3 79 Location of 50 MHz VTO Adjustments 12 Note DVM indication for reference later 13 Connect DVM to 11 1 located on All cover Adjustments 3 131 20 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments VTO Hi
217. nue to key in D then Q T while adjusting A23A3Z8 for maximum amplitude and the same amplitude in both states of the Second LO 0 25 dB Check the bandpass at the 3 dB points for both the 2ND LO f and On the scalar network analyzer press Max Press cursor A ON and set the cursor at the 3 dB point fO 1 dB Press cursor A cursor A and set the cursor to the corresponding 3 dB point on the opposit side of the signal The cursor should now read 0 fO 1 dB On the synthesized sweeper press and place the marker on either cursor A Press 4 and place the marker on the cursor A on the opposite side of the trace On the synthesized sweeper press MKR A and read the bandpass M3 M4 shown on the ENTRY DISPLAY Press OFF See Figure 3 74 and Figure 3 75 Disconnect the detector from cable 80 gray black and connect cable 92 white red from A23A3J5 2ND IF to the scalar network analyzer s A input Adjustments 3 127 19 Second Converter Adjustments 48 Disconnect cable connected to A23A3J2 and connect to A23A3J1 1ST IF IN Reconnect semi rigid cable to A23A3J2 that was disconnected in step 36 49 Set the synthesized sweeper s for 2052 5 MHz 0 1 MHz Adjust to center the bandpass signal 50 Adjust A23A3 Z1 Z2 Z3 and L2 for best bandpass shape and flatness at maximum amplitude of signal displayed on Scalar network analyzer A typical properly adjusted bandpass filter response is shown in Figure 3 76
218. o 500 GHz Maximum dBm Minimum dBm 100 kHz to 20 MHz 17 Set the frequency synthesizer controls as follows FREQUENCY eek xti er DH he Dr hn debe eer ds 20 MHz SWEEP WIDTH 325629 009p aun d e aed ve aues es 19 9 MHz teach i EA 2 dBm Option 001 4dBm 18 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 13 The output of the frequency synthesizer should be connected to SIGNAL INPUT 1 Option 001 Use HP 11852 Minimum Loss Pad and adapters SPECTRUM ANALYZER ooo ooo an DEN OOO OBB Dum BBBB sopo0n D s FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER OUTPUT L ADAPTER OPTION 004 ADD 50 OHMS 78 OHMS PAD AND ADAPTERS Figure 2 13 Frequency Response Test Setup 100 kHz to 20 MHz 19 Press INSTR PRESET on the spectrum analyzer Activate SIGNAL INPUT 1 with the pushbutton 20 Key in the following spectrum analyzer settings Performance Tests 2 25 8 Frequency Response Test Da aces es 20 MHz 1 MHz ww NCMO THEOD 100 kHz 21 Set frequency synthesizer AMPTD INCR to 1 0 dBm Using the step keys set frequency synthesizer output to place peak of 20 MHz signal at spectrum analyzer reference level top graticule 22 Press LOG 1 dB on spectrum analyzer Set frequency synthesizer AMPTD INCR to 0 1 dBm Position the peak of the signal 2 divisions below the reference level line 23
219. o shift Second LO down Continue to shift Second LO up and down while adjusting A23A3 2ND LO SHIFT A23A3Z10 for a frequency difference of 5 0 MHz fO MHz Ignore the absolute value of either frequency Clockwise rotation of A23A3Z10 decreases the frequency difference Key in SHIFT J T Second LO shifted down Adjust A23A3 2ND LO FREQ A23A3Z9 for frequency counter indication of 1748 6 MHz fO 1 MHz Repeat steps 13 through 16 until specifications of steps 14 and 16 are achieved Disconnect frequency counter and connect power meter to the amplifier s output Shift Second LO up and down using V and SHIFT I T while adjusting A23A3 PILOT 2ND MIXER A23A3Z8 for equal power out in both states of Second LO Power difference between Second LO shifted up and shifted down should be less than 0 5 dB Disconnect amplifier s input from A23A3J4 and connect to A23A3J3 Shift Second LO up and down using SHIFT J and T while adjusting A23A3 2ND MIXER A23A3Z4 for equal power out in both states of the Second LO Power differences between Second LO shifted up and shifted down should be less than 0 5 dB Disconnect power meter and connect frequency counter to amplifier s output Key in I T Note frequency counter indication If necessary readjust A23A3 2ND LO FREQ A23A3Z9 for frequency counter indication of 1748 6 fO MHz Shift Second LO up and down using V and T and note frequency difference betwe
220. of this manual If the test equipment recommended is not available substitutions may be used if they meet the Critical Specifications listed in the table The test setup used for an adjustment procedure is referenced in each procedure For adjustments requiring a non metallic tuning tool use fiber tuning tool HP Part Number 8710 0033 In situations not requiring non metallic tuning tools an ordinary small screwdriver or other suitable tool is sufficient However it is recommended that you use a non metallic adjustment tool whenever possible Never try to force any adjustment control in the analyzer This is especially critical when tuning variable slug tuned inductors and variable capacitors Table 3 1 Adjustment Cross Reference Function Adjusted Adjustment Procedure Low Voltage 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments High Voltage 2 High Voltage Adjustment CRT Display Standard 3 Preliminary Display Adjustment 4 Final Display Adjustments CRT Display Digital Storage 25 Digital Storage Display Adjustments IF Gains 5 Log Amplifier Adjustments 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments Log Scales 6 Video Processor Adjustments Bandwidth Amplitudes 7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 11 Down Up Converter Adjustments 3 dB Bandwidth 9 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments 10 MHz Internal Time Base 12 Time Base Adjustments CAL OUTPUT Level 13 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Phase
221. of the display 15 Adjust A1A2R437 R L FOC for best focus at the right and left sides of the display 16 If the top and bottom or right and left sides of the display achieve best focus at different potentiometer settings adjust A1A2R427 T B CTR or A1A2RA440 R L CTR and then readjust A1A2R426 T B FOC or A1A2R437 R L FOC to optimize overall focus Adjustments 3 63 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 3 64 Adjustments 17 Adjust A1A2R512 ORTHO and the front panel ALIGN control to optimize the orientation and appearance of the rectangular graticule pattern on the CRT display 18 Repeat steps 13 through 17 as needed to optimize overall display focus and appearance 5 Log Amplifier Adjustments Reference Related Performance Tests Note Description Equipment Procedure 5 Log Amplifier Adjustments IF Display Section Log Amplifier Filter A4A2 Log Amplifier Detector Scale Fidelity Test The A4A3 Log Amplifier Filter and A4A2 Log Amplifier Detector are temperature compensated as a matched set at the factory In the event of a circuit failure a new matched set must be ordered Contact your nearest HP Service Center First the A4A2 Log Amplifier Detector ZERO adjustment is checked and adjusted if necessary then the A4A3 Log Amplifier Filter is set for center frequency by injecting a signal and adjusting the bandpass filter center adjustment for maximum DVM indication The b
222. of the tests require access to the interior of the instrument The manual Performance Tests provided in this section should be performed only if semi automatic test equipment for Operation Verification is not available or the Performance Test is not in the Operation Verification Program Refer to the Installation and Verification Manual for information on Operation Verification When a complete verification of specifications is required proceed as follows 1 Run the Operation Verification Program 2 The Operation Verification Program verifies compliance with specifications of all tests it performs The tests not performed by the Operation Verification Program must be done manually and are as follows Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Spurious Responses m Fast Sweep Time Accuracy lst LO Output Amplitude Responses m Frequency Reference Error If the results of a performance test are marginally within specification go to the Adjustments section of this manual and perform the related adjustment procedures When an adjustment is directly related to a performance test the adjustment procedure is referenced under RELATED ADJUSTMENT in the performance test This instrument requires periodic verification of performance The instrument should have a complete verification of specifications at least every six months Performance Tests 2 1 Equipment required for the manual performance tests and adjustments is listed in Table
223. ol Assembly Replace the A3 Section cover and cables 35 Reconnect the black connector with three wires 8 98 and 96 to 1 2 5 and set A1A2R319 INT GAIN approximately two thirds clockwise 36 Perform Adjustment Procedure 4 Final Display Adjustment SN 3004A and Above 3 58 Adjustments 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below Reference Description Note Procedure Note 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below A1A1 Keyboard A1A2 Z Axis Amplifier 1 4 X Deflection Amplifier 1 5 Y Deflection Amplifier This procedure is used to optimize the appearance of the CRT display during routine maintenance or after CRT replacement or minor repairs First the display is adjusted for best focus over the full CRT then the graticule pattern is adjusted for optimum rectangular display Adjustment Procedure 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below should be performed prior to performing the following adjustment procedure 1 With the spectrum analyzer LINE switch set to STANDBY set the potentiometers listed in Table 3 5 as indicated See Figure 3 30 for the location of the adjustments In this procedure do not adjust the following potentiometers and precision variable capacitors on the A1A2 Z Axis Amplifier 1 4 X Axis Amplifier or 1 5 Y Axis Amplifier Assemblies ALA2R36 INT LIMIT A1A2R22 HF GAIN A1A2C10 A1A4R28 HF GAIN A1A4C10 ALA4C11 1 5628 HF GAIN A1A5C10
224. ole 1 A4A4C39 SYM 8 Adjusts A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole 2 symmetry A4A4C41 LC DIP 8 Dips A4A4 bandwidth filter LC pole 1 A4A4C43 LC DIP 8 Dips A4A4 bandwidth filter LC pole 2 A4A4C65 SYM 8 Adjusts A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole 3 symmetry A4A4C67 LC CTR 8 Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter LC pole 2 A4A4C73 CTR 8 Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole 3 A4A4C74 CTR 8 Centers A4A4 bandwidth filter crystal pole 2 A4A4R43 LC 8 Adjusts LC filter amplitudes A4A4R49 XTAL 8 Adjusts crystal filter amplitudes A4A5C10 FREQ ZERO 10 Coarse adjusts 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator to set COARSE adjustment range of front panel FREQ ZERO control A4A5R2 10V ADJ 10 Adjusts 10V temperature compensation supply A4A5R32 SG10 10 Adjusts 10 dB step gain A4A5R33 CAL 10 Adjusts IF gain A4A5R44 8620 1 10 Adjusts first 20 dB step gain A4A5R51 VR 10 Adjusts variable step gain A4A5R54 5620 2 10 Adjusts second 20 dB step gain A4A6A1C31 18 4 MHz NULL 10 Nulls 18 4 MHz local oscillator signal A4A6A1R29 WIDE GAIN 11 Adjusts gain of down up converter A4A7C6 SYM 7 Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 1 symmetry 7 Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 1 A4A7C18 PK 7 Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 2 A4A7C14 SYM 7 Adjusts 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 2 symmetry A4A7C15 CTR 7 Centers 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 2 A4A7C22 PK 7 Peaks 3 MHz bandwidth filter pole 3 A4A7C23 SYM 7 Adjusts 3 MHz ban
225. oltage Adjustments Location of A1A3 Label and Test Point Discharging the CRT Post Accelerator Cable Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup Location of 1 2 A1A4 A1A5 A3A2 A1A2 1 4 A1A5 Adjustment Locations X and X Waveforms Composite X Deflection Waveform Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment Waveform Signals uL Bi Gee ode is y Re Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup Location of A1A2 and 2 A1A2 Adjustment Locations 2 2 X and X Waveforms Composite X Deflection Waveform Rise and Fall Times and Overshoot Adjustment Waveform 0 000088 DOV S So SIR but gc eek Location of Final Display Adjustments on A1A2 A144 and AlAb g uu uo aca des Final Display Adjustments Setup Log Amplifier Adjustments Setup Location of Log Amplifier Adjustments Video Processor Adjustments Setup Location of Video Processor Adjustments 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup Location of Center Symmetry and 10 Hz Amplitude Adjustments len Location of 3 MHz Peak Adjustments 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Setup Location of A4A4 21 4 MHz LC Filter Adjustments Location of
226. olution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Related Adjustment Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments Specification 20 3 MHz bandwidth 10 1 MHz to 1 kHz bandwidths 0 50 300 Hz to 10 Hz 6 dB bandwidths Description A frequency synthesizer and pulse function generator are used to input pulses to the spectrum analyzer The amplitude of the pulses is measured and the impulse bandwidths are calculated for each impulse bandwidth from 3 MHz to 1 kHz The 6 dB resolution bandwidths are then measured using the spectrum analyzer function The CAL OUTPUT signal is used as a stable signal source to measure the 6 dB resolution bandwidths SPECTRUM ANALYZER PULSE FUNCTION SYNTHESIZER GENERATOR LEVEL GENERATOR 50 OUTPUT SIGNAL INPUT 4 Figure 4 2 Impulse Bandwidth Test Setup Equipment Frequency Synthesizer HP 3335A Pulse Function Generator HP 8116A Procedure 1 Set the frequency synthesizer for a 15 MHz 13 dBm output Connect the output of the frequency synthesizer to the EXT INPUT of the pulse function generator 2 Set the pulse function generator controls as follows MODE uhi tete oet ertet Migs edic TRIG EXT INPUT he GS UPS bs bad PES positive going EXLINPUT LEVEL iret tt pes tie teur tas midrange OUTPUT oe Re ERI Uer RR Rei Ewe oue pulse EO isco PERIERE RU ha aes artes I OV EIE ch ath God kcal a Beagles Paste 0
227. om cover removed Set LINE switch to ON and press INST preset on HP 8568B HP 8566A B HP 8757A and HP 8340A B Connect 20 dB Attenuator and power splitter to RF OUTPUT of synthesized sweeper Connect one arm of power splitter to R input of scalar network analyzer through Detector See Figure 3 63 Set synthesized sweeper FREQUENCY MARKERS to 291 4 MHz and M2 to 311 4 MHz Press 301 4 MHz on synthesized sweeper Connect Power meter to other power splitter port and set synthesized sweeper power LEveL for Power Meter indication of 20 0 0 1 dBm Disconnect Power Meter and connect power splitter output to A19J1 using adapter and a BNC to SMB test cable Refer to Figure 3 64 Connect A19J2 to A input of scalar network analyzer using adapter and another BNC to SMB test cable Connect synthesized sweeper SWEEP OUTPUT rear panel Z AXIS BLANK MKRS rear panel and PULSE MODULATION INPUT to proper rear panel connectors on scalar network Analyzer as shown in Figure 3 63 On the scalar network analyzer turn Channel 2 off and press AR Set scalar network analyzer SCALE to 1 dB and set RF LEVEL to 14 dB Set REF POSN press REF POSN to the fourth division from bottom using the data knob On synthesized sweeper press PULSE ON MKR SWEEP and AF Set SWEEP TIME to 500 ms Adjust A19 301 4 MHz Bandpass Filter A19C9 through C12 for the best bandpass filter response with a gain of
228. on Adjustments 3 69 6 Video Processor Adjustments 3 70 Adjustments 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 Set step attenuator to 120 dB DVM indication should be 0 000 0 0005 V dc If DVM indication is out of tolerance adjust A4A2R79 ZERO on the log amplifier detector board Set step attenuator to 0 dB Key in and adjust DATA knob for DVM indication as close to 1 000 0 001 V dc as possible It may be necessary to slightly adjust the front panel AMPTD CAL control to achieve required tolerance Connect DVM to A4AITP2 Adjust A4A1R14 OS for a DVM indication of 0 000 0 008 Vdc See Figure 3 36 for the location of the adjustment A4A1VideoProcessor Bii Figure 3 36 Location of Video Processor Adjustments Connect the DVM to A4A1TP3 Set the step attenuator to 120 dB Adjust A4A1R32 ZERO for a DVM indication of 0 000 0 001 Vdc Set the step attenuator to 0 dB Adjust A4A1R36 FS for DVM indication of 2 000 0 001 V dc Repeat steps 12 through 15 until specifications of steps 13 and 15 are met LOG Offset Adjust 17 18 19 20 21 Set step attenuator to 40 dB Key in SHIFT ATTEN LOG enter dB DIV SHIFT ENTER dB DIV REFERENCE LeveL 50 dBm Connect DVM to A4A1TP1 Record DVM indication Indication
229. on as noted in step 12 See note below Adjust A22R91 slightly then key in SHIFT RES BW and note new SWEEP GEN measured sweep time as indicated by CRT annotation Repeat this process until the 20 ms sweep time is set to the value calculated in this step Adjusting A22R91 CW increases the sweeptime If the difference between the measured 20 ms sweep time and the target sweep time is less than approximately 0 3 ms adjust A22R91 for the target sweeptime Adjusting A22R91 to 3 times the difference noted in step 12 is only needed if the difference noted in step 12 is greater than 0 3 ms 14 Repeat the adjustments in step 8 through step 13 until the measured sweep time at 20 ms is 20 ms plus the Start Up Time measured in step 11 0 1 ms and the measured sweep time at 1 S is 1 00 s plus the start up time measured in step 8 50 01 s 15 Key in CF sze MHz The CRT annotation should indicate DACS 0 16 Connect DVM to A22TP6 and ground to A22TP12 If using an HP 3456A DVM press STORE 7 7 ENTER EXP 5 9 Y then MATH x z v If not using an HP 3456A DVM note voltage indication for reference later 17 Key in J 1023 MHz CRT annotation may still indicate DACS 1023 18 Adjust A22 YTO A22R25 for DVM indication of 10 230 0 001 V dc If not using an HP 3456A DVM adjust for specified voltage plus the DVM indication noted in step 16 See Figure 3 71 for location of adjustment 19 On the HP 3
230. onverter This allows the comb teeth from the A23A6 Comb Generator to be displayed on the CRT display The phase lock flags are disabled using a shift key function to prevent the instrument from locking up due to the phase lock loops being open A display line is placed on the CRT at the level to which the comb teeth are to be adjusted the comb teeth are adjusted for best overall flatness and to the proper amplitude R31COMB DRIVE A23A4A2 RF CONVERTER BIAS A23A6 A16 20MHz COMB GENIRATOR REFERENCE l O OOO OO A6C7 HF PEAK A6L2 COMB A4A2R6 COMB BIAS E _ Figure 3 83 Location of Comb Generator Adjustments 3 136 Adjustments 22 Comb Generator Adjustments Equipment Cable SMA m to SMA HP 85680 20094 Procedure 1 3 nN ON 10 12 Set instrument LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 Key in CENTER Frequency 20 MHz Frequency span 100 kHz 0 dB LOG enter dB DIV 2 dB Adjust front panel AMPTD CAL for signal peak at top graticule line 10 dBm Press NSTRPRESET Key in V This disables phase lock flags Position instrument on right side and remove bottom cover Disconnect cables from A23A5J2 PILOT IF OUT and A23A3J1 1ST IF IN and connect a short low lo
231. ooo 90000 5 O 0000 OUTPUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER Figure 3 23 Preliminary Display Adjustments Setup Remove the cover over A3 Digital Storage Section and remove A3A2 Intensity Control Assembly Insert the Display Adjustment PC board HP part number 85662 60088 into the A3A2 slot See Figure 3 24 for the location of the A3A2 assembly Adjustments 3 53 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above A1A2 ol 1 BRE GERI ASAZ ASAI Figure 3 24 Location of 1 2 and A3A2 TP501 R127 R120 C109 TP105 R227 C204 R220 R217 J5 GND C307 TP106 C104 R117 TP104 GND 204 205 C209 R319 R308 TP301 J ot OQ jp P Bonne trn bi Figure 3 25 A1A2 Adjustment Locations 10 Set the Pulse Function Generator controls as follows MODE 3 2 shore Mte RENS ate Ge a ae ae E NORM Wavetorle is lt Alice bte eite s eru pulse Frequency FRQ eee eee eee ees 200 kHz Wadth WID catch Sh ei pede ee be BE PEW 250 ns Amplitude
232. or A1A5C11 These components are adjusted in Adjustment Procedure 2 High Voltage Adjustments SN 3001A and Below and Adjustment Procedure 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below Table 3 5 Initial Adjustment Positions Front panel INTENSITY fully clockwise Front panel FOCUS centered Front panel ALIGN centered A1A2R5 INT GAIN fully clockwise 2 Set the LINE switch to ON and wait at least 5 minutes to allow the CRT and high voltage circuits to warm up The spectrum analyzer power up annotation should be visible on the CRT display 3 For an initial coarse focus adjustment adjust ALA3RI5 FOCUS LIMIT A1A2R36 ASTIG and A1A2R30 FOCUS GAIN in sequence for best displayed results 4 Adjust ALA4R7 X POSN A1A4R27 X GAIN A1A5R7 Y POSN 1 5 27 Y GAIN for optimum centering of the display annotation and graticule pattern Adjustments 3 59 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below 3 60 Adjustments 5 For best overall focusing of the display adjust the following potentiometers in the sequence listed below a ALA3R14 FOCUS LIMIT for best focus of graticule lines long vectors b A1A2R36 ASTIG c AIA2R30 FOCUS GAIN for best focus of annotation short vectors 6 Adjust ATA2R31 ORTHO the front panel ALIGN control and A1A2R32 PATT to optimize the orientation and appearance of the rectangular graticule pattern on the CRT display 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 as needed to optimize overa
233. or each sideband should be lt 75 dB 400 Hz dB 800 Hz dB 1200 Hz dB Performance Tests 2 61 ms 18 Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Related Adjustment 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Specification 10 dBm 0 3 dB Description The output level of the calibrator signal is measured with a power meter SPECTRUM ANALYZER B EET 5888 BSE tud SENSOR Figure 2 32 Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup Equipment Power Meter e bal die eal ating hi BR ed sua HP 436A Power SenSOrF erbe ROREM DE EPREEDUE AS ES HP 8482A Adapter Type N f to BNC m HP 1250 0077 Procedure 1 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 32 2 Measure output level of the CAL OUTPUT signal The value should be 10 0 dBm 0 3 dB dBm 2 62 Performance Tests 19 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test lt 20 ms E _ 19 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test lt 20 ms Related Adjustment None Specification 10 for sweep times lt 100 seconds Description The triangular wave output of a function generator is used to modulate a 500 MHz signal which is applied to the spectrum analyzer SIGNAL INPUT The signal is demodulated in the zero span mode to display the triangular waveform Sweep time accuracy for sweep times 20 ms is tested by checking the spacing of the signal peaks on the displayed wavefor
234. or maximum frequency accuracy 18 On the synthesized sweeper press MKR A M3 4 should read between 7 and 14 MHz 19 On the synthesized sweeper press MKR A OFF and OFF 20 Set the synthesized sweeper FREQUENCY MARKERS to 251 4 MHz and to 351 4 MHz 21 Set the Scalar Network Analyzer SCALE to 10 dB and set REF LEVEL to 14 dB Set the REF POSN to one division down from the top 22 Adjust A19C12 for minimum amplitude response at 258 4 MHz Refer to Figure 3 64 for the location of the bandpass adjustments Refer to Figure 3 66 for the typical response when the bandpass filter is properly adjusted 280 MHz Figure 3 66 Minimum Image Response at 258 4 MHz 23 Repeat the adjustments in steps 13 and 22 to assure that the bandpass is between 7 MHz and 14 MHz and the image response at 258 4 MHz is minimized Remember to use the appropriate set up for steps 13 and 20 24 Disconnect the cables from A19J1 and A19J2 and reconnect the instrument cables 25 Disconnect cable 83 gray orange from A20J3 and connect A20J3 to the input of HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer using a BNC to SMB test cable 26 Press INSTR preset on the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer then key in cENTER FREQUENCY 280 MHz Frequency sPAN 2 MHz Set MARKER NORMAL REFERENCE LEVEL 2 dBm and Jenter dB DIV 1 dB 27 Adjust A20 AMPTD 2011 for maximum signal level a
235. ormance Tests 2 85 Test 15 Spurious Responses Test 2 86 Performance Tests Description Min Measured Second Harmonic Third Harmonic Third Order Intermodulation Distortion 30 MHz input signals 1 MHz separation Third Order Intermodulation Distortion 30 MHz input signals 1 MHz separation Third Order Intermodulation Distortion 30 MHz input signals 10 kHz separation Third Order Intermodulation Distortion 30 MHz input signals 10 kHz separation Second Order Intermodulation Distortion 30 MHz input signals f2 f1 Second Order Intermodulation Distortion 30 MHz input signals f f2 Test 16 Residual FM Test Test 16 Residual FM T Step 14 Residual Min Measured Max cd ct Performance Tests 2 87 Test 17 Line Related Sidebands Test Min Measured 120 Hz 100 Hz 180 Hz 150 Hz 240 Hz 200 Hz 7 Option 400 400 Hz 800 Hz 1200 Hz 2 88 Performance Tests Test 18 Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Test 18 Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Step 2 CAL OUTPUT Amplitude EET 9 70 dBm Performance Tests 2 89 Test 19 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test lt 20 ms Step 11 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy lt 20 ms Function Generator Frequency Sweep Time Error divisions 2 00 0 02 5 00 0 05 10 0 0 1 50 0 0 5 100 1 2 90 Performance Tests Test 20 1st LO Output Amplitude Test
236. ote The pulse function generators output must be terminated with 50 ohms Use a BNC tee a 500 termination and a BNC female to SMB female adapter Install the 500 termination as close to the Display Adjustment PC Board as possible 26 Set the pulse function generator s controls as follows MODE e us St Rueda aves conie po NORM MavefoEm A ooo eR er tetrum te CECI Ded edt pulse Frequency FRQ 0 ccc cece eene 200 kHz Width WID re E ee us 250 ns Amplitude AMP l s cece eee a eee eens 4 00V Offset ORS e a neret nied Soul AAA ete e cele Olek canes 2 00V 27 Set the spectrum analyzer s front panel INTENSITY control fully clockwise Note the display on the oscilloscope The pulse should be gt 55V peak to peak 3 50 Adjustments 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press CHAN Channel 1 E RERUM ERE RAE on amplitude 6 25 Press SHOW Adjust ALA4R7 X POS and A1ASR7 Y POS to either extreme to position the CRT beam off screen to prevent possible damage to the CRT phosphor If it is not sealed adjust ALA2R5 INT GAIN fully clockwise Adjust the spectrum analyzer s front panel INTENSITY control for 50V peak to peak 8 divisions as indicated on the oscilloscope See Figure 3 22 running 8 00 V div
237. output of Time Base A27J1 using cable 2 red Note power meter indication for reference later dBm Reconnect A27 Time Base output to 1641 Jumper A16TP4 to Ground Set the HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer to cENTER FREQUENCY 20 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN 1 MHz REFERENCE evel 20 dBm and 100 kHz Connect A16J3 to RF INPUT of HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer and set REFERENCE LEVEL to place of signal at reference line top graticule line Set HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer to 1 dB division SCALE and reset reference level to place peak of signal at reference line Connect DVM to 16 and ground to A22 TP12 Adjust A16 COMB DRIVE A16R31 for DVM indication of gt 0 1 V dc Disconnect DVM If DVM remains connected it may load circuit See Figure 3 57 for location of adjustment UL e ul a gt at N af LJ x tr gt a a z a E m e REFERENCE 5 x m ul A16 20MHz 2 e a x e 2 D Figure 3 57 Location of 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Adjust A16 DOUBLER 16 to lower signal peak approximately 3 dB Adjust A16 CENTER FREQ A16C11 to peak signal on HP 8566A B Spectrum Analyzer display Next adjust A16 DOUBLER 16 1 for signal peak Disconnect cable 2 red from A16J1 and connect 500 OUTPUT of frequency synthesizer to A16J1 Set FREQUENCY of frequency synthesizer to 10 17 MHz
238. owable MKR A Deviation Readout dB Option 462 4 23 9 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Adjustments Reference IF Display Section A4AQ9 IF Control Related Performance dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Test Description CAL OUTPUT signal is connected to the RF INPUT Each of the adjustable resolution bandwidths is selected and adjusted for the proper bandwidth Equipment No Procedure 4 24 Option 462 test equipment is required for this adjustment Position the instrument upright and remove the top cover Set the LINE switch to On press INSTR preset and select SIGNAL INPUT 1 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 1 Key in center Frequency 100 MHz EREGuENCY span 5 MHz 3 MHz and UN Press REFERENCE LeveL and adjust the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top CRT graticule The signal should be centered about the center line on the graticule Press PEAK sEARcH MKR CF and MARKER al Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one side of the display signal to the 6 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 500 x Adjust A4A9R60 3 MHz for MKR In indication of 1 5 MHz while maintaining the marker at 500 X using the DATA knob Refer to Figure 4 7 for the adjustment location Press MARKER A Adjust the marker to the 6 dB point on the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X There are now two markers one on each side o
239. ows a properly adjusted waveform Figure 3 92 shows the waveform before adjustment Refer to Figure 3 90 for location of adjustment m running 50 0 nv div ioffset 0 000 V 10 00 1 de 2 90000 us 400 000 ns ETT 500 ns div 4 F 300 5 mv Figure 3 91 Sample and Hold Balance Adjustment W aveforms Ap running 4 50 0 nV div joffset 0 000 v 100 1 de 2 90000 us 400 000 ns 7 5 2 10000 us 500 ns div 4 f 300 5 Figure 3 92 W aveform Before Adjustment Adjustments 3 147 25 Digital Storage Display Adjustments X and Y Offset and Gain Adjustments 3 148 Adjustments 20 21 22 23 24 26 21 28 29 30 3l 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Connect oscilloscope to A3A3TP7 Adjust A3AZR51 Y S amp H BAL for minimum dc offset between the level of the signal inside the two pulses to the signal level outside the two pulses Set LINE switch to STANDBY Reinstall A3A3 Line Generator in instrument without extender boards Set LINE switch to ON Press INSTR PRESET Key in FREqueNcy span Hz sweep time 100 ys Disconnect cable 9 white from 9 2 and connect to A3A2J2 LG FS test connector on A3A2 Intensity Control the other end of the cable remains connect connected to A3A2JI Select TRIGGER VIDEO and adjust front panel LEVEL control for a stable display on instrument CRT Adjust A3AIR34 SWP OFFSET so that the signal trace begin
240. p of the graticule 12 Press MARKER then MARKER al Option 462 4 27 9 Impulse Bandwidth Adjustments 4 28 Option 462 13 Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one side of the display signal to the 7 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0 430 X A4A9 IF CONTROL R66 3kHz R65 10kHz R62 300kHz R61 1MHz R60 3MHz Figure 4 8 Location of Bandwidth Adjustments 14 Adjust A4A9R61 1 MHz for MKR A indication of 500 kHz while maintaining the marker at 0 430 X using the DATA knob Refer to Figure 4 8 for the adjustment location 15 Press MARKER A Adjust marker to the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicate 1 00 X There are now two markers one on each of the signal at the 7 3 dB point 16 The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 1 MHz bandwidth The impulse bandwidth should be 1 00 MHz 0 10 MHz 17 Key in RES BW 300 KHz rREauENcv span 500 kHz PEAK search and MKR CF If necessary readjust by pressing REFERENCE LEVEL and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak at the top of the graticule 8 Press MARKER then MARKER 4 19 Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one the displayed signal to the 7 3 dB
241. p on cable Set the oscilloscope following settings Channel 1 amplitude ecce eee eae ewe Se 0 005 V div uic e 0 2 us div ILI OR UCET 5 vertical COUPLING hee e OPER ac PrOD ape uitae eI 10 1 Channel 2 amplitude a eee eee eee 0 005V div Coupling oe d ac PROWESS anti essc Ieee toa AEN bad 10 1 Connect oscilloscope Channel 1 probe to A4A7TP7 left side of C14 SYM and Channel B probe to A4A7TPS left side of C23 SYM Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak Channel 1 display 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Adjust A4A7C13 PK for maximum peak to peak signal on Channel 2 display See Figure 3 39 for location of adjustment If unable to achieve a peak in signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A7C12 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values A4A7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter C40 PK C39 R60 C31 PK C30 C22 PK C21 C13 C12 c Io pie btn A4A7 Figure 3 39 Location of 3 MHz Peak Adjustments Move Channel 2 probe to A4A7TP3 left side of C32 SYM Adjust frequency synthesizer output frequency to peak Channel 1 display Adjust A4A7C22 PK for maximum peak to peak signal on Channel 2 display See Fi
242. p time measured in step 8 uses the SHIFT RES BW function that displays a sweep time value which is 1 to 5 longer than the actual spectrum analyzer sweeptime This error is compensated when using the shift F function to adjust the sweep times in the following procedure 9 Key in Marker then SINGLE 10 Key in SHIFT RES BW three times and note the CRT annotation The annotation should indicate SWEEP GEN measured sweep time of 1 OO s start up time from step 8 0 01 s To adjust sweep time adjust A22R88 SLOW slightly then key in F and note new SWEEP GEN measured sweep time as indicated by CRT annotation Repeat this process until the 1 S sweep time is within Spec Adjusting A22R88 CW decreases the sweeptime Full Sweep Adjustment Note YTO and VTO DAC Adjustments 18 Frequency Control Adjustments 11 Repeat Start Up Time Measurement procedure in step 8 and step 9 for sweep time of 20 ms Note value of measurement 20 ms start up time 12 Key in Shift RES BW three times and note the CRT annotation The annotation should indicate SWEEP GEN measured sweeptime of 20 ms start up time noted in step 11 0 1 ms If it is not in spec determine the difference between this measured sweep time and the target sweep time of 20 ms start up time noted in step 11 measured sweep time 20 00 ms start up time 13 Adjust A22R91 FAST for three times the difference and in the opposite directi
243. pe display as shown in Figure 3 26 If necessary adjust A1A2R227 X POSN and A1A2R220 X GAIN for a centered display of at least four vertical divisions See Figure 3 25 for the location of the adjustments 5p running 10 0 V div fset 25 00 V 10 00 1 dc 10 0 V div ioffset 60 00 v 2000 1 de 50 0 ns div 1 f 2500 v Figure 3 26 X and X Waveforms 15 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press WFORM MATH Ll ETEA I A I PORTU PLU QU ETSI RR 0n 8 PARE EPUM ERU e ete TES on Math ik e PRESE Rd channel 1 channel 4 SENSITIVITY oriire riia b ARR UR RR RR nen 25 0 V div 16 Three waveforms should be displayed on the oscilloscope as shown in Figure 3 27 The lower composite waveform represents Adjustments 3 55 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above the combined X deflection voltage applied to the CRT Use the oscilloscope s front panel knob to adjust waveform fl sensitivity for approximately 8 vertical divisions fp running 20 0 V div 20 0 V div offset 60 00 V Pss f1 1 4 25 0 V div toffset 35 00 V 125 000 ns 125 000 ns 375 000 ns 50 0 ns div 1 f 200 Figure 3 27 Composite X Deflection Waveform 17 Adjust ALA2R217 HF GAIN A1A2C204 and A1A2C209 for minimum overshoot and minimum rise and fall times of the composite X deflection waveform offset 25 00 V00 V V Note Always adjust A1A2C204 and A
244. play Adjustments SN 3001A and Below 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3004A and Above 5 Log Amplifier Adjustments 6 Video Processor Adjustments 7 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 9 3 dB Bandwidth Adjustments 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments ix a Sofa 30 ness eR ae 11 Down Up Converter Adjustments 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2840A and Below also 32 17A05568 and Above 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2848A to 3217A05567 13 20 MHz Reference Adjustments 14 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments 15 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustment 16 Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment 17 Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments 18 Frequency Control Adjustments 19 Second Converter Adjustments 20 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments 2 1 Slope Compensation Adjustments 22 Comb Generator Adjustments 23 Analog To Digital Converter Adjustments 24 Track and Hold Adjustments 25 Digital Storage Display Adjustments Low Noise DC 2 82 2 83 2 84 2 85 2 86 2 87 2 88 2 89 2 90 2 91 2 92 3 95 3 99 3 103 3 107 3 110 Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration 3 151 4 Option 462 Introduction lll 4 1
245. plitude readout should be OO dB 0 05 dB The 3 dB bandwidth is given by the MARKER A frequency readout see Figure 2 6 Record this value in Table 2 8 Performance Tests 2 13 4 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test hp PEF 11 7 dBm ATTEN 10 dB CENTER 20 00 Miz SPAN 5 00 MHz PED BW msec Figure 2 6 Resolution Bandwidth Measurement 8 Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to Table 2 8 Measure the 3 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 6 and 7 and record the value in Table 2 8 The measured bandwidth should fall between the limits shown in the table Table 2 8 Bandwidth Accuracy ARKER A Readout of 3 dB Bandwidth Min Measured 5 MHz 2 400 MHz 2 14 Performance Tests 5 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test Related Adjustments Specification Description Note Equipment Procedure 5 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test For instruments with Option 462 refer to Chapter 4 3 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments 60 dB 3 dB bandwidth ratio lt 15 1 3 MHz to 100 kHz lt 13 1 30 kHz to 3 kHz 11 1 1 kHz to 30 Hz 60 dB points on 10 Hz bandwidth are separated by 100 Hz Bandwidth selectivity is found by measuring the 60 dB bandwidth and dividing this value by the 3 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting from 30 H
246. point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0 430 X 20 Adjust A4A9R62 300 kHz for MKR A indication of 150 KHz while maintaining marker at 0 430 X using the data knob Refer to Figure 4 8 for location of adjustment 21 Press MARKER A Adjust the marker to the 7 3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X 22 The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 300 kHz bandwidth The impulse bandwidth should be 300 00 2 30 00 kHz 23 Key in RES BW 10 kHz rFREoguENcy span 20 kHz PEAK sEARCH and MKR CF If necessary readjust by pressing m 24 25 26 21 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 9 Inpulse Bandwidth Adjustments REFERENCE LeveL and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top of the graticule Press MARKER oFF then MARKER al Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one side of the displayed signal to the 7 3 dB point CRT MKR annotation indicates 0 430 X Adjust A4A9R65 10 kHz for MKR A indication of 5 00 kHz while maintaining the marker at 0 430 X using the DATA knob Refer to Figure 4 8 for the adjustment location Press MARKER 4 Adjust the marker to the 7 3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X The CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 10 kHz bandwidth The impulse bandwidth should be 10 0 fl O kHz Key in RES BW 3 kHz
247. pped pum p 4 Loto i ioffset 0 000 V 10 00 1 dc 60 000 n 40 000 ns 140 000 ns 20 0 ns div 4 f 800 0 mv Figure 3 58 Typical Signal at A16TP3 Install A16 20 MHz Reference without extenders and reconnect cable 7 violet to A16J3 Connect power meter to front panel CAL OUTPUT Adjust 26 CAL LEVEL A16R51 for power meter indication of 10 0 dBm 0 2 dB the A23A6 Comb Generator must be readjusted after adjusting the 20 MHz Reference Refer to Adjustments 22 Comb Generator Adjustments for adjustment procedure 14 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments 14 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments Reference Description Equipment RF Section 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Two center frequencies are chosen one which will tune the 249 MHz Oscillator to its low end frequency and one which will tune the 249 MHz Oscillator to the high end frequency The voltage is monitored with a DVM at the output of the oscillator and the oscillator frequency is adjusted to produce the proper dc voltage output for each frequency low end and high end Next the 500 kHz Trap is adjusted to null the 500 kHz sidebands using the sixth harmonic of the 249 MHz signal RF AMPLIFIER DIGITAL VOLTMETER SPECTRUM ANALYZER Devise Under Test a SPECTRUM ANALYZER T codamooo oonan aa o ooo oo Fg ooo oo
248. proper impulse bandwidth Equipment No test equipment is required for this adjustment Procedure 1 Position the instrument upright and remove the top cover 2 Set the LINE switch to On press INSTR PnEsET and select SIGNAL INPUT 1 3 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 1 4 Key in cENrER FREQUENCY 100 MHz erequency SPAN 5 MHz 3 MHz and 5 Press REFERENCE LeveL and adjust the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the top CRT graticule The signal should be centered about the center line on the graticule 6 Press PEAK seaRcH CF and MARKER 7 Using the DATA knob adjust the marker down one side of the display signal to the 7 3 dB point CRT MKR A annotation indicates 0 430 X 8 Adjust A4A9R60 3 MHz for In indication of 1 5 MHz while maintaining the marker at 0 430 X using the DATA knob Refer to Figure 4 8 for the adjustment location 9 Press MARKER In Adjust the marker to the 7 3 dB point on the opposite side of the signal CRT MKR A annotation indicates 1 00 X There are now two markers one on each side of the signal at the 7 3 dB point 10 CRT MKR A annotation now indicates the impulse bandwidth of the 3 MHz bandwidth Impulse bandwidth should be 3 00 MHz 0 60 MHz 11 Key in RES BW 1 MHz Frequency span 2 MHz PEAK SEARCH and MKR CF If necessary readjust by pressing REFERENCE LEvEL and using the DATA knob to place the signal peak near the to
249. quency indication should be 25 00 MHz 0 02 MHz If it is not and specifications of steps 16 18 21 and 23 are met a malfunction is indicated The most likely suspects would be varactor diodes CR15 and CR16 Key in SHIFT CF ster size 612 kHz and SHIFT MKR CF VTO frequency indication should be 24 25 MHz 0 02 MHz If it is not and specifications of steps 16 18 21 and 23 are met a malfunction is indicated The most likely suspects would be varactor diodes CR15 and CR16 Set LINE switch to STANDBY Replace All 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator in instrument without extenders and replace screws in cover 21 Slope Compensation Adjustments Reference Related Performance Test Description Equipment 2 1 Slope Compensation Adjustments RF Section A22 Frequency Control Frequency Response Test The HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer is swept between 10 MHz and 1500 MHz using a synthesized sweeper which has been power meter leveled The resulting response curve is displayed on the HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer CRT and the slope compensation TILT adjustment is performed to compensate for the frequency response roll off of the first mixer SPECTRUM ANALYZER gDU ojo 0t 0065 000 ol ooo 5000 SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER 558 e o OOOO PDWER METER c oe 0003 FREE FERE m sc O 2e 82
250. re wave should be approximately 4 See Figure 3 86 for location of adjustment 4 Procedure without using Low Noise DC Supply a Press INSTR PRESET b Key in TRACE A BLANK and SWEEP SINGLE m Disconnect cable 0 black from sweep ramp input A3A8J1 Short ASA8TP4 to 5 or connect SMB snap on short to A3A8J1 Connect DVM to A3A8TPI1 and ground to 4 Set DVM for V ac Adjust ASA8R6 OFFS until the level at ASA8TP11 is at a maximum ac voltage as indicated by the DVM approximately 2 0 V ac See Figure 3 86 for location of adjustment Remove short from A3A8TP4 and A38A8TP5 Reconnect cable 0 black to A8A8J 1 Press INSTR PRESET Connect DVM to A3A8TP5 and ground to ASA8TP4 Set DVM for V Press SWEEP SINGLE Note DVM reading at end of the sweep The voltage will begin to drift immediately after the sweep ends Therefore the first indication after the sweep ends is the valid indication It may be helpful to press several times to ensure a valid indication at the end of the sweep If DVM indication is 10 020 0 005 V dc at the end of the sweep no further adjustment is necessary Otherwise adjust 8 5 GAIN and repeat step j until the voltage at the end of the sweep is 10 020 0 005 V dc Adjustments 3 141 24 Track and Hold Adjustments Reference Description Equipment Procedure 3 142 Adjustments A
251. read the bandpass M3 M4 shown on the ENTRY DISPLAY Press OFF See Figure 3 74 and Figure 3 75 Disconnect all test equipment from HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer and reconnect all cables within the instrument cable 80 gray black between A23A3J6 and 9 and cable 92 white red between A23A3J5 and A19J1 Connect HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 Key in_ center Frequency 20 MHz FREQUENCY sPAN 1 MHz REFERENCE LEVEL 7 dBm SCALE LOG enter dB DIV 1 dB 300 kHz Key in SHIFT 0 searcu Key in SHIFT J 7 and note signal amplitude as indicated by marker level CRT annotation Continue to key in D V then SHIFT J while adjusting A23A3Z4 for maximum amplitude and the same amplitude in both states of the Second LO lt 0 1 dB Reinstall RF Converter in instrument See installation procedure in RF Section of Troubleshooting and Repair Manual Volume 1 Adjustments 3 129 20 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments Reference Related Performance Test Description Equipment Procedure 3 130 Adjustments RF Section All 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator VTO Frequency Span Accuracy Test Center Frequency Readout Accuracy Test First the voltage reference for the Shaping network is set by measuring the voltage required to tune the 50 MHz Oscillator to its high limit 57 5 MHz and then setting the reference voltage 15 VR to that voltage Next
252. ress SWEEP SINGLE Press MARKER NORMAL and place marker at peak of signal trace with DATA knob Press MARKER A and position movable marker 6 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive going edge of the signal trace the MARKER A amplitude readout should be 6 00 dB 0 05 dB It may be necessary to press SWEEP and adjust cENrER FREQUENCY to center trace on screen Press MARKER 4 and position movable marker 6 dB down from the signal peak on the negative going edge of the trace the MARKER Aamplitude readout should be OO dB 0 05 dB The 6 dB bandwidth is given by the MARKER A frequency readout See Figure 4 1 Record this value in Table 4 1 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test MKR 4 3 103 MHz 0 00 EE m a E NEES saaka 8 F e AT Figure 4 1 Resolution Bandwidth Measurement 9o Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to Table 4 1 Press SWEEP and measure the 6 dB bandwidth for each resolution bandwidth setting by the procedure of steps 6 and 7 and record the value in Table 4 1 The measured bandwidth should fall between the limits shown in the table Table 4 1 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth D EU MARKER A Readout of MARKER A Readout of 6 dB Bandwidth dB Bandwidth wm Max 500 kHz 200 kHz 50 kHz 20 kHz 5 kHz 2 kHz 500 Hz 200 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz Option 462 4 3 4 Impulse and Res
253. rror Freq Span ADUT ASyn i Max from Table 2 3 10 Hz 10 Hz 5000 Hz 5000 Hz PY 5 005 Hz 5 005 Hz 50 000 Hz 50 000 Hz 23 230 Hz 23 230 Hz 460 000 Hz 460 000 Hz 462 300 Hz 462 300 Hz 34 500 000 Hz 34 5000 000 Hz Note The specification in Table 2 4 was derived using the following formula For spans gt 1 MHz the spec is gt 02 A synth freq 005 span For spans 1 MHz the spec is gt 05 A synth freq 005 span 2 8 Performance Tests 3 Sweep Time Accuracy Test gt 20 ms Related Adjustment Specification Description 3 Sweep Time Accuracy Test gt 20 ms Frequency Control Adjustments 10 for sweep times lt 100 seconds 20 for sweep times gt 100 seconds Preferred Procedure This test is for sweep times gt 20 ms For faster sweep times refer to Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test Test 19 A universal counter is connected to the PENLIFT RECORDER OUTPUT on the rear panel of the spectrum analyzer The counter is used in time interval mode to determine the pen down sweep time interval of the PENLIFT RECORDER OUTPUT The penlift output voltage level corresponds directly to the sweeping of the analyzer pen down OV and not sweeping of the analyzer pen up 15V A DVM is used to set the appropriate trigger level for the counter Alternate Procedure Perform this procedure if the equipment for the preferred procedure is unavailable Swe
254. s 9 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments 3 10 Down Up Converter Adjustments 3 10 Time Base Adjustment SN 2840A and Below 3 10 Time Base Adjustment SN 2848A and Above 3 10 20 MHz Reference Adjustments 3 10 249 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments 3 10 275 MHz Phase Lock Oscillator Adjustments 3 10 Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustments 3 10 Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments 3 10 Frequency Control Adjustments 3 10 Second Converter Adjustments 3 10 50 MHz Voltage Tuned Oscillator Adjustments 3 10 Slope Compensation Adjustment 3 10 Comb Generator Adjustments 8 10 Down Up Converter Adjustments 9 10 Track and Hold Adjustments 3 10 Digital Storage Display Adjustments 3 10 The adjustment procedures should not be performed as routine maintenance but only when Performance Tests cannot meet specifications Before attempting any adjustment allow the instrument to warm up for one hour Table 3 1 is a cross reference of Function Adjusted to the related Adjustment procedur
255. s 16 25 42 or 48 overall max overall min SIGNAL INPUT 2 deviation in dB 100 kHz to 1 5 GHz steps 12 or 31 overall max overall min 2 dB 2 dB 50 SIGNAL INPUT 1 deviation in dB 100 Hz to 1 5 GHz steps 15 16 25 42 or 48 overall max overall min 3 dB Performance Tests 2 77 Test 9 RF Gain Uncertainty Test Step 6 2nd LO Shift Min Measured Max 1 0 dB ___ 1 0 4B 2 78 Performance Tests Test 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Test 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Step 12 Step IF Gain Uncertainty 10 dB Steps Frequency Deviation Synthesizer Marker A Amplitude Amplitude dBm dB 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 SHIFT ENTER dB DIV P 80 90 100 110 120 Step 18 IF Gain Uncertainty 2 dB Steps REFERENCE Levet F requency D eviation Synthesizer MARKER A Amplitude Amplitude dBm dB Performance Tests 2 79 Test 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Step 22 IF Gain Uncertainty 0 1 dB Steps ar Frequency Deviation dBm Synthesizer MKR A Amplitude Amplitude 0 ol 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 80 Performance Tests Test 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test Step 23 Recorded deviations from Step 12 A B Reference Level Range 0 to 70 dBm 80 to 120 dBm Largest Positive Deviation 1 dB dB Largest Negative Deviation 1 dB
256. s at the left edge graticule line Refer to Figure 3 90 for location of adjustment Adjust A8A3R4 X GAIN for twenty cycles displayed on the CRT graticule This may be made easier by adjusting A3A1R34 SWP OFFSET so that the first peak is centered on the left edge graticule line then adjusting A3A3R4 X GAIN for two cycles per division with the twentieth cycle being centered on the right edge graticule line A3A1R34 SWP OFFSET must then be readjusted so that the trace begins at the left edge graticule line See Figure 3 90 for location of adjustment Remove the cable 9 white from A3A2J2 LG FS test connector and reconnect to A3A9J2 Remove cable 7 violet from A4A1J1 Short ASA9TP1 to A3A9TP3 or connect an SMB snap on short to A3A9J1 Connect DVM to A3A9TP3 and DVM ground to A3A9TPI Press LIN pushbutton DVM indication should be 0 000 0 002 V dc Adjust A8A3R43 YOS to align the bottom graticule line with the fast sweep signal trace Remove the short between A3A9TP1 and 9 or the SMB snap on short and reconnect cable 7 violet to A4A1J1 Key in center Frequency 20 MHz Connect CAL OUTPUT to RF INPUT Press LOG enter dB DIV 10 dB Connect the DVM to A4A1TP3 and the DVM ground to the IF casting Press REFERENCE LeveL and adjust DATA knob and the frontpanel AMPTD CAL adjust for DVM indication of 2 000 50 002 V dc Final Graticule Adjustments X and Y Expand Adjustments 41 42 43 44 45 46
257. s indicated on spectrum analyzer display 28 Disconnect spectrum analyzer and reconnect cable 83 gray orange to A20J3 Adjustments 3 115 16 Second IF Amplifier and Third Converter Adjustment 17 Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Reference RF Section A9 Pilot Second IF Amplifier A10 Pilot Third Converter Description A synthesized sweeper is used to inject a signal of 269 MHz at 20 dBm into the A9 Pilot Second IF Amplifier The output of the amplifier is displayed on a scaler network analyzer The amplifier is adjusted for a bandpass of greater than 21 MHz centered at 269 MHz and a gain of greater than 10 dB SYNTHESIZED SWEEPER 2 AIS BLANK MKRS RF OUTPUT wee MODULATION POWER METER INPUT 20 dB ooo SPECTRUM ANALYZER ATTENUATOR Devise Under Test T SWEEP IN MODULATOR ane o 10V DRIVE POWER a POWER SENSOR ol e SPLITTER Bs j DOG LANK DETECTOR SO By 0800 o ooo INPUT DETECTOR gee 0000 cecal 000 NETWORK ANALYZER SCALAR coool FOG Figure 3 67 Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Setup Equipment Synthesized Sweeper HP 8340A B Scalar Network analyzer HP 8757A Power Splitter HP 11667A Opt 001 Power 1 Gb Nob U
258. sizer Frequency to 10 kHz On the spectrum analyzer key in _ FRequency span Hz SWEEP 0 5 seconds SWEEP SINGLE MARKER search Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Calculate the Impulse BW of the 100 kHz filter using the formula in step 8 Record in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer FREquency to 300 kHz Set the pulse function generator WID to 333 ns On the spectrum analyzer key in VIDEO RW 300 kHz CENTER Frequency 300 kHz Frequency SPAN 120 kHz SWEEP TIME AUTO SWEEP SINGLE MARKER PEAK Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer 3 kHz On the spectrum analyzer key in FREqueNcy sPAN Hz SWEEP riwE 0 5 seconds SWEEP SINGLE MARKER peak Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Calculate the Impulse BW of the 30 kHz filter using the formula in step 8 Record in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer Frequency to 100 kHz Set the pulse function generator WID to 1 ys On the spectrum analyzer key in 10 kHz i 100 kHz CENTER Frequency 100 kHz FREQUENCY SPAN 40 kHz SWEEP TIME AuTO SW EEP SINGLE MARKER Peak SEARCH Record MARKER amplitucde in Table 4 2 Set the frequency synthesizer FREQUENCY fo 1 KHz On the spectrum analyzer key in Frequency SPAN O Hz sweep 0 5 seconds SWEEP SINGLE MARKER PEAK search Record MARKER amplitude in Table 4 2 Calculate the Impulse BW
259. square wave display on the oscilloscope Connect oscilloscope with the HP 10432A probe to A16TP3 and the ground to the analyzer s chassis ground Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press CHAN A ee iet aee o Nd on amplitude div OFESEE o s USADAS taal ate ee SOOO eode ete OV COUPLING eR ett a ince UR are RR HI aces dc o c PP 10 1 Channel 2 It CDL Dion Ls off Ghannel4 vetu ele oat oe POIs off Press TRIG EDGE TRIGGER trig d auto SOUTCer 25 ocu ues Ue IY UNS Dudes atta 1 TEV Clits casts E 800 mv edge Press TIME BASE time scale eSI tens Panos 20 ns delay iiu uy 40 ns referenc n ei docere CNTR Press DISPLAY connect dots x odas De qu EPI Ea A tN on DISPLAY ences AVG Adjustments 3 105 13 20 MHz Reference Adjustments 3 106 Adjustments Press SHOW Press ATAV AN Markers iui peter oa en ec on Vanarker I tok atch edie Renten 800 mv 22 Wh dade alan uec eh a Roten 2 7V start place at 2 7V crossing stop place at next 2 7V crossing 2 1 Oscilloscope display should be a 10 MHz signal of TTL level less 22 23 24 25 than 0 8V to greater 2 7V See Figure 3 58 for a typical signal sto
260. ss coaxial cable with SMA male connectors do not use adapters between A23A5J2 and A23A3J1 Use coaxial cable HP Part Number 85680 20094 If not available remove A23FL2 FILTER and use between A23A5J2 and A23A3J1 to adjust comb generator Key in start FREQ 40 MHz Wait for CRT annotation at lower left of CRT display to indicate START 40 MHz Key in 1560 MHz Wait for CRT annotation at lower right of CRT display to indicate STOP 1560 MHz Key in REFERENCE LeveL 20 dBm ATTEN 0 dB LOG dB DIV 2 dB DISPLAY LINE 30 dBm Adjust A16 COMB DRIVE A16R31 for peak amplitude of CRT trace until comb teeth begin to wiggle Then adjust COMB DRIVE AI16R31 slightly counterclockwise until the lowest comb tooth near START frequency just begins to fall See Figure 3 84 for a typical comb tooth display See Figure 3 83 for location of adjustments UPPER LIMIT 22 dBm DISPLAY LINE AT 30 dBm LOWER LIMIT 3 6 dBm Figure 3 84 Comb Teeth Display Adjust COMB BIAS A23A4A2R6 for peak amplitude of CRT trace until comb teeth begin to wiggle Then adjust COMB BIAS A23A4A2R6 slightly counterclockwise until the lowest comb tooth near START frequency just begins to fall See Figure 3 84 for Adjustments 3 137 22 Comb Generator Adjustments 3 138 Adjustments 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 a typical comb tooth display See Figure 3 83 for location of adjustments
261. st 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record Step 8 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy pm FREQUENCY SPAN MARKER A Readout of 3 dB Bandwidth 3 600 MHz 2 MHz 1 100 MHz 500 kHz 330 0 kHz 200 kHz 110 0 kHz 50 kHz 33 00 kHz 20 kHz 11 00 kHz 5 kHz 2 3 300 kHz 2 kHz 1 100 kHz 500 Hz 330 Hz 200 Hz 110 Hz 100 Hz 33 0 Hz 100 Hz 15 0 Hz 4 18 Option 462 Test 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record Test 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record Steps 1 through 38 Impulse Bandwidth Accuracy Marker Readouts for Calculated Impulse Bandwidth High Frequency Low Frequency Minimum Actual Maximum Repetition Rate Repetition Rate 3 MHz i MHz i 300 kHz i 100 kHz i 30 kHz i 10 kHz i 3 kHz i kHz i Option 462 4 19 Test 4 Impulse and Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record Steps 39 through 46 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Frequency MARKER A Readout of 6 dB Span Bandwidth Minimum Actual Maximum 3 MHz i MHz i 300 kHz i L00 kHz i 30 kHz i 10 kHz i 3 kHz i kHz i 300 Hz i 100 Hz i 30 Hz i 10 Hz i 4 20 Option 462 Test 5 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity p o Table 2 19 Performance Test Record Test 5 6 dB Resolution Bandwi
262. sted without external test equipment Alternate Procedure by the following procedure 15 Press INSTR PRESET Start Up Time 16 Set SWEEP Time according to Table 2 7 Press MARKER NORMAL Measurement Rotate the DATA knob to place the marker on the left edge of the CRT display Key in SHIFT SINGLE 17 Press three times The Active Function Block reads SWEEP GEN followed by a measured sweep time This is the start up time Record it in Table 2 7 The start up time must be subtracted from the SWEEP GEN time measured in step 19 Adding the start up time to the time setting effectively subtracts it from the SWEEP GEN time 18 Press MARKER OFF Sweep Time 19 Press SHIFT RES BW three times and note the SWEEP GEN Measurement reading The limits for the SWEEP GEN reading are listed in Table 2 7 For example assume the start up time measured in step 17 was 700 us for a sweep time of 20 ms The limits for the SWEEP GEN readings would be 19 3 to 22 7 ms 20 Repeat steps 16 to 19 for each sweep time shown in Table 2 7 Table 2 7 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 ms Alternate Procedure swEEP TIME Sweep Gen Readout Measured Max 22 0 ms 55 0 ms 110 ms 550 ms 1 10 ms 11 0 ms 55 0 ms 10 0 ms 80 0 ms 2 12 Performance Tests 4 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Related Adjustment Specification Description Equipment Procedure 4 Resolut
263. stment Adjust 9 YLL so that vertical graticule lines just meet the horizontal graticule lines at the top and bottom of the graticule See Figure 3 90 for location of adjustment Repeat steps 6 and 7 until horizontal and vertical lines are adjusted so that they meet the edges of the graticule but do not overshoot Adjust A3A2R12 LL THRESH fully counterclockwise 10 Adjust A3A3R7 XSL so that horizontal graticule lines just meet the vertical graticule lines at the left and right sides of the graticule Adjust A3A3R8 YSL so that the vertical graticule lines just meet the horizontal graticule lines at the top and bottom of the graticule Repeat steps 10 and 11 until horizontal and vertical graticule lines are adjusted so that they meet at the edges of the graticule but do not overshoot 25 Digital Storage Display Adjustments Sample and Hold 13 Set LINE switch to STANDBY Balance Adjustments 14 Place A3A3 Line Generator on extender boards 15 Set LINE switch to ON Press INSTR PnEser 16 Key in RECORDER LOWER LEFT 0 Hz Press Q RECORDER UPPER RIGHT 1028 Hz 17 Connect oscilloscope to 18 Connect A3A3TP11 to oscilloscope External Trigger Input and adjust oscilloscope controls for display as shown in Figure 3 91 9 Adjust A3A2R50 X S amp H BAL for minimum dc offset between the level of the signal inside the two pulses to the signal level outside the two pulses Figure 3 91 sh
264. t 60 dB Bandwidth Measurement 60 dB Bandwidth Measurement Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Measurement Location of Bandwidth Adjustments Location of Bandwidth Adjustments RF Section Top View 02 RF Section Front View 0 RF Section Bottom View IF Section Top View SN 3001A and Below IF Section Top View SN 3004A and Above IF Section Front View 3 108 3 110 3 111 3 112 3 114 3 114 3 115 3 116 3 118 3 118 3 119 3 120 3 123 3 124 3 127 3 127 3 128 3 128 3 130 3 131 3 133 3 135 3 135 3 136 3 137 3 139 3 140 3 142 3 143 3 145 3 146 3 147 6 7 IF Section Bottom View Contents 7 Tables Contents E 2 1 Performance Test Cross Reference 2 2 2 Center Frequency Readout Error Test Record 2 5 2 3 Wide Span 2 1 2 4 Span Error 2 2 8 2 5 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 ms 2 11 2 6 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 s 112 2 7 Sweep Time Accuracy Sweep Times gt 20 ms Alternate Procedure x VL cl XX ox wk 2 12 2 8 Bandwidth Accuracy 2 14 2 9 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity 2 17 2 10 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty 2 19 2 11 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty
265. t 20005 Boa 50 OHM 00 BOO n OUTPUT 0 oe RF ING INPUT 00 oj oad 000 DIVIDER PROBE 000 0000 POWER i588 DIGITAL VOLTMETER FO ECET dang 9000 EIN L 3522285233 ge 011 ol EEEE Po pagal 000 INPUT POWER SENSOR SPECTRUM ANALYZER Devise Under Test Figure 3 56 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Setup Spectrum Analyzer HP 8566A B Digital Voltmeter DVM isis oun bana nh HP 3456A Frequency Synthesizer HP 3335A Power Meter HP 436A Power HP 8482 Digitizing Oscilloscope 54501 10 1 Divider Probe HP 10432A Adapters N m to 1250 0780 Type N to BNC 1250 1474 Cables BNC to SMB cable Snap On 2 required 85680 60093 Adjustments 3 103 13 20 MHz Reference Adjustments Procedure 3 104 Adjustments 1 8 9 Position instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3 56 and remove bottom cover Remove A16 20 MHz Reference and install on extenders See Figure 3 57 for the location of A16 components Set LINE switch to ON and press INSTR PRESET Set rear panel FREQ REFERENCE INT EXT switch to INT Disconnect cable 2 red from A16J1 Connect power meter to
266. tainty Test Table 2 12 IF Gain Uncertainty 10 dB Steps REFERENCE LEVEL Frequency VIDEO Bw Deviation dBm Synthesizer Hz Marker A Amplitude Amplitude dBm dB 0 100 0 ref 10 100 20 100 30 100 40 100 50 100 60 10 70 10 80 100 90 wo L 100 w dE 3 110 w js 120 0 _ 0 A D He hy REF 10 0 dim 10 08 REN CENTER 20 0000 MHz PES 1 kHz 100 Hz Figure 2 18 IF Gain Uncertainty Measurement Performance Tests 2 35 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test 2 dB Gain Steps 2 36 Performance Tests 13 14 Press INSTR PRESET RECALL 7 Set REFERENCE LEVEL to 1 9 dBm 15 Press MARKER OFF Set to 100 Hz 16 17 18 Set the frequency synthesizer for an output power level of 3 9 dBm Set the amplitude increment for 2 dB steps Press MARKER peak Set the analyzer REFERENCE LeveL and the frequency synthesizer amplitude according to Table 2 13 At each setting note the MKR A amplitude and record it in the table Table 2 13 IF Gain Uncertainty 2 dB Steps REFERENCE LeveL Frequency Deviation dBm Synthesizer MARKER A Amplitude Amplitude dBm dB 1 9 3 9 5 9 7 9 9 9 p REF 1 9 ATTEN 18 dB i ge CENTER 26 261 MHz RES BW 1 kHz V W 189 Hz SWP 580 mesc Figure 2 19 IF Gain Uncertainty Measurement 2 dB 0 1 dB Gain Steps 19 20 21 22 23 24 1
267. teris HP 436A Power Sensol st Ma LA e LEA hehe HP 8482A Detector 2 required HP 11664A 20 dB Attenuator HP 8491A Opt 020 Adapters N f to APC 3 5 f 1250 1745 Type N m to BNC f 2 required 1250 0780 Type N f to BNC f 2 required 1250 1474 APC 3 5 f to APC 3 5 0 1250 1749 Cables BNC to SMB Snap On Service Accessory 2 required 85680 60093 BNC 122 cm 48 in 3 required 10503A SMA tO Weed dies ER area SER 5061 5458 3 116 Adjustments Procedure 10 11 12 13 14 17 Pilot Second IF Amplifier Adjustments Position instrument on right side as shown in Figure 3 67 with bottom cover removed Set LINE switch to ON and press INST preset on HP 8568B DUT HP 8757A and HP 8340A B Connect 20 dB Attenuator and power splitter to RF OUTPUT of synthesized sweeper Connect one arm of power splitter to R input of scalar network analyzer through detector as shown in Figure 3 67 Set synthesized sweeper FREQUENCY MARKERS to 254 MHz and to 284 MHz Press 269 MHz on synthesized sweeper Connect Power Meter to the other power splitter port and set synthesized sweeper POWER LeveL for a Power Meter indication of 20 0 0 2 dBm Disconnect Power Meter and connect power splitter output to A9J1 using a
268. the voltage of the ac power source Failure to set the ac power input to the correct voltage could cause damage to the instrument when the ac power cable is plugged in HP 8568B Spectrum Analyzer Documentation Outline HP 8568B Installation and Verification Manual HP 8568B Operating and Programming Manual HP 8568B Performance Tests and Adjustments Manual HP 85680B RF Section Troubleshooting and Repair Manual HP 85662A IF Display Section Troubleshooting and Repair Manual Included with the HP Model 8568B Spectrum Analyzer are three manuals the Installation and Verification Manual the Operating and Programming Manual and the Performance Tests and Adjustments Manual General information installation specifications characteristics and operation verification Manual and remote operation including complete syntax and command description Accompanying this manual is the separate pocket sized Quick Reference Guide Electrical performance tests and adjustment procedures RF Section service information IF Display Section service information Contents 1 General Information Introduction 2 Instruments Covered by this Operation Option 462 Instruments 2 Option 857 Instruments 2 Performance Tests Introduction 0 000 ee Verification of Specifications Ca
269. tion Distortion Products Bandwidth Filter Slope Measurement Slope Detected Residual FM Peak to Peak Amplitude Measurement Line Related Sidebands Measurement Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup Fast Sweep Time Accuracy 20 ms Test Setup Fast Sweep Time Measurement 20 ms lst LO Output Amplitude Test Setup Frequency Reference Test Setup Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments Setup IF Display Section Low Voltage Adjustments SN 3001A and Below IF Display Section Low Voltage Adjustments SN 3004A aad ABOVE 2d us sev rks de Bw arn x IRA Location of RF Section Low Voltage Adjustments High Voltage Adjustment Setup Location of High Voltage Adjustments Location of Label and Test Point 2 43 2 46 2 48 2 50 2 52 2 53 2 57 2 58 2 58 2 61 2 62 2 63 2 64 2 66 2 68 3 25 3 26 3 26 3 27 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 31 Location of Final Display Adjustments on A1A2 3 33 3 34 3 35 3 36 3 37 3 38 3 39 3 40 3 41 3 42 3 43 3 44 3 45 3 46 3 47 3 48 3 49 3 50 3 51 3 52 3 53 3 54 3 55 Location of 1 2 Components CRT Cut Off a aoa a a e Waveform at 1 5 Discharging the CRT Post Accelerator Cable High Voltage Adjustment Setup Location of High V
270. tment Components affecting these adjustments are located in function blocks F H M N 0 P R and S of the 1 2 X Y Z Axis Amplifier Assembly schematic diagram The X Y Z Axis Amplifier Assembly is adjusted to compensate the CRT drive circuits for proper horizontal and vertical characteristics These preliminary adjustments are necessary only after replacement or repair of the 1 2 X Y Z Axis Amplifier Assembly For routine maintenance CRT replacement or minor repairs only Adjustment Procedure 4 Final Display Adjustments needs to be performed Be sure not to allow a fixed spot of high intensity to remain on the spectrum analyzer CRT A high intensity spot may permanently damage the CRT s phosphor coating Monitor the CRT closely during the following adjustment procedures If a spot occurs move it off screen by adjusting either the front panel INTENSITY control or the horizontal or vertical deflection position controls Digitizing Oscilloscope eerorxr ie ron m emer pes HP 54501A Pulse Function Generator HP 8116A 10 1 Divider Probe 10 MQ 7 5 pF 2 required HP 10432A Display Adjustment PC Board service accessory 85662 60088 Termination BNC 500 cece cece cece e ene e en eees HP 11593A Adapters Adapter BNC f to SMB f s ecd eese a 1250 1236 Adapter tee eL tee 1250 0781 Procedure X and Y Deflection Amplifier Pulse Response
271. to 90 dB The results should be lt 2 1 dB dB Set the frequency synthesizer for output amplitude to 10 dBm Key in the following analyzer settings utu f RM M ME 100 kHz gor n UR MENS COHEN AP NE 10 kHz SWEEP Press MARKER SEARCH MKR CF MKR REF LVL to center the signal on the display Key in the following analyzer settings FREQUENCY SPAN 0 Hz VIDEO BW Mr 1 Hz Press MARKER A Step the frequency synthesizer output amplitude from 10 dBm 80 dBm in 10 dB steps noting the MARKER A amplitude a negative value at each step and recording it in column 2 of Table 5 2 Allow several sweeps after each step for the video filtered trace to reach its final ampltitude Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for each setting to find the fidelity error 12 Option 857 Amplitude Fidelity Test 20 Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from 10 dB to 70 dB The results should be lt 0 6 dB dB 21 Subtract the greatest negative fidelity error from the greatest positive fidelity error for calibrated amplitude steps from 10 dB to 90 dB The results should be lt 1 5 dB dB Table 5 2 Log Amplitude Fidelity 10 kHz RBW Option 857 Frequency Fidelity Error Cumulative Cumulative Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER A Amplitude Column 2 Column 1 Amplitude Amplitude dB 0 to 80 d
272. to offset the signal peak 62 63 64 65 66 67 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments approximately 17 kHz to the left If unable to achieve a dip in signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A8R30 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Remove short from A4A8TP6 and short A4A8TP3 to ground Adjust A4A8C67 LC DIP for minimum amplitude of signal peak See Figure 3 43 for location of adjustment Key in PEAK MARKER 4 and adjust LC DIP again to offset the signal peak approximately 17 kHz to the left If unable to achieve a dip in signal amplitude increase or decrease value of A4A8R55 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Set LINE switch to STANDBY Reinstall A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter without extenders Remove short from A4A8TP3 Set LINE switch to ON Press INSTR PRESET Go back and repeat LC adjustments for both the A4A4 Bandwidth filter and the A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter AlOdB and A20dB Adjustments 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 Set step attenuators to 25 dB Key in CENTER Frequency 20 MHz 3 kHz 0 dB 1 kHz and_ rererence LEVEL 30 dBm Key in LOG enter dB DIV 1 dB then press MARKER SEARCH MARKER 4 Key in REFERENCE LeveL 20 dBm Set step attenuators to 15 dB Adjust A4A8R7 to align markers on display MARKER A level should indicate 0 00 dB See Figure 3 43 for location of adjustment Key in RE
273. tor Switching Uncertainty Test Test 8 Frequency Response Test Test 9 RF Gain Uncertainty Test Test 10 IF Gain Uncertainty Test 2 63 2 66 2 67 2 69 2 70 2 71 2 72 2 73 2 74 2 75 2 76 2 77 2 78 2 79 Contents l Contents 2 3 Test 11 Log Scale Switching Uncertainty Test Test 12 Amplitude Fidelity Test Test 13 Average Noise Level Test Test 14 Residual Responses Test Test 15 Spurious Responses Test Test 16 Residual FM Test 2 Test 17 Line Related Sidebands Test Test 18 Calibrator Amplitude Accuracy Test Test 19 Fast Sweep Time Accuracy Test 20 ms Test 20 lst LO Output Amplitude Test Test 21 Frequency Reference Error Test Adjustments Introduction ers Safety Considerations Equipment Required Adjustment Tools ll Factory Selected Components Related Adjustments Location of Test Points and Adjustments 1 Low Voltage Power Supply Adjustments 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3004A and Above 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below trac eoe at Ber Bed odes 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3004A and ADGVE u ai ha qe e doter re alk qois he Le 4 Final Dis
274. tor assembly even when the ac line cord is disconnected The CRT can hold a 18 kV dc charge for several days if the post accelerator cable is improperly disconnected Do not handle the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly or A1A11 High Voltage Multiplier until the following high voltage discharge procedure has been performed 1 Set the spectrum analyzer s LINE switch to STANDBY remove the ac line cords and remove the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator safety cover With the ac power cord disconnected voltages are still present which if contacted could cause serious personal injury In the following step a large arc of high voltage should be drawn Be careful 2 Locate the snap connector on the CRT post accelerator cable It is shown in Figure 3 11 as item 1 Using a long flat bladed screwdriver with an insulated handle carefully pry the connector loose but do not disconnect the cable a Using one hand remove the end of the cable labeled item 2 in Figure 8 1 1 As the end of the cable becomes free touch the end of the cable to the CRT s metal cover A large arc of high voltage should ground to the CRT cover The CRT is not discharged yet b Reconnect the CRT post accelerator cable and repeat the above step until high voltage arcs no longer appear 3 Leave the CRT post accelerator cable disconnected and remove the cover on the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator 4 Connect a jumper wire insulated wire and
275. two alligator clips between the shaft of a small screwdriver and the chassis ground lug on the inside of the high voltage shield Adjustments 3 37 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below 5 While holding the insulated handle of the screwdriver touch the grounded blade to the following connections Both brown wires going to the rear of the CRT from A1A3 via cable harness W21 b The yellow blue and orange wires in the same cable as a above c The top lead of each of the 11 large vertical capacitors on the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly 6 Connect the jumper wire from chassis ground to the black wire coming from the 1 11 High Voltage Multiplier at the wire s connection to 1 1 High Voltage 2 Q w21 aati Regulator A1A3T1 1 D BE 0 gy tt Figure 3 1 1 Discharging the CRT Post Accelerator Cable BD 10000000000 7 Remove all jumper wires The A1A3 High Voltage Regulator ALA1 High Voltage Multiplier and A1V1 CRT assemblies should now be discharged 8 A small bracket and screw secure the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly to the A1A10 Display Motherboard Assembly The bottom cover of the IF Display Section must be removed to gain access to this screw prior to removal
276. umination must fully disappear with the INTENSITY control set fully counter clockwise 4p running 1 10 0 V div offset 60 00 V 10 00 1 dc ECCO C Y EGERIT a 50 0 us div 1 f 50 v Figure 3 10 Waveform at 1 5 40 Replace the cover on the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly 4 The High Voltage Adjustment is completed If an A1A2 A1AA or AlA5 assembly has been repaired or replaced perform adjustment procedure 3 Preliminary Display Adjustment SN 3001A and Below and then adjustment procedure 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below If the A1A2 3 36 Adjustments Discharge Procedure for High Voltage and CRT Warning Warning Warning Warning 2 High Voltage Adjustment SN 3001A and Below 1 4 and 1 5 assemblies function properly and do not require compensation proceed directly to adjustment procedure 4 Final Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below The adjustment procedures in this manual do not require the removal or discharge of the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator or CRT assemblies However if for any reason the A1A3 High Voltage Regulator Assembly or the post accelerator cable must be removed the following procedure ensures the proper safety This procedure should be performed by qualified personnel only Voltages are present which if contacted could cause serious personal injury Approximately 4000 V dc is present on the A1A3 High Voltage Regula
277. ure 3 17 for the location of the A3A2 assembly Note 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below A1A5 4 2 R27 R28 C10 CAIN HF GAIN C11 000000000809010 2 5 Figure 3 18 A1A2 A1A4 and A1A5 Adjustment Locations 10 Set the Pulse Function Generator controls as follows E EUM IC RR DOR RUE IRSE RA RUE NORM Waveform deo tere ere qe d IRR Pu bacon pulse Frequency ERQ dug eb e 200 kHz WidthCWID ERAN 250 ns Amplitude 2 00V Offset OBS bru hoes 000 mV Il Connect the output of the Pulse Function Generator to J1 X input on the Display Adjustment PC board in the slot as shown in Figure 3 16 The Pulse Function Generator s output must be terminated with 50 ohms Use a BNC tee a 500 termination and a BNC female to SMB female adapter Install the 500 termination as close to the Display Adjustment PC Board as possible Adjustments 3 47 3 Preliminary Display Adjustments SN 3001A and Below 12 Set the oscilloscope controls as follows Press CHA
278. used with the A4A7 assembly Four 3 MHz bypass networks are required 21 4 MHz 3 MHz BYPASS BYPASS CAPACITOR RESISTOR CAPACITOR RESISTOR 100pf 31 69 047 uf 2 79 910pf RECEPTACLE RECEPTACLE RECEPTACLE RECEPTACLE gb15b Figure 3 94 Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configurations Table 3 8 Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for A4A4 and A4A8 21 4 M Hz Part Number Resistor 0698 7200 Capacitor 0160 4801 Capacitor 0160 6146 Receptacle 1251 3720 Table 3 9 Crystal Filter Bypass Network Configuration for A4A7 3 MHz Part vae n Part Number Resistor 2 70 0683 0275 Capacitor 0 047 F 4 0170 0040 Receptacle 1251 3720 Adjustments 3 151 Option 462 Introduction This chapter contains modified performance tests and adjustment procedures for Option 462 instruments When working on Option 462 instruments substitute the procedures in this chapter for the standard versions contained in chapters two and three For earlier Option 462 instruments HP 85662A serial prefixes below 3341A in which impulse bandwidths are specified use the tests and adjustment under Impulse Bandwidths The procedures included in this chapter are listed below 6 dB Bandwidths Performance Tests Test 4 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test 4 2 Test 5 6 dB Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test 4 10 Adjustment Procedure Adjustment 9 6 dB Bandwidth Adjustments 4 23 Impulse Bandwidths
279. ustments If A4A5R32 SG10 adjustment does not have sufficient range to perform adjustment in step 16 increase or decrease the value of A4A7R60 as necessary to achieve the proper adjustment range of A4A5 SG10 See Figure 3 39 for the location of A4A7R60 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values for A4A7R60 Repeat steps 3 through 16 if the value of A4A7R60 is changed Key in REFERENCE LeveL 50 dBm Set step attenuators to 45 dB Adjust A4A5R44 SG20 1 for MKR A level of OO dB See Figure 3 48 for location of adjustment Key in REFERENCE ever 70 dBm Set step attenuators to 65 dB Adjust A4A5R54 SG20 2 for MKR A level of OO dB See Figure 3 48 for location of adjustment Adjustments 3 89 10 Step Gain and 18 4 MHz Local Oscillator Adjustments 1 dB Gain Step Checks 3 90 Adjustments 22 23 24 25 26 2 28 Key in REFERENCE LEvEL 19 9 dBm Set step attenuators to 15 dB Press MARKER twice to establish a new reference Key in REFERENCE LEvEL 17 9 dBm Set step attenuators to 13 dB MKR A level as indicated by CRT annotation should be OO 0 5 dB If not increase or decrease the value of A4A5R86 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Key in REFERENCE LeveL 15 9 dBm Set step attenuators to 11 dB MKR A level should be OO 0 5 dB If not increase or decrease the value of A4A5R70 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Key in REFERENCE LeveL 11 9 dBm Set step attenuators to 7 d
280. usts 3 MHz bandwidth A4A9R61 1 MHz Adjusts 1 MHz bandwidth A4A9R62 300 kHz Adjusts 300 kHz bandwidth A4A9R65 10 kHz Adjusts 10 kHz bandwidth A4A9R66 3 kHz Adjusts 3 kHz bandwidth A4A9R73 1 kHz Adjusts 1 kHz bandwidth Option 067 A6A3A1C8 C8 Adjusts 32 1 4 MHz bandpass filter AGA3A1C9 C9 Adjusts 321 4 MHz bandpass filter 1 10 10 Adjusts 32 1 4 MHz bandpass filter A6A3A1C11 C11 Adjusts 32 1 4 MHz bandpass filter 1 12 12 Adjusts 32 1 4 MHz bandpass filter A6A3A1C23 10 7 MHz Adjusts 10 7 MHz notch filter NOTCH A6A9A1C29 TRIPLER Adjusts for maximum 300 MHz output MATCH A6A9AIRII CAL OUTPUT Adjusts output level of CAL OUTPUT A6A9A1R38 BALANCE Adiusts phase lock tune voltage level 3 8 Adjustments R eference D esignator A6A10R1 A6A10R9 A6A10R12 A6A10R15 A6A10R18 A6A10R21 A6A10R23 A6A10R25 A6A10R27 A6A10R29 A6A10R31 A6A10R34 A6A10R37 A6A10R40 A6AI10R41 A6A10R42 A6A10R70 A6A10R76 A6A10R81 A6A11R48 A6A11R51 A6A11R54 A6A11R57 A6A11R60 A6A11R66 A6A11R69 A6AI11R72 A6A11R75 A6A11R78 A6A11R84 A6A12R24 A6A12R25 A6A12R26 A6A12R63 A6A12R66 Table 3 2 Adjustable Components continued Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Function Name Number Adjusts 3 3 GHz oscillator drive current Adjusts mixer bias 18 6 to 22 GHz Adjusts mixer bias 12 5 to 18 6 GHz Adjusts mixer bias 5 8 to 12 5 GHz Adjusts mixer bias 2 to 5 8 GHz Adjusts IF gain 0 01 to 2 5 GHz
281. ver Do not over tighten the nut on the second converter 4 Connect the amplifier s input to A23A3J3 and the power meter to the amplifier s output 5 Adjust A23A3 2ND MIXER A23A3Z4 for maximum power meter indication See Figure 3 73 for location of adjustment 2052 5 MHz A23RF CONVERTER 2NDIF BPF 79 2ND LO Z4 Z2 Z3 L2 2ND M XER FREQ A23A3 75 26 27 14 78 710 7_ 2ND LO MHz 2ND MIXER SHIFT 2017 6 PILOT 2NDIF BPF Figure 3 73 Location of Second Converter Adjustments 6 Disconnect power meter and connect frequency counter to amplifier s output 7 Adjust A23A3 2ND LO FREQ A23A3Z9 for frequency counter indication of 1748 6 MHz fl O MHz See Figure 3 73 for location of adjustment 8 Disconnect frequency counter and reconnect power meter to amplifier s output 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 19 Second Converter Adjustments Readjust 2 2ND MIXER A23A3Z4 for maximum power indication Disconnect the amplifier s input from A23A3J3 and connect to A23A3J4 Adjust A23A3 PILOT 2ND MIXER A23A3Z8 for maximum power meter indication See Figure 3 73 for location of adjustment Disconnect power meter and connect frequency counter to amplifier s output Key in SHIFT to shift Second LO up and I 7 t
282. west minimum level greatest negative from the highest maximum least negative measurement recorded in steps indicated The result should not exceed 3 dB SIGNAL INPUT 1 100 Hz to 1 5 GHz from steps 15 16 25 42 or 48 Spec 3 dB Overall Maximum dBm Overall Minimum dBm Overall Deviation dBm 9 RF Gain Uncertainty Test Related Adjustment Specification Description Equipment Procedure 9 RF Gain Uncertainty Test Second Converter Adjustments RF gain uncertainty due to 2nd LO shift 1 0 dB uncorrected The analyzer s calibration signal is used as a stable input signal to observe the change in RF gain when the second LO is shifted in frequency None Required 1 Press INSTR PRESET 2 Key in spectrum analyzer settings as follows Mondeo 20 MHz 1 MHz Ted 7 dBm Fh OE Ni Ra nih ert gees 1 dB DIV 300 kHz 3 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 4 Adjust to position peak of signal trace 3 dB 3 divisions down from reference level top graticule line 5 Press D SEARCH MARKER A 6 Press 1 and read MARKER amplitude from display see Figure 2 16 This amplitude should be between 1 0 dB and 1 0 dB dB 7 Press SHiFT SIGNAL TRACK to return the second LO to automatic operation Performance Tests 2 31 9 RF Gain Uncertainty Test CENTER 20 0 z AN 1
283. y See Figure 3 38 for location of adjustments Remove crystal filter bypass network near C23 SYM Adjust A4A7C24 CTR for minimum amplitude of signal peak Adjust A4A7C23 SYM for best symmetry of signal Repeat adjustments to ensure that signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry See Figure 3 38 for location of adjustments Remove crystal filter bypass network near C32 SYM Adjust A4A7C33 CTR for minimum amplitude of signal peak Adjust A4A7C32 SYM for best symmetry of signal Repeat adjustments to ensure that signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry See Figure 3 38 for location of adjustments Remove crystal filter bypass network near C41 SYM Adjust A4A7C42 CTR for minimum amplitude of signal peak Adjust A4A7C41 SYM for best symmetry of signal Repeat adjustments to ensure that the signal is nulled and adjusted for best symmetry See Figure 3 38 for location of adjustments Signal should be centered on center graticule line on CRT display If signal is not centered go back to step 3 and repeat adjustments of each filter stage Filter Peak Adjust 18 19 20 2 22 23 24 Press INSTR PRESET Key in SWEEP time 20 ms FREouENcv span Hz RES BW 10 Hz REFERENCE LEvEL 20 dBm Set the frequency synthesizer for 21 400 MHz at an amplitude level of 25 0 dBm Disconnect cable 97 white violet from A4A8J1 and connect output of the frequency synthesizer to A4A8J1 using BNC to SMB sna
284. y Standard at the end of each 24 hour interval until the specified aging rate of 1 mHz day 1x10E9 day is achieved Reading 3 mHz Reading 4 mHz Reading 5 mHz Reading 6 mHz Reading 7 ____ mHz Reading 8 _____ mHz Reading 9 ________ mHz Reading 10 ____ mHz Position the spectrum analyzer on its right side as shown in Figure 3 52 and remove the bottom cover Typically the frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard will shift slightly when the spectrum analyzer is reoriented Record this shifted frequency of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard Adjustments 3 97 12 Time Base Adjustment SN 2840A and Below also 3217A05568 and Above 3 98 Adjustments Note 16 Reading 11 mHz Subtract the shifted frequency reading in step 11 from the last recorded frequency in step 10 This gives the frequency correction factor needed to adjust the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard Frequency Correction Facto ______ mHz On the Frequency Counter select a 1 second gate time by pressing 1 GATE TIME The Frequency Counter should now display the difference between the frequency of the INPUT A signaland 10 0 MHz with a resolution of 0 01 Hz 10 mHz Remove the two adjustment cover screws from the A27 10 MHz Quartz Crystal Oscillator See Figure 3 53 for the location of the A27 10 MHz Frequency Standard Do not use a metal adjustment tool to tune an oven controlled crystal oscillator OCXO The metal
285. y Test Equipment Frequency HP 3335A Adapter Type N m to HP 1250 0780 Procedure Log Fidelity 1 Set the frequency synthesizer for an output frequency of 20 000 MHz and an output power level of 10 dBm Set the amplitude increment for 10 dB steps 2 Connect equipment as shown in Figure 2 21 3 Press INSTR preset on the analyzer Key in analyzer settings as follows CENTER FREQUENCY ixl e penta 20 MHz FREQUENCY SPAN 50 kHz n 10 dBm 4 Press MARKER PEAK SEARCH MKR CF MKR REF LVL to center the signal on the display 5 Key in the following analyzer settings FREQUENCY SPAN E Mr RE E E EE EEA O Hz VIDEO BW e IM ee nat DESI EDEN 1 Hz 6 Press MARKER A Step the frequency synthesizer output amplitude from 10 dBm to 80 dBm in 10 dB steps noting the MARKER A amplitude a negative value at each step and recording it in column 2 of Table 2 16 Allow several sweeps after each step for the video filtered trace to reach its final amplitude see Figure 2 22 7 Subtract the value in column 1 from the value in column 2 for each setting to find the fidelity error Table 2 16 Log Amplitude Fidelity Frequency Fidelity Error Cumulative Cumulative Synthesizer Calibrated MARKER A Amplitude Column 2 Column 1 Amplitude Amplitude dB dB O to 80 d
286. y in RES BW sl kHz and DISPLAY BINE ENTER h e DATA knob place the display line at the signal trace Key in 10 Hz Adjust the instrument front panel FREQ ZERO control for maximum signal amplitude on the CRT display Adjust A4A7R30 10 Hz AMPTD and A4A7R41 10 Hz AMPTD equal amounts to set the signal level the same as the reference level set in step 39 See Figure 3 38 for location of 10 Hz AMPTD adjusts Repeat steps 37 through 42 until no further adjustment is required 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments Reference Related Performance Tests Description 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments IF Display Section A4A4 Bandwidth Filter A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter IF Gain Uncertainty Test Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty test Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test First the LC Filters 100 kHz to 3 MHz bandwidths on the A4A4 Bandwidth Filter are adjusted The crystal filter poles 3 kHz to 30 kHz bandwidths are then adjusted for center and symmetry by bypassing all but one pole at a time and adjusting the active pole Next the LC filters and the crystal filter poles on the A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter are adjusted in the same manner as on the A4A4 Bandwidth Filter Last the 10 dB and 20 dB attenuators on the A4A8 Attenuator Bandwidth Filter are adjusted for the proper amount of attenuation This is done by connecting the CAL OUTPUT signal to the RF INPUT through two step attenuators
287. y in cENrER FREQUENCY 29 98 MHz MARKER Peak seEancH to position a second marker at the peak of the 29 98 MHz third order intermodulation product The response should be below the display line gt 70 dB below the input signals TOI Distortion 10 KHz separation 30 MHz dBm On the synthesized sweeper press PoweR LeveL and decrease the amplitude of the 30 MHz signal by 13 0 dB from the current setting On the frequency synthesizer key in FREqueNcy 29 MHz ampLitubE and then decrease the amplitude of the 29 MHz signal by 13 0 dB from the current setting Set the controls of the spectrum analyzer as follows CENTER FREQUENCY 2122 eto eS ade 29 MHz FREQUENCY 500 Hz REFERENCE LEVEL e ace OS ex cem ns 33 dBm MARKER its de m Moto gie qd odi d em OFF On the spectrum analyzer key in DISPLAY LINE 105 dBm MARKER PEAK search to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 29 MHz signal On the frequency synthesizer adjust the signal amplitude for a marker indication of 33 0 dBm On the spectrum analyzer key in CENTER Frequency 30 MHz MARKER Peak search to position a marker on the peak of the displayed 30 MHz signal On the synthesized sweeper adjust the signal power level for a marker indication of 33 0 dBm total signal power of 40 dBm at the input mixer with 10 dB of input attenuation On the spectrum analyzer key in MARKER CENTER
288. ystal filter bypass network from between A4A8TP1 and A4A8TP2 Adjust A4A8C29 CTR to center signal on center graticule line Adjust A4A8C13 SYM for best symmetry of signal See Figure 3 44 for location of adjustments If unable to adjust A4A8C13 SYM for satisfactory signal symmetry increase or decrease value of A4A8C14 Refer to Table 3 3 for range of values Press MARKER PEAK search and MARKER Key in Frequency span 10 kHz Adjustments 3 81 8 21 4 MHz Bandwidth Filter Adjustments 3 82 Adjustments 45 Adjust A4A8R40 XTAL to align markers on display MARKER A level should indicate 1 00 X See Figure 3 44 for location of adjustment LC Dip Adjustments 46 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Refer to the Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Performance Test and check all bandwidth amplitudes If amplitude of 300 kHz bandwidth is low but amplitude of 100 kHz and 1 MHz bandwidths are within tolerance LC DIP adjustments must be performed If all bandwidth amplitudes are within tolerance do not perform the following adjustments Set LINE switch to STANDBY 48 Disconnect cable 97 white violet from A4A8J1 and connect to A4A6J 1 Remove A4A4 Bandwidth Filter and install on extenders Set LINE switch to ON Press INSTR PRESET Key in center FREQUENCY 20 MHz RES BW 100 kHz FREQUENCY span MHz 0 dB and LOG enter dB DIV 2 dB Short A4A4TP3 to ground
289. z to 3 MHz The 60 dB points for the 10 Hz bandwidth setting are also measured The CAL OUTPUT provides a stable signal for the measurements Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test must be performed before this test None Required 1 Press INSTR PRESET 2 Connect CAL OUTPUT to SIGNAL INPUT 2 3 Key in analyzer control settings as follows vsti Se taka E ote os teer AM 20 MHz re cent eects 20 MHz om 3 MHz Fey nee 100 Hz SEEDS cute ad sneer utis es 4 Press MARKER and position marker at peak of signal trace Press MARKER 4 and position movable marker 60 dB down from the stationary marker on the positive going edge of the signal trace the MARKER A amplitude readout should be 60 00 dB 1 00 dB It may be necessary to press SWEEP and to adjust so that both 60 dB points are displayed see Figure 2 7 5 Press MARKER 4 and positive movable marker 60 dB down from the signal peak on the negative going edge of the signal trace the MARKER A amplitude readout should be 00 dB 0 50 dB Performance Tests 2 15 5 Resolution Bandwidth Selectivity Test 2 16 Performance Tests 6 oo 10 Read the 60 dB bandwidth for the 3 MHz resolution bandwidth setting from the MARKER A frequency readout see Figure 2 7 and record the value in Table 2 9 Vary spectrum analyzer settings according to Table 2 9 Measure the 60 dB
290. zed sweeper 21 Slope Compensation Adjustments Note At this sweep time some trace discontinuities are common 14 Adjust A22R66 TILT for best flatness clockwise rotation increases the power slope and trigger two sweeps on the synthesized sweeper See Figure 3 81 for the location of A22R66 Compare the resultant trace with the specification Continue adjusting A22R66 until best flatness is achieved Note Best flatness is achieved when the maximum number of frequency points are on or near the 14 dBm reference FREQUENCY CONTROL R66TILT Figure 3 81 Location of A22R66 TILT Adjustment 15 Press TRACE A VIEW PEAK SEARCH and MARKER DELTA Using the data knob place the marker on the lowest power peak The marker s absolute value should be less than 2 dB 16 See Figure 3 82 for examples of typical displays of frequency response correctly and incorrectly adjusted FREQUENCY RESPONSE LIMITS lt 2 dB i PROPERLY MALADJUSTED Figure 3 82 Slope Compensation Adjustment W aveforms Adjustments 3 135 eee 22 Comb Generator Adjustments Reference RF Section A23 RF Converter A16 20 MHz Reference Description The output of the Pilot First Converter is connected to the signal input of the Second C

HP 8568B User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents